Sunteți pe pagina 1din 185

INTRODUCTORY COURSE

LESSON I
ENGLISH ALPHABET (alfabetul englez)

VOWELS (vocale)

COMBINATIONS OF VOWELS (combnaii de vocale)

GRAMMAR
THE ARTICLE (articolul)
Type of article

singular

plural

examples

indefinite
definite

a (an)

a man, a student, an economist


the man, the students, the economist

the

Examples: This is a bag. Give me the bag, please.


This is a dog. It is a black dog. The dog is black.
That is a cap. The cap is red. It is a red cap.
EXERCISES
1. Read the following words aloud (Citii urmtorele cuvinte).
cake, name, pane, game, Jane, lane, same, dame, tame, stage;
bat, flat, cat, rat, fat, sat, sad, mad, Tad, bad;
large, far, car, star, Mark, shark, dark, spark, card, park;
note, vote, cote, rope, hope, role, stole, whole, mole, sole;
hot, not, sot, dot, lot, mot, pot, pop, hop, God;
fork, more, sore, core, tore, fore, bore, lore, gore, core;
pen, hen, Ben, men, bed, red, fed, let, set, met;
term, firm, fur, blur, germ, stir, occur, sir, bur, hurt;
here, there, mere;
fine, mine, shine, line, tine, pine, my, sky, by, fly;
sit, bit, fit, tip, trip, stick, Nick, flip, sick, zip;
fire, tire, dire, lire, sire;
tune, mute, acute;
cup, but, cut, sun, sum, sup, run, suffer, such, much, summer.
2. Read and compare (Citii i comparai).
[i:]

dee deed deep


be been beef
me meed meet
fee feed feet. Tell Ben.

Meet Ted.
Meet Pete.
Tell Pete.
Meet me.
Tell me.
2

3. Work on the model (Lucrai dup model).


Ex: [mi:t] meet
[di:p], [ki:p], [st] [sli:p], [si:], [tp], [ft], [pe], [me], [fju:], [ku:l], [bo], [flo:], [kraun], [buk]
4. Use the indefinite and the definite article with the following nouns. Translate them
(Folosii articolul hotrt i nehotrt cu urmtoarele cuvinte. Traducei-le).
match, page, patch, dish, cage, mass, boy, cup, sum, fire, tune, fly, line, hat, stick, firm, man, hat,
map, rat.
5. Write in transcription the following words (Scriei n transcripie urmtoarele cuvinte).
name, day, line, style, fine, deep, beat, fit, deep, stale, sad, fail.

LESSON II
CONSONANTS HAVING TWO PRONUNCIATIONS
(consoane avnd dou pronunri)
consonant

c
g
s
x

position

pronunciation

examples

1. nainte de e, i, y;
2. nainte de a, o, u i de toate consoanele de la sfritul cuvintelor.
3. nainte de e, i, y; (excepie get)
4. nainte de a, o, u i de toate consoanele de la sfritul cuvintelor.
1. la nceputul i la sfritul cuvntului
nainte de consoanele surde;
2. ntre vocale i la sfritul cuvntului
dup vocale i consoane sonore.
1. nainte de consoane i la sfritul
cuvntului;
2. nainte de o vocal accentuat.

[s]
[k]
[d]
[g]

cent, pencil, icy


cap, come, cup,
black
page, cage
good, green, big

[s]

sit, student, lists

[z]

please, ties, pens

[ks]

text, six

[gz]

exam, example

COMBINATIONS OF CONSONANTS
(combinaii de consoane)
consonants

sh
ch
tch
ck
th

position

pronunciation

examples

n orice poziie.

[]

she, ship, wash

n orice poziie.

[t]

chess, cheese

dup vocalele scurte.

[t]

match

dup vocalele scurte.

[k]

black, Nick

1. la nceputul cuvintelor semnificative


i la sfritul cuvintelor;

[]

thick, myth,
think, path

2. la nceputul pronumelor, cuvintelor


auxiliare i ntre vocale.

wh

1. la nceputul cuvntului, nainte de


toate vocalele, n afar de o;
2. nainte de o.

qu

nainte de vocale.

ng
nk
wr

[]
they, this, bathe
[w]

[h]

what, when,
why
who, whose,
whom

[kw]

question, quick,
quote

dup vocale la sfritul cuvntului.

[]

long, sing

dup vocale.

[k]

thank, think

[r]

write

la nceputul cuvntului nainte de vocale.

COMBINATIONS OF VOWELS AND CONSONANTS


(combinaii de vocale i consoane)
letters

position

pronunciation

examples

al

1. nainte de k ntr-o silab accentuat;

[o:]

chalk, talk

2. nainte de celelalte consoane ntr-o


silab accentuat.

[o:l]

wall, also

wo

nainte de consoane ntr-o silab accentuat.

[w:]

work

wa

1. nainte de consoanele finale n afar


de r i combinaiile de consoane;

[wo]

want

[wo:]

warm, war

[a]

light, tight,
night

2. nainte de r.

igh

n orice poziie.

GRAMMAR
TO BE (PRESENT SIMPLE)
affirmative

negative

interrogative

I am (Im)
You are (Youre)
He (she, it) is (Hes)
We are (Were)
You are (Youre)
They are (Theyre)

I am not (Im not)


You are not (You arent)
He (she, it) is not (He isnt)
We are not (We arent)
You are not (You arent)
They are not (They arent)

Am I?
Are you?
Is he (she, it)?
Are we?
Are you?
Are they?

Examples: I am a student. I am not a student. Am I a student?


Nick is my friend. Nick isnt my friend. Is Nick my friend?
Ann and Tess are friends. Ann and Tess arent friends. Are Ann and Tess friends?
TEXT
Find my pen. Send me my pen. Meet me. Send Ted five ties. Send Tess nine pens.
Tell Pete my name. My name is Ann. Send Pete my map. Send Tess my map and my plan.
I am a student. You are a student too. We are friends. She is my sister. They are good economists.
Vocabulary
a pen - un stilou
a tie - o cravat
a name - un nume
my meu
a map - o hart
a plan - un plan

to find - a gsi
to send - a trimite
to meet - a ntlni
to tell - a spune
five - cinci
nine - nou (num)

EXERCISES
1. Read the following words aloud (Citii urmtorele cuvinte).
century, pencil, cent, ice, vice, mice;
cup, come, cap, black, back, car, cat, Nick, lack, sac, cut;
page, cage, mage, image, rage, gem, germ;
good, God, green, dig, big, gone, grain, gun, dog, fog;
sit, sat, sun, student, list, mist, best, stir, sin, sort, sport;
please, ties, cease, disease, dies;
text, six, fax, expert, excellent, extract, taxi;
2. Work on the model (Lucrai dup model).
Ex: [p] ship
[o:t], [ep], [ek], [tn], [tos], [bk], [blk], [k], [n], [k], [], [e], [em], [en],
[t], [wo:t], [wen], [wa], [kwat], [kwi:n], [kwen], [so], [lo], [rat], [to:k], [to:k], [o:l],
[to:l], [wo:m], [wo:], [w:d].
3. Read the sentences (Citii propoziiile).
This is a bag. The bag is big. It is a big bag.
This is a cap. The cap is black. It is a black cap.
This is a thin pencil. Give me the pencil, please.
4. Insert the right article (Folosii articolul potrivit).
1. This is ___ cap. ___ cap is black. 2. This is ___ match. It is ___ thin match. That is ___ thick
match. 3. ___ film is fine. 4. This is ___ pen. ___ pen is black. 5. Pete, give me ___ pen, please.
6. Tess, take that pencil. Give me ___ pencil, please. It is ___ bad pencil.
5. Insert the right form of the verb to be (Folosii forma potrivit a verbului to be).
1. I ___ a student. 2. My friend ___ a good student. 3. We ___ in the classroom now. 4. Nick ___
my best friend. 5. They ___ economists. 6. You ___ the first student in our group. 7. She ___ my
sister.
6. Translate (Traducei).
1. Aceasta este o cas. Casa este mare. 2. Prietenul meu este student. El nva la universitate. 3.
Acest creion este negru. 4. Aceast geant este rea. Dai-mi geanta ceea, v rog. 5. Dai-mi un
chibrit, v rog. 6. Acesta este un stilou. Acesta este un stilou negru. Acest stilou este negru. 7.
Acest apartament este curat. 8. Dai-i lui Tom aceste creioane. 9. Ben, ia acest stilou albastru. 10.
Sora mea este profesoar.
7. Write the transcription of the following words (Scriei transcripia urmtoarelor
cuvinte).
a) film, bag, match, cap, page, black, big, this, that, Jane, give, take;
b) still, cape, cent, fill, gap, gem, chain, latch, lack, theme, need, best, pack.

LESSON III
NUMERALS (numerale)
Cardinal numerals (numerale cardinale)
spelling
pronunciation
zero
[zirou]
one
[wn]
two
[tu:]
three
[ri:]
four
[fo:]
five
[fav]
six
[sks]
seven
[sevn]
eight
[et]
nine
[nan]
ten
[ten]
eleven
[levn]
twelve
[twelv]
thirteen
[:ti:n]
fourteen
[fo:ti:n]
fifteen
[ffti:n]
sixteen
[sksti:n]
seventeen
[sevnti:n]
eighteen
[eti:n]
nineteen
[nanti:n]
twenty
[twent]
twenty-one
[twentwn]
thirty
[:t]
thirty-one
[:twn]
forty
[fo:t]
fifty
[fft]
sixty
[skst]
seventy
[sevnt]
eighty
[et]
ninety
[nant]
one hundred
[wnhndrd]
one hundred and
[wnhndrd ndwn]
one
200
two hundred
[tu:hndrd]
1 000
one thousand
[wnauznd]
2 000
two thousand
[tu:auznd]

number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
30
31
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
101

1 000 000

one million

[wnmljn]

Ordinal numerals (numerale ordinale)


number
spelling
pronunciation
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
IX
X
XI
XII
XIII
XIV
XV
XVI
XVII
XVIII
XIX
XX
XXI
XXX
XXXI
XL
L
LX
LXX
LXXX
XC
C
CI
CC
M
MM

first
second
third
fourth
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
eleventh
twelfth
thirteenth
fourteenth
fifteenth
sixteenth
seventeenth
eighteenth
nineteenth
twentieth
twenty-first
thirtieth
thirty-first
fortieth
fiftieth
sixtieth
seventieth
eightieth
ninetieth
one hundredth
one hundred and
first
two hundredth
one thousandth
two thousandth

[f:st]
[seknd]
[rd]
[fo: ]
[ff]
[sks]
[sevn]
[et]
[nan]
[ten]
[levn]
[twelv]
[:ti:n]
[fo:ti:n]
[ffti:n]
[sksti:n]
[sevnti:n]
[eti:n]
[nanti:n]
[twent]
[twentf:st]
[:t]
[:tf:st]
[fo:t]
[fft]
[skst]
[sevnt]
[et]
[nant]
[wnhndrd]
[wnhndrd n
f:st]
[tu:hndrd]
[wnauznd]
[tu:auznd]

one millionth

[wnmljn]

TEXT
My name is Gabriel. I am 17. I am from Bli. I am a student. I study economics. I have many
friends.
This is my flat. It is large and clean. My flat is in Bli. Bli is a beautiful town. I like my town.
Is Bli a town? Yes, it is. Is it a beautiful town? Yes, it is.
*
*
*
Give me an ink-stand and a pen, please. My pen is bad.
7

Give me that red pencil, please.


Jack, take text six and read page seven.
Vocabulary
economics economie
a student - un/o student()
a friend - un/o prieten()
a flat - un apartament
a town - un ora
to study - a studia

to like - a place
large - mare
clean - curat()
beautiful - frumos(oas)
from - din, de la

EXERCISES
1. Read the following words aloud (Citii urmtorele cuvinte).
a text, a city, an exam, an ink-stand;
the text, the city, the exam, the ink-stand.
risk, red, ripe, read, rest, rhythm, rally;
farm, lark, star, cart, far, darn, mark, arm, army;
hand, hay, hill, hate, heap, help, hide;
yes, yell, easy, daddy, yet, yelp, my, by, myth;
next, text, exam, six, sixty.
2. Read and compare (Citii i comparai).
[]

[ - n]

[ - k]

bang ring
sang sing
fang thing

bang ban
fang fan
sing sin
thing thin

bang bank
sang sank
sing sink
thing think

3. Make the following sentences interrogative (Facei urmtoarele propoziii interogative).


1. My tie is black. 2. His flat is large and clean. 3. His ink-stand is blue. 4. My pen is bad. 5. His
hat is black. 6. Jane is in London. 7. I am an economist.
4. Insert the right article (Folosii articolul potrivit).
1. This is ___ black ink-stand. 2. ___ pen is red and ___ ink-stand is black. 3. Give Tess ___ pen
and ___ pencil. 4. Read ___ page ten. 5. Chiinu is ___ fine town. 6. Send Jane ___ text. 7. This
is his ___ flat. 8. Give me ___ black pencil, please. 9. This is ___ text. Read ___ text, please. 10.
Ben, take ___ text six and read ___ page five.
5. Answer the questions (Rspundei la ntrebri).
1.
2.
3.
4.

Is this a pen?
Is this pen red?
Is that a pencil?
Is his name Nick?
8

5. Is this map large?


6. Is this an ink-stand?
7. Is this a bag?
8. Is this flat clean?
9. Is this bag big?
10. Is Bli a town?
6. Use the right form of the verb to be (Folosii forma corerct a verbului to be).
1. This ___ a note. 2. These texts ___ long and those texts ___ short. 3. ___ this book good? 4.
Those doors ___ black. 5. That pencil ___ not black. It ___ red.
7. Make these sentences negative (Transformai la forma negativ).
1. This tie is good. 2. That text is long. 3. Those bags are big. 4. These rooms are clean. 5. That
pencil is short. 6. His ties are black.
8. Translate (Traducei).
1. Acest apartament este mare. 2. Numele lui este Pete? Da. 3. Luai textul numrul ase. 4.
Citii acest text. 5. Citii a asea pagin. 6. Luai trei cri. 7. Dai-i lui Gabriel aceast climar.
8. Acesta este creionul lui? Da. 9. Acest stilou este rou. 10. Acest ora este frumos. 11. Eu sunt
primul n grup. 12. Care este numrul apartamentului tu? Numrul zece. 13. Unde este
apartamentul Anei? 14. Ia al doilea text i traduce-l. 15. El este al doilea la citit (at reading).

LESSON IV
TEXT
Tom is my friend. He is a doctor. I am not a doctor, I am a student. Tess is not a student. She is a
teacher. We are in my room now. We are at the table. Tess, give me three cups, please. Thank
you. Tom, put a spoon into your cup.
Are you a student. Yes, I am.
Is your friend a student too? No, he isnt. He is a doctor.
Is Tess a doctor or a teacher? She is a teacher.
Vocabulary
a friend - un prieten
a doctor - un medic
a student - un student
a teacher - un profesor (o profesoar)
a room - o camer
a table - o mas

a cup - o ceac
a spoon - o lingur
to put - a pune
to thank - a mulumi
now - acum

GRAMMAR
TO HAVE (PRESENT SIMPLE)
affirmative
negative

interrogative

I have (Ive)
You have (Youve)
I have not (I havent)
Have I?
He (she, it) has
You have not (You havent)
Have you?
We have (Weve)
He (she, it) has not (He hasnt)
Has he (she, it)?
You have (Youve)
We have not (We havent)
Have we?
They
have
You have not (You havent)
Have you?
(Theyve)
They have not (They havent)
Have they?
Examples: I have a book. I havent a book. Have I a book?
Nick has a friend. Nick hasnt a friend. Has Nick a friend?
Ann and Tess have lessons. Ann and Tess havent lessons. Have Ann and Tess
lessons?

10

PREPOSITIONS INDICATING PLACE AND DIRECTION


(prepoziii care indic locul i direcia)

EXERCISES
1. Read the following words aloud (Citii urmtorele cuvinte).
note, lote, lone, nod, code, cot, tone, cope, dot, sock, pope, doll, hot, hop, bone;
tool, moon, look, doom, took, fool, cool, shook, loop, cook, choose, hook;
sport, torn, corn, gorge, cork, or, fort;
lead, steel, meat, bet, lest, Pete, tip, tiny, type, myth, mice, stay, plain;
star, farm, cart, cell, cod, sing, cling, bank, rank, spin.
2. Insert the right form of the verb to have (Folosii forma potrivit a verbului to
have).
1. Ben ____ a firend. 2. I ____ an interesting book. 3. ____ this magazine? Yes, I ____ . 4. We
____ a new student in our group. 5. Nick ____ a new car. 6. They ____ an English lesson now. 7.
____ I a sister?
3. Insert the right form of the verb to be (Folosii forma potrivit a verbului to be).
1. He ___ a teacher. 2. I ___ in my room now. 3. ___ Tom and Tess students? Yes, they ___. 4.
We ___ students. 5. She ___ a doctor. 6. ___ you a teacher? No, I ___. 7. ___ they economists?
No, they ___ . 8. This ___ a cup. It ___ yellow. 9. The spoons ___ on the table. 10. The table ___
in the room.
4. Use the right preposition and translate (Folosii prepoziia adecvat i traducei).
1. Ted, take that long pencil ___ ___ your bag and put it ___ the table. 2. The black pen is ___
the table. The brown pen is ___ my bag. The red pencil is ___ that book. 3. Take these books ___
the table, please. 4. Go ___ the blackboard, please. 5. Close your book and put it ___ your bag. It
is ___ the bag now. 6. Pete, go ___ the door and close it. 7. Ben, put a spoon ___ your cup. 8. Go
___ ___ the room, please! 9. Take a pen ___ that student, please. 10. Fred is __ his room now.
11. Jane, take your pencil ___ the table and put it ___ your bag. Now take it ___ ___ your bag
and put it ___ the book. 12. Go ___ your table and take your book ___ ___ your bag. 13. Look
___ the blackboard! Now go ___ the blackboard. 14. Take the cup ___ Jane and put it ___ the
table.
11

5. Answer the questions (Rspundei la ntrebri).


1. Are you a student?
2. Is your friend a teacher or a doctor?
3. Is this boy my friend?
4. Is he a teacher?
5. Am I a doctor?
6. Is Pete or Ted your friend?
7. Is your sister in the room?
8. Are they friends?
9. Is Nick a good student?
10. Is this a cup or a spoon?
11. Has he a sister?
12. Have you a friend?
13. Have I a new book?
6. Make these sentences negative (Punei propoziiile la forma negativ).
1. Those men are doctors. 2. Kate is a teacher. 3. The students are in that room. 4. My friend is a
student. 5. These books are good. 6. Those cups are brown. 7. These pencils are short. 8. They
are friends. 9. Nick has a nice flat. 10. They have many friends.
7. Translate (Traducei).
a) 1. Suntei profesor? Nu. Eu nu sunt profesor. Eu sunt student. 2. Fred, d acestui biat cartea
ta, te rog. 3. Aceast cravat este galben sau neagr? Ea este galben. 4. Luai cetile de pe
mas ceea. Punei, v rog, cetile pe aceast mas. Mulumesc. 5. Punei aceast carte n geanta
dumneavoastr. 6. Luai, v rog, lingura de la acest biat. 7. Pete este medic. El este prietenul
meu. El este un medic bun. 8. Prietenul vostru este medic sau profesor?
b) Numele meu este Nick. Eu sunt student. Fred este prietenul meu. El tot este student. El este un
student bun. Notele lui sunt bune. Acum ne aflm n apartamentul lui. Apartamentul lui este mare
i curat.
Fred, d-mi, te rog, stiloul i climara.
Poftim, ia stiloul i climara.
Mulumesc, Fred.
Nick, ia te rog cartea mea de pe mas, deschide-o, gsete al treilea text i citete-l.
Acest text este scurt sau lung?
El este scurt.
8. Write the transcription of the following words (Scriei transcripia urmtoarelor
cuvinte).
a) cup, cube, but, nut, mute, butter, rung, huge;
b) now, how, yellow, bow, town, vow, window;
c) gown, down, out, ounce, foul, noun, scout, count.

12

LESSON V
TEXT
We are at the university. We have an English class now. This is our classroom. Its small, but
its light and clean. The walls of our classroom are blue. Its floor is brown. Its ceiling is white.
The door and the windows are white too. We are at the table. Its brown. The chairs are brown
too. We have a good teacher.
Jack, come to the blackboard, please. Dont take your book! Take a piece of chalk and write
the new English words on the blakboard. Thank you. Write four questions at home.
*

What is this? Its a newspaper.


What kind of newspaper is it?
Its an English newspaper.
Is it interesting?
Yes, it is.
Vocabulary

English - englez()
a class - o lecie
a classroom - o clas
a wall - un perete
a floor - o podea
a ceiling - un tavan
a door - o u
a window - o fereastr
a chair - un scaun
a blackboard - o tabl
a piece - o bucat
chalk cret
a word - un cuvnt
a question - o ntrebare

at home - acas
small - mic()
light - luminos(oas)
clean - curat()
new - nou()
blue - albastru()
brown - brun()
white - alb()
to take - a lua
to write - a scrie
but - dar (conj.)
a newspaper - un ziar
interesting - interesant()
What kind of... ? - Ce fel de... ?
GRAMMAR

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES (adjectivele posesive)


singular
my
your
his, her, its

plural
our
your
their

Example: I have a book. This is my book; You have a pen. This is your pen;
He (she) has a car. This is his (her) car. Autumn is a nice season. I like its beauty.
We have a friend. This is our friend. They have a house. This is their house.

13

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES (propoziii interogative)


My name is John. Is my name John?

I am a student. Am I a student?

I have a friend. Have I a friend?

Nick has a book. Has Nick a book?


EXERCISES

1. Read the following words aloud (Citii urmtorele cuvinte).


term, first, bird, third, stern, turn, fur, curl, curt, serf, curb, herb;
whale, wharf, wheat, ward, when, whether, which, whiff, whip, whirl, warn, whole, warp, whose,
why;
cat, bunch, pinch, rice, will, chest, sister, frost, lick, sly, pace, lunch, rib, from, luck;
cry, chat, shy, chill, sky, hale, rose, spine, till, spider, vine, sniff, maze, pan, reader;
leer, beer, peer, veer, teem, fee, wee, bee, feel;
fire, mire, tire, shire, care, fare, mare, stare, bare, rare;
2. Insert the right article if necessary (Folosii articolul potrivit unde este nevoie).
1. What colour is ___ floor of your room? 2. Write ___ question on ___ blackboard. 3. Open ___
window, please. 4. Close ___ door, please. 5. Write ___ new words at home. 6. Give Tom ___
piece of ___ chalk, please. 7. Where is ___ chalk? 8. Where is ___ room six? 9. ___ text-book is
on ___ table. 10. They are at ___ home now. 11. What are you? I am ___ student. 12. Where is
___ white copy-book? It is in ___ bag. 13. Where is ___ table? It is near ___ window. 14.
Jane is ___ economist and Ben is ___ economist too. Their friends are ___ economists too. 15.
Open ___ your books at ___ page ten and read ___ text nine.
3. Use the right preposition where necessary (Folosii prepoziia necesar unde trebuie).
1. The walls ___ the rooms of my flat are yellow and blue. 2. Go ___ the blackboard, Pete. Pete
is ___ the blackboard now. 3. Take a piece ___ chalk ____ the table. 4. Write these words ___ the
blackboard. 5. Come ___ the room, please. 6. Go ___ the classroom. 7. Come ___ here! 8. Dont
go ___ there! 9. The blackboard is ___ the wall ___ our classroom. 10. Put these matches ___
your bag. 11. Open that book ___ page eight. 12. Look ___ the blackboard. 13. Where is Jack?
He is ___ the table. 14. Ben, open your book ___ page six, please. 15. Where is the red pencil?
It is ___ my copy-book.
4. Insert the appropriate possessive adjective (Folosii adjectivul posesiv potrivit).
1. We are students. This is ___ classroom. The door of ___ classroom is white. 2. I am at home
now. ___ room is small, but its light and clean. 3. This is a room. ___ walls are green. 4. These
are my sisters. ___ names are Mary and Ann. 5. Ben and Nick, open ___ books at page ten. 6. Sit
down, Peter. ___ mark is good. 7. My sister is a teacher. These boys and girls are ___ pupils. 8.
This man is an economist. ___ name is Smith. 9. Jane and Kate are at ___ English lesson now.
10. I am an economist. ___ name is Ben. 11. Bob is a pupil. ___ marks are good. 12. Ann and
Nick are students. ___ friends are students too. 13. What are ___ names, boys? ___ name is
Nick, ___ name is Jack.

14

5. Make these sentences interrogative (Facei aceste propoziii interogative).


1. This is our classroom. 2. That is a light room. 3. The walls of my room are green. 4. This cup
is white. 5. The table is at the window. 6. The chairs are at the table. 7. She is our teacher. 8. Pete
is a good student. 9. This girl is my sister. 10. We have a good friend. 11. My sister has many
new books. 12. This flat has many windows. 13. Pete and Ted have an English lesson now.
6. Answer the following questions (Rspundei la urmtoarele ntrebri).
1. Where are you? 2. Are you at the lesson or at home? 3. Is this a classroom? 4. What is this? 5.
Is your classroom at the university? 6. What kind of classroom is it? 7. Is it large or small? 8.
What colour are its walls? 9. Where is the blackboard? 10. What colour is it? 11. Where is a
piece of chalk? 12. Is the word blackboard long or short? 13. Is Ann at the blackboard or at the
table? 14. Is your bag new? 15. Have you an English class today? 16. How many books has Nick
at home?
7. Translate (Traducei).
1. Aceasta este clasa noastr. De ce culoare sunt pereii ei? Ei sunt galbeni. Ea este mare sau
mic? Ea nu este mare, dar e luminoas. 2. De ce culoare este tavanul? El este alb. De ce
culoare este podeaua? Ea este brun. 3. Unde este masa dumneavoastr? Ea este la fereastr.
4. Tom, deschidei cartea la pagina opt. Nu citii textul. Citii ntrebrile, v rog. 5. Venii
ncoace, v rog. 6. Luai o bucat de cret i scriei ntrebarea dumneavoatr la tabl. 7. De ce
culoare este caietul ei? El este albastru. 8. Trimitei-mi, v rog, cartea dumneavoatr nou. 9.
Dai-mi opt creioane noi. 10. De ce culoare sunt scaunele n camera dumneavoastr? Ele sunt
brune. 11. Citii textul nou acas.
8. Write in transcription the following words (Scriei n transcripie urmtoarele cuvinte).
economist, wife, son, our, their, who, whose, where, here, there, ceiling, window, chair, piece,
chalk, word, question, colour, light, blue, cone, eight.
9. Describe your classroom using the active vocabulary of the lesson (Descriei clasa voastr
folosind vocabularul activ al leciei).

15

BASIC COURSE
LESSON ONE (THE FIRST LESSON)
WE STUDY FOREIGN LANGUAGES
My name is Gabriel. I live in the centre of Chiinu. I work at an office. I am an economist
and I am also a student. Many economists from my office study foreign languages. I study
English. In the morning I take my English textbook and my exercise-books and go to the
office. After the work we have English classes. The teacher and the students come into the
classroom and sit down at the tables. The students open their textbooks and their exercise-books.
I also open them. During the lesson we read texts, write sentences on the blackboard and do
exercises. We do not write many exercises at the lesson. We sometimes write dictations. We
usually write exercises at home. We usually speak English to our teacher. We sometimes speak
Romanian at the lesson. After the lesson we go home.
*

What is your name? My name is Gabriel.


Do you live in Chinu? Yes, I do.
Where do you work? I work at an office.
Do you study French? No, I do not (No, I dont).
What language do you study? I study English.
When do you usually study English? I usually study English in the evening.
What do you do during the lessons? We read, write and speak English during the lessons.
Do you write many or few exercises at the lessons? We write few exercises at the lessons.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to study - a studia, a nva


foreign - strin()
a language - o limb, un limbaj
to live - a tri, a locui
(the) centre - centru(l)
to work (at) - a lucra (la)
an office - un oficiu
also - de asemeni, tot
many - muli (multe)
few - puini (puine)
morning diminea
in the morning dimineaa
in the evening seara
every evening - n fiecare sear
usually - de obicei
sometimes - cteodat

often - des, deseori


seldom - rar, rareori
always - ntotdeauna
a textbook - un manual
an exercise - un exerciiu
an exercise-book - o carte de exerciii
during - n timpul
a sentence - o propoziie
a dictation - o dictare
to speak (to) - a vorbi (cu)
Romanian - limba romn
French - limba francez
after - dup
before - nainte
when - cnd

16

FORMAREA CUVINTELOR
-ion sufix de formare a substantivelor n limba englez. De regul substantivele sunt
formate de la verbe. Combinaia acestui sufix cu o consoan (de obicei cu -t-, -s-, -ss- )
se pronun [n]:
to dictate (a dicta) dictation [dktein] dictare
-er sufix de formare a substantivelor de la radicalul verbal:
to speak (a vorbi) speaker (vorbitor)
Dac verbul se termin n e surd, atunci la adugarea sufixului dat e se omite.
-ly [l] sufixul formrii adverbelor de la adjective:
usual (obinuit) usually [ju:ul]

GRAMMAR
PRESENT INDEFINITE (SIMPLE) TENSE
Affirmative Form
singular

plural

I read
You read
He (She, It) reads

We read
You read
They read

Negative Form
singular
plural
I dont read
We dont read
You dont read
You dont read
He (She, It) doesnt read
They dont read

Interrogative Form
singular

plural
Do we read
Do you read
Do they read

Do I read
Do you read
Does he (she, it) read
consonant + y
-ss, -sh, -ch, -x, -o
go He goes)

-ies (ex.: to study He studies, to fly He flies, to try He tries)


+ es (ex.: to pass He passes, to wash He washes, to fix He fixes, to

17

GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Put the following sentences into negative and interrogative forms and pay attention to
the use of the adverbs.
1. I often meet this economist here. 2. You seldom go to the blackboard. 3. They read their
textbooks every day. 4. His sisters always give me books to read. 5. They go there every day. 6.
You usually read these notes at home. 7. They often come here. 8. We often write questions at
home.
2. Answer these questions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Do you often meet your friends at the office?


Do they sometimes take your books?
Where do you usually read books and newspapers?
What do you usually do at the lesson?
What do you often copy?
What do you read every day?
Where do you go every day?
Do you read your English books at home or at the lesson?

3. Ask questions to the bold words.


1. Ann is in her room now (1). 2. This is a room (1). 3. The walls of this room are blue (1). 4.
We read good books (2). 5. You often go there (1). 6. I sometimes give Pete my copy-book (2).
7. They read books and newspapers in this room (2). 8. My sons read these textbooks every
day (2).
4. Insert the prepositions where necessary.
1. We live ___ Bli. 2. They work ___ the office. 3. I usually go ___ the office ___ the morning.
4. My friends seldom speak English ___ me. 5. Do you speak English or Romanian ___ your
parents? 6. Where is your pencil? Is it ___ the table? No, it isnt. It is ___ the floor. 7. Take
your pen ___ ___ your bag and write this sentence. 8. I usually go ___ the office _____ the
lessons. 9. ___ our lessons we usually write many exercises ___ the blackboard. ___ home we
usually write ___ our copy-books. 10. ___ the morning the teacher and the students come ___
the classroom and sit down ___ their tables. 11. What do you usually do ___ your English
lessons? We read, write and speak English ___ our lessons.
5. Insert the definite or the indefinite article if necessary.
My sister is ___ student. Her friends are also ___ students. They live in Chiinu. They study
___ English. They usually study in ___ morning. Their classroom is large. ___ walls of ___
classroom are yellow. ___ students come into ___ classroom and sit down at ___ tables. They
usually do ___ exercises, write ___ dictations and study English grammar at ___ lessons. They
also often write on ___ blackboard. They do ___ exercises at ___ home too.
6. Translate these sentences. Use the right tense form.
1. Deschidei manualele, gsii pagina opt i citii textul. 2. Unde mergei n fiecare zi? 3. Ce
citesc studenii dumneavoastr de obicei? 4. Aezai-v la mas, luai manualele, stilourile i
caietele i copiai textul numrul cinci. 5. Prietenii lui citesc cri n englez? Da. 6. Nu
18

nchidei cartea, citii textul numrul patru. 7. Aceti businessmani nu vin aici n fiecare zi. 8.
Surorile mele nu-mi trimit cri i ziare. 9. Ce fel de texte copiai de obicei acas? Noi copiem
texte noi. 10. Ce fel de film este acesta? Acesta este un film bun. 11. Ce fel de ziare citesc
studenii din grupa voastr? 12. Aceti elevi iau des cri de aici? Da. 13. Aceti economiti vin
rar aici. 14. Unde mergei de obicei seara? 15. V ntlnii des cu aceti economiti?
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
7. Notice how the following nouns are formed.
teacher, exercise-book, blackboard, usually, writer, reader, doer, speaker, worker, dictation, inkstand, badly.
8. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. What is your name?
2. Do you live in Chiinu or in Bli?
3. Do you live in the centre of the town?
4. Where do you work?
5. Are you a doctor?
6. What are you?
7. Do you study?
8. Where do you study?
9. What do you do during your lessons?
10. Where do you write exercises?
11. Do you usually do many exercises at the lesson?
12. Do you often write dictations?
13. Do you do many or few exercises at home?
14. Do you often or seldom speak English to your teacher?
15. What language do you sometimes speak at the lessons?
16. Where do you go after lessons?
17. What kind of books do you usually read?
18. Where do you usually go in the evening?
9. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. I work at an office (1). 2. In the evening we usually study foreign languages (3). 3. They
often speak English at their lessons (2). 4. We write many sentences on the blackboard (2). 5.
After my English lesson I go to the office (2). 6. You read English books at home (2). 7. We
read, write and speak English during our lessons (1). 8. We always come to the office in the
morning (2).
10. Insert the appropriate word from the list below.
(a blackboard, to speak, to study, to write, to live, to go, to work, a lesson, an engineer, an office,
to do)
I am __________ . I ______ in Chinu and _________ at an office. I also _________ English
there. At the lesson we ________ many exercises and _________ many sentences on _______ .
We usually ______ English to our teacher at _______ . After the lessons I ________ to the
_______ .

19

11. Arrange the following words to make sentences.


1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

the classroom, we, sit down, come, into, and, the, at, tables.
write, do, many, we, not, sentences, our, at, lessons.
to, speak, usually, you, teacher, English, your, do?
the lessons, sometimes, Romanian, they, at, speak.
study, foreign, in the evening, you, languages, do?

12. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. n ce oficiu lucreaz aceti economiti? Ei tot lucreaz n oficiul nostru. 2. Dimineaa eu
intru n clas i m aez la masa mea. 3. n timpul leciei noi citim, scriem dictri i exerciii i
vorbim n englez. 4. Acest exerciiu este foarte (very) lung. Scriei-l acas. 5. n ce limb
vorbii de obicei cu surorile dumneavoastr? De obieci vorbim n romn. Noi vorbim de
asemeni n francez. Surorile mele studiaz limba francez. 6. Eu nu vorbesc n englez
acas. Eu vorbesc n englez la leciile de limb englez. 7. Nu facei primul exerciiu acum.
Facei-l acas. 8. Citii cri franceze? Nu, eu nu studiez limba francez. 9. Surorile
dumneavoastr triesc n Chiinu? Nu, ele nu triesc n Chiinu. Ele triesc n Bli. Ele
lucreaz acolo. 10. Ce facei dup lucru? Cteodat mergem la lecii. 11. Ale cui sunt aceste
cri? Acestea sunt crile mele. Aceste cri sunt franceze sau engleze? Acestea sunt cri
engleze. 12. Ce limbi studiai? 13. De obicei scriei multe propoziii la tabl? De obicei noi
scriem la tabl cinci sau ase propoziii. Cteodat scriem apte sau opt propoziii. 14. Eu
locuiesc la Bli. Eu nv acolo. Bli este un ora linitit (quiet). El nu este mare. Eu studiez
limba francez. Merg la lecii seara. n timpul leciilor de obicei scriem puine exerciii. Noi
vorbim n francez cu profesorul nostru. Cteodat noi vorbim franceza dup lecii. 15. Unde
trii? Eu triesc n Chiinu n centrul oraului. Studiai i lucrai? Da, eu studiez i
lucrez. Studiai limba englez? Da. Unde studiai engleza? n oficiul meu. Cnd
mergei la lecii? Seara. Ce facei de obicei n timpul leciilor? Studiem gramatica, facem
exerciii, citim i discutm. Citii multe sau puine cri engleze? Noi citim puine cri
engleze. Ce fel de cri citii? Noi citim manualele noastre. Vorbii englezete sau
romnete cu profesorul dumneavoastr? De obicei noi vorbim englezete, iar cteodat
romnete.

20

LESSON TWO (THE SECOND LESSON)


WE STUDY FOREIGN LANGUAGES (continued)
My sister is an economist. She works together with me. She goes to the office every day.
My sister does not study English. She already knows English very well. She reads many
English books, magazines and newspapers. She also knows French. At her office she sometimes
writes letters to foreign firms. She often translates telegrams from Romanian into English and
from English into Romanian.
My sister is also a student. She studies German. She is a very good student. She usually gets
good marks. She always comes to her lessons in time.
My sister and I usually go home together.
In the evening we prepare our home task. We learn new words, read texts and write
exercises. We also repeat grammar rules. We sometimes speak English at home. We speak
about our work and our lessons.
*
*
*
Does your sister study or does she work? She works.
Where does she work? She works together with me.
Is your sister an economist? Yes, she is.
Does she know English well? Yes, she does.
Does she study French? No, she does not. (No, she doesnt).
What language does she study? She studies German.
How does she know German? She knows German well.
What does she usually speak about* at the lessons? She speaks about her work.
* What does she usually speak about? Despre ce ea vorbte de obicei?
n cazul acestui tip de ntrebare, n limba englez prepoziia about este plasat direct dup verb,
cu toate c este posibil i varianta cnd aceast prepoziie se plaseaz dup pronumele
interogativ what: What about does she speak?
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

second - al doilea
an economist - un economist
together mpreun
already deja
to know - a ti, a cunoate
very foarte
well - bine (adv.)
a magazine - o revist
a letter - o scrisoare
a firm - o firm
to translate (from... into ...) - a traduce (din... n...)
a telegram - o telegram
German - limba german

21

to get - a primi, a obine


time - timp
to be in time - a fi la timp
home - acas
a home-task - lucru pentru acas
a homework tema de acas
to prepare a (se) pregti
to prepare for a (se) pregti pentru
to learn - a nva, a studia
to repeat - a repeta
a rule - o regul
about - despre
how - cum

GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Put the following verbs in the Present Indefinite Tense.
to close, to go, to open, to read, to sit down, to live, to work, to study, to come, to write, to do, to
speak, to send, to meet, to give, to take, to copy, to put.
2. Insert the right pronoun.
1. ___ lives in Bli. 2. ____ come into their classroom and sit down at the tables. 3. Does ___
sometimes meet his friends at the office? Yes, ___ does. 4. ___ study English at the office in the
morning. 5. ___ does not speak English to her teacher. 6. Do ____ sometimes speak Romanian at
their lessons? Yes, ____ do. 7. Where do ___ study? ___ study at the university. 8. ___ do not
study English. ___ study French. 9. ___ am also a student. 10. Does ___ work or study? ___
works at an office. 11. Do ____ go to the office in the morning? Yes, ____ do. 12. ___ does not
often write sentences on the blackboard. 13. ___ do not read English books every day. 14. What
do ___ usually read at the lessons? ___ usually read our textbooks. 15. Where does ___ go every
day? ___ goes to the office every day.
3. Put the following sentences into negative and interrogative forms.
1. His name is John. 2. His sister lives in London. 3. My friend studies English. 4. Our teacher
speaks French. 5. This economist works at our office. 6. His sister goes to the office in the
morning. 7. Her friend writes English sentences at home. 8. They do many exercises at home.
4. Answer these questions.
1. Does your sister work?
2. Where does she work?
3. Does she study a foreign language?
4. What language does she study?
5. Does your friend go to English lessons every day?
6. Does he study French too?
7. What does he do during the English lessons?
8. Does your sister work or study?
9. When does she go to the office?
10. Are you a student?
11. Do you study German?
12. Does your friend study German too?
13. Is he a good student?
14. Where does your sister work?
15. Where do you study?
16. What kind of books do you read?
17. When do you study English?
5. Translate.
1. Unde triete acest medic? 2. Aceti studeni triesc n Chiinu. 3. Sora lui studiaz engleza i
franceza. 4. Unde lucreaz acest profesor? El lucreaz la universitate. 5. Surorile lui triesc la
Chiinu sau la Bli? Ele triesc la Bli. 6. Prietenul su nu lucreaz, el nva. 7. Ce fel de
exerciii el face de obicei acas? 8. Prietenii lui nu studiaz engleza. 9. Gabriel scrie multe
exerciii engleze acas. El studiaz limba englez, dar nu citete cri engleze. 10. Aceti
22

economiti vin des n oficiul dumneavoastr? Nu. 11. Acest om nu vorbete franceza. 12. Ce
fel de cri citete acest economist? 13. Facei multe exerciii acas? Da. Cnd facei de
obicei leciile? De obicei mi fac leciile seara. 14. Unde trimitei cteodat scrisori i
telegrame? 15. Cnd prietenul dumneavoastr face de obicei tema de acas? 16. Sora lui nu
lucreaz, ea nva.
6. Insert the preposition if necessary.
1. Dont translate these letters ____ English. Translate these letters ___ French. 2. Peter always
comes ___ the office ___ time. 3. We sometimes read Romanian and English books ___ the
evening. 4. ___ our English lessons we often go ___ the blackboard. We write many sentences
___ blackboard. 5. Where does he usually go ____ his work? He usually goes ___ his English
lesson. 6. Does your sister speak ___ German? No, she doesnt. She speaks ___ English and
French. 7. ___ the morning our teacher comes ___ the classroom, puts his bag ___ the table and
sits down ___ his table. 8. I sometimes speak ___ English ____ my son. 9. Tell her ____ your
friends. 10. Gabriel, translate this text ____ Romanian ____ English, please. 11. Do you usually
speak ____ books ___ your friends? Yes, I do. 12. My friends usually go ___ their lessons and
then go ___ home. 13. What do you usually speak ____ ___ your friends ____ the lesson ___ the
morning?
7. Insert the definite or the indefinite article if necessary.
My friend is ___ economist. He works at ___ office. He knows ___ French and ___ German. He
studies ___ English. He is ___ good student. He often reads ___ English books at ___ home. He
usually goes to his lessons in ___ morning. He always comes there in ___ time. At ___ office he
gets ___ English magazines and newspapers. In ___ evening he prepares his home task. He often
translates ___ sentences from ___ Romanian into ___ English. He often gets ___ good marks.
8. Use the verbs in brackets in the right form.
1. He often (to meet) Peter at his office. 2. You (to speak) English? Yes, I (to do). 3. I usually
(to come) home in the evening. 4. Ann (to be) an economist. She (to live) far from her office?
No, she (not to do). She (not to live) far from her office. 5. He sometimes (to translate) letters
and telegrams from Romanian into English. 6. His sister (not to study) German. 7. We often (to
send) e-mails to our boss. 8. Your friend (to be) a student? 9. He always (to prepare) his lessons
well? What marks he usually (to get)? He usually (to get) good marks. 10. They (to take)
English lessons every day? 11. You often (to repeat) the words of these texts? 12. The words of
the second lesson (not to be) new. We already (to know) these words very well.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
9. Read aloud the following words and text fragments.
writes, works, translates, lives, knows, studies, letters, firms, telegrams;
knife, know, knock, knave, knee, knit, knew, knot;
rule, blue, flute, rude, ruby, allude.
My sister is an economist. At her office | she sometimes writes letters | to foreign firms. She
often translates telegrams | from Romanian into English | and from English into Romanian.
*

*
23

Does your sister study | or does she work? She works. How does she know German?
She knows German well.
10. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. My sister is an economist (1). 2. His sister lives in Chiinu (1). 3. My sister often sends me
letters (1). 4. They speak German well (1). 5. This student goes to his lessons in the morning
(1). 6. He usually gets good marks (1). 7. My friend prepares her home task in the evening (3).
8. My sister learns many new words at her lessons (2).
11. Translate and pay attention to the bold words.
a) 1. tii tema voastr de acas? Da, eu tiu bine tema mea de acas. 2. El scrie des scrisori
prietenilor si. 3. Ea i face de obicei leciile seara. 4. Noi vorbim des engleza cu profesorul
nostru. 5. Ei discut cteodat cu prietenii lor despre cri noi. 6. Prietenul meu d des
prietenilor si crile sale. 7. Povestete-mi despre lucrul tu. 8. Scriei prietenilor votri o
scrisoare.
b) 1. Ce limb studiai? 2. Noi nvm multe cuvinte noi. 3. Voi nvai regulile gramaticale
acas? 4. Eu studiez gramatica limbii engleze.
12. Translate.
1. Cine este fata aceasta? Ea este sora mea. Ce este sora dumneavoatr (dup profesie)? Ea
este economist. 2. Ce limb tii foarte bine? Eu tiu foarte bine limba german. 3. Cnd
prietenul dumneavoastr face de obicei leciile? El face de obicei leciile seara. 4. Cum nva
prietenul dumneavoastr? El nva bine. 5. Sora dumneavoastr studiaz gramatica limbii
germane? 6. Ea nva multe cuvinte noi din reviste. 7. Traducei des texte n timpul leciilor?
Nu. Noi de obicei traducem textele acas. 8. Eu l cunosc pe acest om. El lucreaz mpreun cu
mine. 9. Nu repetai exerciiile de la a doua lecie acum. Facei aceasta acas. 10. Gabriel tie
deja multe cuvinte n limba englez. El deja citete reviste i ziare engleze. 11. Fiecare student
citete de obicei cte dou sau trei propoziii la fiecare lecie. 12. Nu trimitei aceast telegram
dimineaa. Trimitei-o seara. 13. Unde lucreaz acest economist? El lucreaz aici mpreun cu
mine. 14. Ana este o student bun? Ea cum nva? Ea nva bine. 15. Unde lucreaz sora
dumneavoastr? Ea lucreaz n acest oficiu. Ea v povestete des despre lucrul ei? Da. 16.
Acest student de obicei traduce multe articole din reviste strine. 17. Cnd v facei de obicei
leciile? Eu mi fac de obicei leciile seara. 18. Prietenul dumneavoastr primete note bune
sau rele? El ntotdeauna primete note bune. 19. Aceti studeni vin la lecii la timp? 20.
Repetai aceast propoziie, v rog. 21. nvai aceast regul gramatical acas. 22. Nu
vorbii cu Ana n german. Ea vorbete ru n aceast limb. 23. Voi nu tii aceste cuvinte.
Repetai aceste cuvinte acas.
13. Make a short story about your friend using the words given below.
to live, a name, to work, an economist, to know, to go, to come, in time, to translate, foreign,
many, a magazine, in the evening, in the morning, an office, to speak, very well, together, about,
with, in the centre of.

24

LESSON THREE (THE THIRD LESSON)


THE WORKING DAY OF AN ECONOMIST
Mihai works at an office. He lives near his office. He usually walks there. He works on
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. He does not work on Saturday and
Sunday.
His working day lasts eight hours, but on Friday he works only six hours. In the morning he
receives very many letters and e-mails. He always answers them.
He sometimes translates articles from foreign newspapers and magazines. He often receives
colleagues from other firms. They discuss many questions with him. He usually finishes work
at five oclock in the evening. On Friday he finishes work at three oclock in the afternoon.
Mihai studies English. He works hard at his English. He sometimes stays at his office after
work to take English lessons. After the lessons he returns home.
*
*
*
Who works at this office? Mihai does.
Whom does he often receive at the office? He often receives economists from other firms.
Does he live far from his office? No, he doesnt. He lives near it.
When does he usually finish work? He finishes work at five oclock in the evening.
(At) what time does he usually return home on Friday? He usually returnes home at three
oclock on Friday.
What language does he study? He studies English.
Does he study English in the morning or in the evening? He studies English in the evening.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a working day - o zi de lucru


Monday luni
Tuesday mari
Wednesday miercuri
Thursday joi
Friday vineri
Saturday smbt
Sunday duminic
article articol
colleague coleg
to walk - a merge (pe jos)
to answer - a rspunde

to discuss - a discuta
to finish - a termina
to stay - a sta
to return - a se ntoarce
at five oclock - la ora cinci
in the afternoon - dup amiaz
near (ant. far) - lng (ant. departe)
hard - greu, din greu
other - alt(a), ali (altele)
only - doar, numai
to last - a dura

25

GRAMMAR
PLURAL OF THE NOUNS
General rule: noun (sing.) + s
Ex.: cat cats, boy boys, girl girls, article articles, etc.
Nouns ending in: -ss, -sh, -ch, -x, -o + es
Ex.: kiss kisses, bush bushes, arch arches, box boxes, potato potatoes, etc.
Nouns ending in: -f, -fe f changes in v + es
Ex.: leaf leaves, life lives, loaf loaves, knife knives, wife wives, etc.
Nouns ending in: consonant + y, y changes in i + es
Ex.: sky skies, fly flies, cry cries, etc.
Exceptions:
analysis analyses
antenna antennae
basis bases
boar boar
bob bob
businessman businessmen
child children
crisis crises
datum data
deer deer
erratum errata
focus foci
foot feet

goose geese
hypothesis hypotheses
louse lice
man men
moose moose
mouse mice
ox oxen
phenomenon phenomena
quid quid
sheep sheep
swine swine
thesis theses
woman women

many, few with countable nouns (ex.: many/few boys, many/few books, many/few people, etc.)
I have many friends. How many friends do I have?
much, little with uncountable nouns (ex.: much/little sugar, much/little water, much/little work,
etc.)
I have much work to do. How much work do I have to do?
He works very much.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
Subject case
Who?
I
you
he, she, it
we
you
they

Whom?
me
you
him, her, it
us
you
them
26

Object case
Pe cine?
pe mine
pe tine
pe el, pe ea
pe noi
pe voi
pe ei

Cui?
mie
ie
lui, ei
nou
vou
lor

Examples: I am at the lesson now. The teacher asks me this question.


Who is at the lesson now? Whom does the teacher ask this question?
He has no book. She gives this book to him.
Who has no book? Whom does she give this book?
They are in the classroom. Nick shows them that map.
Who is in the classroom? Whom does Nick show that map?
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Give the plural of the following nouns.
boy, mark, teacher, lesson, student, fly, sentence, office, wife, letter, economist, firm, girl,
worker, magazine, engineer, sister, knife, book, man, friend, mouse, word, name, cry, day, task,
research, cash, leaf, fox, tomato, child, woman, analysis, hat, datum, goose, film, thesis, tooth,
spy.
2. Use the appropriate pronoun in object case.
1. These exercises are very good. Prepare ____ at home. 2. This economist lives in our house. I
know ___ well. 3. Write these words in your copybooks and learn ____. 4. Read this letter and
translate ___ from English into Romanian. 5. Ann is my sister. She usually prepares her home
task together with ___. 6. He knows that girl. She studies English with ___. 7. This book is very
interesting. Take ___ from Nick. 8. My friends are in my flat now. I show ____ all the rooms. 9.
Bob, give ___ that red pencil, please. 10. Take this magazine and read ___ at home. 11. Does he
often speak to ___ about his problems? 12. These books are very good. Where do you get ____?
13. My sister knows English well. I often prepare my home task together with ___. 14. Read
these words and learn ___ well. 15. I dont know ___. What is his name?
3. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. These boys usually get good marks (2). 2. Our teacher always speaks English at our lessons
(3). 3. The students often translate sentences from Romanian into English (2). 4. At the
office my sister usually writes letters and e-mails (4). 5. We sometimes study English in the
evening (3). 6. In the morning these economists go to their offices (3). 7. Those girls are
economists (2). 8. These students read foreign magazines in the evening (4). 9. I am a
teacher (2). 10. His sisters already know French (3).
4. Insert the right article where necessary.
Ann is ___ economist. She works at ___ foreign firm. ___ office is not far from ___ centre of the
town. Ann usually goes there in ___ morning. She finishes work at four oclock in ___ afternoon.
Her sister is ___ student, she lives in Bli. She studies ___ German. Ann often receives ___
letters from her sister. She sometimes goes to ___ Bli to stay with her sister.
5. Use the verbs in brackets in the right form.
1. They (to finish) their lesson at ten oclock? 2. He usually (to walk) home after work. 3. At
what office (to work) Mihai? 4. He (not to work) hard at his German. 5. Whose working day (to
27

last) six hours? 6. Your working day (to last) eight hours? 7. How long your working day (to
last)? 8. This economist usually (to return) home at seven oclock in the evening. 9. You (to
answer) many questions at your lessons? 10. Your sister often (to stay) at the office after work?
11. I often (not to receive) letters from my friends. I (to receive) many e-mails from them. 12.
Mihai often (to answer) many letters and e-mails. 13. Who often (to discuss) many questions
with these students? 14. How they (to know) English? They (to know) English very well. 15.
The students (to repeat) the new words at home or at the lesson? They (to repeat) them at
home.
6. Translate.
a) 1. Cine v d s citii cri engleze? Profesorul meu. 2. Cine dintre ei lucreaz n acest
oficiu? Mihai. 3. Cine dintre voi cunoate bine limba englez? Gabriel. 4. Cine vine la oficiu
la ora opt dimineaa? Noi. 5. Cine dintre voi de obicei traduce articole din reviste strine?
Domnul Brown. 6. Cine scrie scrisori firmelor strine? Eu. 7. A cui sor studiaz limba
francez? A mea. 8. A cui este aceast carte? Aceasta este cartea lui. 9. A cui carte o luai de
obicei la lecie? 10. Cine studiaz limba german la oficiul nostru? Ana i Kate. 11. Al cui
prieten primete des note bune? Prietenul lui.
b) 1. Sora mea lucreaz foarte mult. 2. Ei citesc multe cri engleze. 3. Prietenul tu lucreaz
mult? Nu. Acum el lucreaz puin. 4. Profesorul ne pune multe ntrebri. 5. Cine n grupa
voastr nva puin? Tom. 6. Eu citesc puine cri franceze. 7. Prietenii votri nva mult sau
puin? Prietenii notri nva mult. 8. Noi citim foarte mult i scriem puin n timpul leciei. 9.
Fiul dumneavoastr citete mult? Da. El citete mult dup lecii i duminica n timpul zilei.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
7. Read the following words aloud.
lasts, does, receives, answers, translates, discusses, finishes, studies, returns, stays, letters,
telegrams, questions, tells, texts, cities, books, articles;
Tuesday, Monday, holiday, Sunday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Wednesday, stay, play, gay, day,
hockey, money, storey, steel, leap, feel, fear, deer, dear, clear, deep, steer.
8. Answer the questions.
1. Who works at an office?
2. Does your friend live far from his office?
3. Does he walk to his office?
4. On what days does he work?
5. Does he work hard on weekdays?
6. What does he do on his days off?
7. Where does he usually spend his weekends?
8. How long does his working day last?
9. How many hours a day does he work?
10. When does your friend receive letters and e-mails?
11. Does he always answer them?
12. What does he sometimes translate?
13. Whom does he often receive?
14. What do they discuss?
15. When does he usually finish work?
28

9. Ask alternative questions to the bold words.


1. He lives near Chiinu. 2. My wife works at an office. 3. My friend often receives many
letters and e-mails. 4. Our English lesson lasts two hours. 5. Tom answers many letters and emails every day. 6. This economist always finishes work at six oclock in the evening. 7. My
sister reads many articles in foreign newspapers every day.
10. Finish the following sentences.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

I receive ...
My sister comes ...
We usually finish ...
He goes ...
Our lesson lasts ...

6. My friend lives ...


7. I have classes on ...
8. Every day you receive ...
9. They discuss about ...
10. He comes to the university ...

11. Make sentences using the given words.


on Saturday, to discuss (with), to stay, questions, to go home, after work, before the lessons,
together with, to live, working day, to answer, to translate (from... into... ), in time, to prepare
(for), to walk, at home, very much, in the centre of, to work (at), during the lesson, to speak
(about), near my house, far from the office.
12. Translate.
a) 1. Pe cine ntlnii des n oficiul dumneavoastr? Eu l ntlnesc des acolo pe Mihai. 2. Eu
locuiesc nu departe (aproape) de oficiul meu. Eu merg de obieci pe jos acolo. 3. n ce zile lucrai
aici? Eu lucrez aici lunea, marea i joia. Eu nu vin aici miercurea i smbta. 4. Lucrai
duminica? Nu. Eu nu lucrez duminica. 5. Ct dureaz ziua dumneavoastr de lucru? Ea
dureaz opt ore. Eu de obicei termin lucrul la ora ase seara. 6. Ce este sora dumneavoastr?
Sora mea este medic. Ea triete departe de noi. Eu primesc des scrisori de la ea. Despre ce ea
v scrie? Ea scrie despre viaa sa. 7. Al cui prieten lucreaz la o firm nu departe de Bli?
Prietenul nostru. 8. Noi lucrm la oficiu opt ore. Noi venim acas la ora ase seara. 9. Cine dintre
ei traduce ntotdeauna articole din ziare strine? Gabriel. 10. Mergei la oficiu dimineaa? Da.
Cine rmne cu fiul dumneavoastr? Sora mea. Ea nu lucreaz. La ce or v ntoarcei de
obicei acas? De obicei m ntorc acas la ora apte seara. 11. Rmnei des dup lucru la
oficiu? Nu. De obicei termin lucrul la ora ase seara i plec acas. Eu rmn acolo dup ora
ase doar joia. 12. Repetai ntrebarea dumneavoastr, v rog. 13. Cum nva Tom? El nva
foarte bine. El lucreaz foarte mult (din greu) acas. 14. Nu discutai aceast ntrebare acum. 15.
Cu cine v ntoarcei de obicei acas? Eu m ntorc de bicei acas cu prietenii. 16. Smbta i
duminica de obicei nu lucrez. Dimineaa merg n parc (park). Seara scriu des e-mailuri
prietenilor mei. Ei triesc n Londra. Acesta este un ora mare i frumos. Eu merg foarte rar
(seldom) acolo. 17. Eu cteodat nu lucrez n zilele de lucru ale sptmnii, dar studiez. 18. Eu
cunosc doar o singur limb strin.
b) Ct dureaz ziua dumneavoastr de lucru? Ea dureaz opt ore. Ce facei la oficiu? Eu
rspund la scrisori i e-mailuri. Eu citesc reviste, traduc articole din aceste reviste i discut multe
ntrebri cu colegii mei. Cnd de obicei terminai lucrul? De obicei termin lucrul la ora cinci.
Trii departe de oficiul dumneavoastr? Nu. Eu triesc aproape de el i ntotdeauna merg
acas pe jos. Studiai limba german sau deja o cunoatei bine? Eu studiez limba german.
Cnd studiai? Studiem lunea, miercurea i vinerea seara, iar maria i joia dimineaa. Ct
dureaz lecia dumneavoastr? Dou ore. Cnd m ntorc acas eu citesc de obicei reviste, fac
29

tema de acas i scriu e-mailuri. Eu primesc multe e-mailuri i ntotdeauna rspund la ele. Cine
traduce articole din reviste strine la oficiul dumneavoastr? Mihai. El cunoate limba englez
i limba francez. Cum cunoate el aceste limbi? El le cunoate bine. Cine traduce
scrisorile din limba german? Eu.
13. Make a dialog on the topic Our English Lesson using the words given below.
colleague, near, to walk, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, to last, an
hour, to answer, a question, to translate, to discuss, to finish, at ten oclock, to work (at), hard, to
stay, only.
14. Imagine you are already an economist. Describe your working day.

30

LESSON FOUR (THE FOURTH LESSON)


THE WORKING DAY OF AN ECONOMIST
My friend Mihai lives in Bli now. Two years ago he lived in Chiinu and worked at an office.
He lived near his office. He usually walked there. He worked on week-days. He worked hard. He
did not work on Saturday and Sunday. Sometimes he stayed with his friends over the weekend.
His working day lasted eight hours, but on Fridays he worked only six hours. In the morning he
received very many letters and e-mails. He always answered them. He sometimes translated
articles from foreign newspapers and magazines. He often received colleagues from other firms.
They discussed many questions with him. He usually finished work at five oclock in the
evening. On Friday he finished work at three oclock in the afternoon.
Mihai studied English. He worked hard at his English. He sometimes stayed at his office after
work to take English lessons. After the lessons he returned home.
*
*
*
Who worked at an office two years ago? Mihai did.
Whom did Mihai receive at the office? He often received colleagues from other firms.
Did he live far from his office? No, he didnt. He lived near it.
When did he usually finish work? He finished work at five oclock in the evening.
(At) what time did he usually return home on Friday? He usually returned home at three
oclock on Friday.
What language did he study? He studied English.
Did he study English in the morning or in the evening? He studied English in the evening.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

yesterday - ieri
the day before yesterday - alaltieri
last night - noaptea trecut
last month - luna trecut
last week - sptmna trecut
last year - anul trecut
last time - ultima dat
... days (years, months, etc.) ago - ... zile (ani, luni, etc.) n urm
GRAMMAR
PAST INDEFINITE (SIMPLE) TENSE
to be

to have

to do

I was
You were
He (she, it) was
We were
You were
They were

I had
You had
He (she, it) had
We had
You had
They had

I did
You did
He (she, it) did
We did
You did
They did

31

Examples: Last year I was in London. I was not here. Was I in London last year?
Yesterday I had an important meeting. I hadnt (didnt have) an English class. Had I
(Did I have) an important meeting yesterday?
I did my homework two days ago. I didnt do my homework two days ago. Did I do
my homework two days ago?
Regular verbs
General rule: verb + ed
Ex.: to work I worked, you worked, he (she, it) worked, we worked, you worked, they
worked.
Verbs ending in e: verb + d
Ex.: to hate I hated, you hated, he (she, it) hated, we hated, you hated, they hated.
Verbs ending in consonant + y, y changes in i + ed
Ex.: to cry I cried, you cried, he (she, it) cried, we cried, you cried, they cried.
Verbs ending in p, b, t, d in a short syllable double the consonant
Ex.: to stop I stopped, you stopped, he (she) stopped, etc.
to nod I nodded, you nodded, etc.
Irregular verbs
Irregular verbs have special forms for the Past Indefinite Tense. Here are some of them:
to bear bore
to beat beat
to begin began
to bend bent
to bet bet
to bite bit
to break broke
to bring brought
to build built
to buy bought
to catch cought
to come - came
to choose chose
to cost cost
to cut cut
to do did
to drink drank
to fall fell
to feel felt
to find found

to fly flew
to get got
to give gave
to go went
to grow grew
to hear heard
to hold held
to keep kept
to know knew
to lead led
to leave left
to let let
to lose lost
to make made
to mean meant
to meet met
to put put
to read read [red]
to retell retold
to rise rose

to run ran
to see saw
to sell sold
to send sent
to set set
to shut shut
to sit sat
to sleep slept
to smell smelt
to speak spoke
to spend spent
to stand stood
to strike struck
to take took
to teach tought
to think thought
to understand understood
to win won
to write wrote

Examples: I bought a new book. He put his brown hat. We understood English, etc.

32

Negative and interrogative forms:


negative

interrogative

I didnt (did not) work


You didnt stay
He (she, it) didnt leave
We didnt write
You didnt put
They didnt go

Did I work
Did you stay
Did he (she, it) leave
Did we write
Did you put
Did they go

NUMERALS INDICATING YEARS


1900 nineteen hundred;
1905 nineteen o five;
1925 nineteen twenty-five;

1980 nineteen eighty;


2000 twenty hundred;
2004 twenty o four; etc.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Translate into English and make the Past Indefinite Tense.


a mulumi, a deschide, a privi, a nchide, a tri, a lucra, a nelege, a studia, a traduce, a zbura, a
pregti, a scrie, a nva, a merge pe jos, a citi, a se ntoarce, a rmne, a dura, a veni, a primi, a
lua, a da, a merge, a discuta, a rspunde, a repeta, a vedea, a copia.
2. Write the following sentences into the past.
1. My working day lasts eight hours. 2. Do you often receive letters from your friends? 3. He
returns home at eight oclock in the evening. 4. We discuss many questions with economists
from other firms. 5. Do they often stay at the office after six oclock?
3. Make the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.
1. He opened the window in our classroom before the lesson yesterday. 2. I understood well this
text. 3. Ann translated many foreign letters at the office last week. 4. He took those books from
the library. 5. I finished work at six oclock the day before yesterday. 6. Nick read an interesting
article yesterday. 7. You studied German five years ago. 8. They returned home in the evening. 9.
They discussed many articles from these English magazines last weekend. 10. We went to
Chiinu last month.
4. Use the verbs in brackets in the right form of the Past Indefinite Tense.
1. Who usually (to prepare) his lessons in this room? This student (to do). 2. Last year I (to
live) near my office. I always (to walk) there. 3. How your friend (to speak) English? He (to
speak) English badly. 4. When you (to return) home the day before yesterday? I (to return)
home at seven oclock the day before yesterday. 5. What language you (to study) five years ago?
I (to study) French. 6. What economists you often (to receive)? 7. What teacher they (to
receive) last week? 8. You (to stay) at the office after work the day before yesterday? Yes, I (to
do). What you (to do) there? I (to study) English there. 9. How long your lesson (to last) two
days ago? It (to last) one hour. 10. Who (to finish) his work at seven oclock the day before
yesterday? I (to do). 11. With what economists you (to discuss) this question last week? I (to
33

discuss) it with the economists from your office. 12. With whom you (to discuss) this question
last weekend? We (to discuss) it with my friend. 13. How he (to answer) his questions at the
lesson yesterday? He (to answer) them well. 14. I (not to work) at this office five years ago. 15.
What your friend (to do) during the last English lesson? During the last English lesson he (to
read, to write and to speak) English. 16. How long you (to stay) in London last year? I (to stay)
there a month.
5. Fill in the spaces with the right form of the given verbs.
a) to walk, to return, to receive, to stay, to answer, to live.
Last year I _____ in Constana a month. I _____ near the sea. Every day I _____ there in the
morning and usually _____ there two or three hours. I often _____ e-mails from my friends. I
usually _____ them in the evening. In September I _____ to Chiinu.
b) to answer, to receive, to finish, to return, to work, to discuss.
My friend Gabriel is an economist. He _____ at a big firm. He usually _____ eight hours.
Yesterday he _____ work at seven oclock. After work the colleagues _____ their plans. At eight
oclock Gabriel _____ home. In the evening he _____ two e-mails. He _____ these e-mails.
6. Write with letters.
1, 5, 8, 11, 12, 30, 34, 42, 50, 53, 3, 9, 90, 98, 100.
1870, 1868, 1825, 1773, 1837, 1918, 1708, 1800, 2001, 1998, 1986.
7. Translate.
a cincia pagin, a dousprezecea scrisoare, a treia carte, a douzeci i treia lecie, al
aptesprezecelea articol, a cincisprezecea propoziie, a noua lecie, a asea u, al patruzecelea
ziar, a treisprezecea revist.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
8. Read aloud.
last, past, cast, fast, task, mask, ask;
fate, mule, pump, fat, car, forth, went, lick, bite, spent, bit, tune, tiny, fume, birth, same, Sam,
stern, clock, bone, rob, cute, robe, fur, list, turn, terms, stir, curly, volley, Friday, rule, knock,
flute, clear, fear.
9. Answer the questions.
1. Who is your friend?
2. What is your friend?
3. Where does your friend live now?
4. Where did you live two years ago?
5. Where did your friend live three years ago?
6. Where did your friend work then?
7. Did he live far from his office?
8. Did he walk to his office?
9. On what days did he work?
10. Which days are weekdays?
34

11. Did your friend work much or little?


12. On what days did he not work?
13. What did he usually do on Sunday?
14. How long did his working day last?
15. Did he answer many letters and e-mails?
16. Did he translate them at the office or at home?
17. Did he translate letters into French or into German?
18. What did he usually discuss with colleagues from other firms?
19. When did he usually finish work?
20. Did he return home at three oclock on Wednesday or on Friday?
10. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. Mihai receives many economists from other firms (1). 2. I received a good mark yesterday
(2). 3. They worked at a big firm in 2001 (4). 4. My sister stayed at the office after work
yesterday (3). 5. You lived in that house ten years ago (3). 6. Ann often speaks about her son
(2). 7. Gabriel translated seven English articles last week (3). 8. He knows English very well
(2).
11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses.
1. Cnd v-ai ntors n Chiinu? Eu m-am ntors n Chiinu luna trecut. 2. Ai lucrat la
aceast firm trei ani n urm? Da. Ct dura ziua dumneavoastr de lucru? Ziua mea de
lucru dura opt ore. Noi terminam lucrul la ora cinci seara. 3. Despre ce este acest articol? 4. Cnd
ai discutat aceste ntrebri? Noi le-am discutat sptmna trecut. 5. Cnd ai rspuns la emailul prietenului dumneavoastr? Am rspuns la el ieri. 6. Cine dintre voi a tradus ieri acest
articol? Mihai. El ntotdeuna traduce articole din reviste strine. 7. Cine i-a primit pe colegii
din Germania dou sptmni n urm? Ana. Ea cunoate bine limba german i ntotdeauna
primete economiti germani. 8. Cine dintre voi a rmas la oficiu dup ora ase? Doar eu cu
Nick. Ce ai fcut acolo? Noi am nvat limba englez. Am repetat regulile gramaticale i
cuvintele noi. 9. Ai rspuns la ntrebri alaltieri la lecie? Da. Ce not ai primit? Am
primit o not bun. Am rspuns bine, dar n-am tiut dou cuvinte din a treia lecie. 10. Gabriel
scrie bine n englez, dar vorbete ru aceast limb. 11. Primii reviste engleze n fiecare
sptmn? Da. Cnd ai primit aceast revist? Noi am primit-o sptmna trecut. 12.
Tom este scriitor (writer). Ieri am discutat cartea sa nou. Ea este foarte interesant. 13. Cu cine
ai discutat ieri seara dup lucru? Eu am discutat cu prietenii mei despre filmul nou. 14. Ct a
durat acest film? El a durat dou ore.
12. Translate the dialogues.
a) Ai locuit anul trecut n Bli? Nu. Eu am trit n Chiinu.
Unde ai lucrat? Am lucrat la o firm strin.
Cunoatei multe limbi strine? Nu. Eu cunosc doar engleza i franceza. Anul trecut am
studiat acolo germana, dar o cunosc foarte ru.
Cunoatei bine limba englez? Da. Eu citesc, scriu i vorbesc engleza. Eu traduc des texte
din romn n englez.
Sora dumneavoastr tot cunoate limba englez? Nu. Ea cunoate bine franceza. Ea citete
multe cri franceze.
b) Unde ai lucrat patru ani n urm? Eu am lucrat la un oficiu.
n ce zile lucrai? Noi lucram lunea, marea, miercurea, joia i vinerea.
Lucrai smbta sau duminica? Cteodat lucram smbta, iar duminica pregteam leciile.
Ce studiai? Eu studiam limba englez.
35

Aveai lecii de englez dimineaa sau seara dup lucru? De obicei fceam lecii de englez
seara.
Cnd v ntorceai acas dup lecii? De obicei m ntorceam acas la ora apte seara, dar
cteodat rmneam la oficiu dup lecii pentru a discuta unele ntrebri cu profesorul.
Vorbeai i citeai bine n englez? Ce note primeai de obicei? Deseori primeam note bune.
Eu lucram mult pentru englez acas.
Acum citii multe cri engleze? Da, acum cunosc bine aceast limb i citesc multe cri
engleze.
De unde luai aceste cri? Le iau de la prietenii mei. Eu citesc de asemeni multe articole din
reviste i ziare engleze i cteodat le traduc n romn.
13. Write a dialog in the past using the given words and word combinations.
to live, to work (at), office, on weekdays, to study hard, to work hard (at), to stay, last night, to
repeat, to learn, at the lesson, to answer, many questions, to translate (from... into...), to receive
good marks, to last, to return home.
14. Write a short essay on the topic: My Working Day Yesterday

36

LESSON FIVE (THE FIFTH LESSON)


MY FRIENDS LAST WEEKEND
A week ago my friend Gabriel came to Bli from Chiinu. On Saturday he came to see me and
my family. We decided to spend the weekend together and Gabriel stayed with us till Monday.
On Sunday we woke up late. We got up at nine oclock, washed and dressed. Then we had
breakfast.
What do you usually do on your days off? Gabriel asked us at table.
We often go to the country, my sister answered. Sometimes we go to the theatre or to the
cinema.
Do you often go to the park? Gabriel asked.
We were there last week. It is a good park. We like it very much. Do you want to go there,
Gabriel?
Oh, yes, I do. The weather is so fine today!
We went to the park together with our friends.
In the park we skated and skied and had a very nice time.
We came home at two oclock. After dinner Gabriel and I played computer games and in the
evening we went to the cinema. The film was interesting and not very long. It began at seven
oclock and about nine it was over. We did not want to go home so early and went to see our
friends. They were very glad to see us and we had supper together.
We returned home late, but we did not go to bed at once. Gabriel wrote two e-mails to his
friends in Chiinu. At twelve oclock we went to bed.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to see - a vedea
to go to see - a merge n vizit
to come to see - a veni n vizit
a family - o familie
to decide - a hotr
to spend - a petrece
till - pn (la)
to wake up - a se trezi
to get up - a se scula
late trziu
early devreme
to wash - a (se) spla
to dress - a (se) mbrca
then - apoi, pe urm
to have breakfast - a lua micul dejun
... dinner - ... dejunul
... supper -... cina
to go to the country - a merge la ar

a theatre - un teatru
a cinema - un cinematograf
to like - a place
to want - a vrea, a dori
weather - timp
so - aadar, deci
today - azi
to skate - a patina
to ski - a schia
to have a nice time - a se distra bine
to play - a (se) juca
to play computer games - a juca la calculator
interesting - interesant
to begin - a ncepe
about nine - n jurul orei nou
to be over - a se sfri
to be glad - a fi bucuros
once odat
at once - imediat

37

GRAMMAR
POSSESSIVE (GENITIVE) CASE
animate
s

singular
This mans book
My friends sister

plural
These mens book
My friends sisters

of The book of this man


The books of these men
The sister of my friend The sisters of my friend
inanimate
s

singular
This rooms door

plural
These romms door

of The door of this room


The page of the book

The doors of these


rooms
The pages of the book

Examples: We liked Toms report.


name / son / my sister my sisters sons name or the name of my sisters son;

In oral speech we often meet such expressions as to my friends (la prietenul meu), at my
sisters (la sora mea), at the bakers (la bcnie), etc.
Example: Yesterday I was at my sisters.
In the morning he went to his friends.
THE PLACE OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT COMPLIMENTS
I often write them letters
I often write letters to them.

Write Tom a letter.


Write a letter to Tom.

I wrote a letter to Mr. Smith in the morning. Send it to him now.


I received a letter yesterday. Read it to your friend.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Form the possessive case of the following nouns.
book / this student
blackboard / our classroom
friend / my son
newspaper / this man
toys / his children
walls / my flat
streets / that town

car / her brother


group / these students
mark / the pupil
attitude / people
image / this house
boy-friend / that girl
colour / my car

2. Translate.
38

a) 1. Camera prietenului meu. 2. Camerele prietenului meu. 3. Camera prietenilor mei. 4.


Camerele prietenilor mei. 5. Fiul acestui economist. 6. Economitii oficiului nostru. 7. Fiica
acestui profesor. 8. Dictarea acestui student. 9. Scrisoarea acestor medici. 10. Cuvintele leciei a
aptea. 11. Copiii acestor profesori. 12. Prietenul lui Nick. 13. Scrisoarea lui Gabriel. 14.
Apartamentul prietenului meu.
b) 1. Numele fiului prietenului meu. 2. Numele surorii lui Tom. 3. Crile prietenului fiului meu.
4. Apartamentul surorii acestui student. 5. Numele copiilor acestor medici. 6. Caietele elevilor
profesorului Smith. 7. Notele fiilor acestui economist.
3. Answer the questions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Is this your sons exercise-book?


Whose exercise-book is this?
Is that this boys or that girls exercise-book?
Whose friend came to Bli last night?
Does his wife work at a factory or at an office?
Does your friends son study French or English?
Whose sister works at an office?
Does your friends sister or your sister know English very well?
Does your sisters son live in Chiinu?

4. Answer the questions using the words given in brackets.


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Whose exercise-book is this? (my sister)


Whose son lives in London? (my friend)
Whose pen is on the table? (our teacher)
Whose mark is good? (my son)
Whose name is Nick? (my sisters son)
Whose name is Gabriel? (this student)

5. Translate paying attention to the use of possessive case.


1. Camera prietenului vostru este mare? Nu, ea nu este mare. 2. Notele acestui student sunt de
obicei bune. 3. Ieri nu ai rspuns la ntrebarea lui Nick. 4. Cnd s-a ntors ieri acas fiul surorii
dumneavoastr? Ieri fiul surorii mele s-a ntors acas trziu. 5. Soia prietenului dumneavoastr
vorbete bine engleza? Da, soia prietenului meu vorbete bine engleza. 6. Ale cui sunt aceste
caiete? Acestea sunt caietele acestor studeni. 7. Acestea sunt reviste? Da. Ale cui sunt
aceste reviste? Acestea sunt revistele prietenului meu. 8. Cnd ai citit e-mailul lui Gabriel?
Eu l-am citit alaltieri. 9. i cunoatei pe prietenii colegului dumneavoastr? Da, eu i cunosc.
10. Soia acestui economist este medic sau profesoar? Ea este medic.
6. Find the direct compliment and change it where possible.
1. Give me that magazine. 2. Take that exercise-book off the table and give it to me. 3. Write a
letter to our friends. 4. Dont open your exercise-book, read exercise ten to us from your
exercise-book. 5. Yesterday he received many magazines and gave them to us. 6. Dont give me
this book. I read this book last month. 7. The day before yesterday we wrote a letter to that firm.
8. Give us this article. We want to read this article to our teacher. 9. Do you have a black pen?
Give me your black pen, please. 10. My parents live in Chiinu. I often write letters to my
parents.
7. Work on the model.
39

Ex.: Send this book to Tom. Send Tom this book.


1. Give this pen to Gabriel. 2. Write a letter to your parents. 3. Send an e-mail to your friend. 4.
Give these books to our economists. 5. Tell this story to your son. 6. Write a telegram to his
mother.
8. Use the verbs in brackets in the right tense form.
1. Yesterday (to be) my day off. I usually (to wake up) early on my days off. But sometimes I
(not to get up) at once. Yesterday I (to get up) at eight oclock. 2. When you (to have) breakfast
yesterday? I (to have) breakfast at nine oclock in the morning. 3. We usually (to stay) over the
weekend in the country, but we (not to go) to the country yesterday as the weather (to be) very
bad. 4. My son (to be) a student. He (to study) very well. He always (to prepare) his lessons.
Yesterday he (to get) three good marks. 5. When you (to be) at the theatre last time? I (to be) at
the theatre two weeks ago last time. 6. I usually (to go) to bed at eleven oclock in the evening.
Yesterday my friends (to come to see) me and I (to go) to bed at nine oclock in the morning. 7.
Where you (to be) yesterday? I (to be) at the cinema. You (to like) the new film? Yes, I (to
do). 8. Who (to give) you this magazine yesterday? Nick (to do). You (to read) it last night?
Yes, I (to do). The articles in this magazine (to be) interesting? Yes, they (to be).
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
9. Read aloud.
bread, weather, breakfast, dread, thread, breath, threat, spread, steady;
ail, day, seat, new, soon, task, cow, stout, voice, took, soil, space, cast, sail, rain, ounce, last,
steep, pen, stool, moist, stoop, want, wash, wasp, past.
10. Answer the questions.
1. Do you often see your friend from Chinu?
2. What is his name?
3. What is your friend?
4. Where does he work?
5. Did he come to see you last month?
6. Do you like to stay over the weekend with your family or with your friends?
7. Do you like to stay at home on your days off?
8. Do you like to spend your weekends in the country or in town?
9. When do you usually get up on Sunday?
10. When did you get up last Sunday?
11. What did you do then?
12. Where do you usually stay over the weekends?
13. What did you do after breakfast?
14. Do you go often to the park?
15. Do you like to skate?
16. Do you play computer games?
17. Does your friend play computer games too?
18. Do you often go to cinema?
19. What do you like cinema or theatre?
20. When did you go to the cinema last time?
21. What film did you see there?
40

22. Was it interesting?


23. When did you come home?
24. What did you do after supper?
25. When did you go to bed?
11. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. Last Sunday I went to the cinema with my friends (5). 2. My son was at the theatre the
day before yesterday (4). 3. Little children always like to ask questions (3). 4. I came home
very late two days ago (4). 5. My friends little son usually goes to bed early (2).
12. Translate paying attention to the pronouns in object case.
1. Eu am luat crile lui i le-am citit. 2. Nu l-am vzut ieri. 3. Prietenii lor i-au vizitat sptmna
trecut. 4. Noi l-am ntrebat: Cum te cheam? 5. Cu cine ai vorbit dup micul dejun? Noi
am vorbit cu fiul lui. 6. Surorile lui au hotrt s-l viziteze i sptmna trecut au plecat la
Chiinu. 7. Timpul era frumos i eu l-am rugat s m ia cu el n parc. 8. Unde l-ai vzut luna
trecut? Noi l-am vzut la teatru. 9. Prietenii lui l-au ntrebat despre lucru i el a rspuns la
ntrebrile lor. 10. Luai aceste reviste i citii-le acas.
13. Fill in the spaces with the right form of to give or to take.
1. _____ that red pencil off the table and _____ it to me. 2. Dont _____ your children to the
country. The weather is bad. 3. Your sister _____ me a very interesting book last week. I want to
return it to her. _____ it, _____ it to her and thank her for it. 4. Where do you _____ English
newspapers and magazines to read?
14. Insert the right article where necessary.
Do you want to go to ___ country? my friend asked me on our last day off. Yes, I do, I
answered. I want to go to ___ Central Park. We came to ___ Central Park at eleven oclock in
___ morning. ___ weather was fine. We walked in ___ park for three hours. At two oclock in
___ afternoon we returned home. We had ___ dinner and rested ___ hour. In ___ evening we
went to ___ cinema. (We often go to ___ cinema or to ___ theatre on Saturday or on Sunday).
We saw ___ very interesting film. We liked ___ film very much. Then we went ___ home. At
___ home we had ___ supper, played ___ computer game and went to ___ bed at twelve oclock.
15. Translate.
1. Cine v-a vizitat ieri? Prietenii fiului meu. Noi am fost foarte bucuroi s-i vedem. Ei au stat
cu noi pn seara. 2. Unde ai petrecut ultimul dumneavoatr weekend? Noi l-am petrecut la
ar. Ne-am ntors n ora seara trziu. 3. Unde ai fost alaltieri? Am fost la cinema. V-a
plcut filmul? Da, mi-a plcut foarte mult. Cnd v-ai ntors acas? Eu m-am ntors acas
trziu i m-am culcat imediat. 4. Ieri la lecie noi am citit un text nou. Dup aceea profesorul ne-a
pus ntrebri i noi am rspuns la ele. Profesorul ne-a dat trei exerciii s le facem acas. 5. La ce
or ai luat dejunul azi? Eu am luat dejunul la ora trei dup amiaz. 6. V place s jucai la
calculator? Da. Dar anul acesta joc nu prea des. Anul trecut am jucat des. 7. Prietenii mei vin
de obicei s m vad duminica. Noi discutm multe ntrebri i mergem n parc. 8. De obicei eu
petrec sfritul sptmnii cu familia mea. Duminica trecut noi am hotrt s plecm la ar.
Am plecat acolo dimineaa. Timpul era minunat. Ne-am ntors n ora seara trziu. 9. Seara de
obicei studiez, dar cteodat merg la cinema sau la teatru. 10. Sora mea iubete s pun multe
ntrebri i eu ntotdeauna rspund la ele. 11. Surorii dumneavoatr i place engleza? Da, foarte
41

mult. Ea studiaz mult i cunoate limba englez bine. 12. Cine din familia dumneavoatr
cunoate bine franceza? Fiul surorii mele. 13. Unde ai fost ieri? Am venit la dumneavoatr,
dar nu erai acas. Eu am fost la cinema. Mi-a plcut filmul foarte mult. 14. Duminica trecut
prietenul meu a dormit pn la ora zece dimineaa. Cnd s-a trezit, a hotrt s nu plece la ar.
El s-a sculat, s-a mbrcat, s-a splat, a luat micul dejun i s-a dus n parc. El s-a plimbat acolo
pn dup amiaz. La ora trei el a luat dejunul. Dup dejun prietenul meu a venit s m vad.
Ne-am jucat la calculator i dup aceea am discutat puin (a little). Am vrut s mergem la
cinema, dar am hotrt s stm acas. La ora nou prietenul meu a plecat acas. La ora zece el a
luat cina, a citit puin i s-a culcat. 15. Cnd ai nceput s lucrai ieri? Eu am nceput s lucrez
la ora zece, dup lecia de englez. 16. Sora mea locuiete lng mine. Numele ei este Ana. Ea
tot este student. Noi mergem la universitate mpreun. Dup lecii de obicei venim acas sau
mergem n parc.
16. Retell the text as if you were Gabriel.

LESSON SIX (THE SIXTH LESSON)


42

MY FRIENDS FAMILY
My friends name is Daniel. He lives in Bucharest. His family is not very large. He has a wife
and two children. His wifes name is Jane. His childrens names are Ann and Nick.
Daniels wife is a young woman. She is twenty-nine years old. She works at the university. She
is a teacher. She has many students. The students marks are good. She has no bad students. My
friends daughter is a girl of ten. She goes to primary school. At school she studies many
subjects. She also studies English. She works hard and knows this language well. She usually
makes few mistakes in English. As a rule she has no bad marks. She is a good pupil. She likes
to read very much. She also helps her mother at home.
His son is a little boy. He was born six years ago. Every morning his father takes him to the
kindergarten. Soon the boy will be seven years old. He will not go to the kindergarten. He will
go to school.
My friend has a sister too. Next year she will graduate from the university. She will be an
economist. She lives with her parents in the country. His sisters husband is a doctor.
My friend has no brother.
In summer my friends wife usually takes her children to the country to their grandmother and
grandfather. They like their grandchildren very much. Soon she will take them to the country
again.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

large mare
a wife - o soie
children copii
young tnr
old - btrn, n vrst
a woman - o femeie
an university - o universitate
a daughter - o fiic
a girl of ten - o fat de zece ani
primary school - coala primar
to work at school - a lucra la coal
to go to school - a merge la coal
a subject - un obiect (colar)
to make - a face
a mistake - o greeal
as a rule - de regul...
bad ru
a pupil - un/o elev()
to help - a ajuta
a mother - o mam
a father - un tat

a son - un fiu
to be born - a se nate
kindergarten - cre, grdini
soon - degrab, n curnd
to graduate (from) - a absolvi
parents - prini
a husband - un so
a brother - un frate
summer - var
in (the) summer - vara
winter - iarn
spring - primvar
autumn - toamn
a grandmother - o bunic
a grandfather - un bunel
a grandchild - un nepot
again - iari, din nou
in a week - peste o sptmn
tomorrow - mine
the day after tomorrow - poimine

ex: When were you born? I was born in 1986.

43

GRAMMAR
FUTURE INDEFINITE (SIMPLE) TENSE
Affirmative Form
singular
plural
I will (shall) read
We will (shall) read
You will read
You will read
He (She, It) will read
They will read
Negative Form
singular
I will not (wont) read
You wont read
He (She, It) wont read

plural
We wont read
You wont read
They wont read

Interrogative Form
singular
Will (Shall) I read
Will you read
Will he (she, it) read

plural
Will (Shall) we read
Will you read
Will they read

Examples: Hell do that tomorrow. Hell not do that tomorrow. Will he do that tomorrow?
I will (shall) go to the theatre. I wont (shant) go to the theatre. Will (Shall) I go to the theatre?
Adverbs used with Future Indefinite:
tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, in two (three, four, etc.) days (weeks, months, etc.), in a week,
in a month, next week, next month, next year, soon.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Put the following sentences into negative and interrogative forms.
1. I shall go to the cinema tomorrow. 2. You will work on Sunday. 3. My friends will come to see
me the day after tomorrow. 4. He will soon meet Tom. 5. These students will write a dictation in
three days. 6. We will do this work at once. 7. My friend will be an economist in two years. 8. I
will be at home next week.
2. Change the sentences in the future using the appropriate adverbs.
1. My sister studies German. 2. We receive many e-mails from our friends. 3. The lesson is not
over. 4. I am usually at home after six oclock. 5. Does your friend live in London? 6. She is not
an economist. 7. Do they often discuss interesting questions at the office? 8. I dont get up at five
oclock in the morning. 9. This boy is good pupil. 10. These students like to read in the library.
3. Answer the questions.
1. Will you work tomorrow?
2. On what day wont you work?
44

3. Where will you spend the weekend?


4. Will you stay at home or go to the country over the weekend?
5. Will your sister go to the park with her friends on Sunday?
6. When shall we go to see our parents?
7. Who will translate this text?
8. How long will you work at this project?
9. How long will your lesson last tomorrow?
10. When will you discuss that question?
11. Whose children will go to school next year?
12. When will your brother begin to study foreign languages?
13. What language will your sister know in two years?
4. Use the verbs in brackets in the right tense form.
1. I usually (to go) to the office at eight oclock. 2. Where you (to work) next year? 3. Where you
(to be) yesterday at five oclock? I (to be) at home. 4. You (to be) at home on your day off?
Yes, I will. 5. What kind of books you (to like) to read? 6. You (to read) this book last year?
Yes, I (to do). 7. My friend (not to like) to write letters. 8. From whom you (to receive) an e-mail
yesterday? 9. What marks your son (to get) last week? He (to get) three good marks. 10. Where
you (to be) in the evening? 11. When he (to speak) to your brother about this? 12. When we (to
speak) English well? You (to speak) English well in three years. 13. Your friend (to tell) about
his mother then? No, he did not. 14. When we (to tell) our mother about it? We (to tell) her
about it tomorrow. 15. They usually (not to speak) English at home.
5. Translate paying attention to the use of Future Indefinite Tense.
1. Peste o sptmn voi pleca la Chiinu. 2. Feciorul surorii mele va scrie scrisori prietenilor
si mine. 3. Lucrarea lui nou va fi foarte interesant. 4. Bunica mea nu va lucra n curnd. Anul
viitor ea va avea aizeci de ani. 5. Mine prietenul meu nu va merge la cinema. El va pleca seara
la lecia de englez. 6. Cnd vei fi acas? Eu voi fi acas dup ora apte seara. 7. n curnd
studenii vor vorbi bine engleza. 8. Ce vei face n ast sear? Noi vom pleca s vizitm
prietenii notri. 9. Venii la noi mine sear. Noi vom fi acas dup ora opt seara. 10. La ce or
v vei trezi mine? Eu m voi trezi la ora ase dimineaa. 11. Cnd vei ncepe s traducei
aceste articole? Eu voi ncepe s le traduc peste o or. 12. Cu cine vei repeta cuvintele noi?
Eu le voi repeta mpreun cu prietenii mei. 13. Sptmna viitoare noi vom nva multe cuvinte
noi. 14. Peste trei ani prietenul meu va locui la Londra. El va fi economist i va lucra nu departe
de Londra. 15. Parcul central se afl departe de casa mea. Eu voi merge pe jos acolo astzi. 16.
Cnd vei discuta aceste ntrebri? Noi le vom discuta peste trei zile. 17. Aceti studeni vor
studia limba german, iar acei studeni vor studia limba francez. 18. n curnd noi vom citi un
nou text n limba englez. 19. Azi vei rmne la oficiu dup lucru? Da. 20. Cnd vei merge la
ar? Noi vom merge la ar luna viitoare.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
6. Read aloud.
child, find, wild, mild, kind, old, cold, bold, told;
other, mother, brother, another, come, love;
knit, rude, storey, clear, blast, cask, bleak, fit;
bite, hurt, bark, right, knight, night, sink, skill, step, stern, tusk, tune.

45

7. Answer the questions.


1. What is your name?
2. What are you?
3. Where do you live?
4. Have you a family?
5. Is your family large or small?
6. How many brothers and sisters have you?
7. What are their names?
8. How old are they?
9. How old are you?
10. When was your brother / sister born?
11. When were you born?
12. Does your brother / sister go to school?
13. Where do you study?
14. Do students take (study) many subjects at the university?
15. How do your friends study?
16. Do they often make mistakes in their homework?
17. What marks do they usually get?
18. When will you graduate from the university?
19. Where do your parents live?
20. Do you go to the country in summer or in winter?
21. Do you like to go to the country in spring?
22. Does your sister / brother study English?
23. What language will you study next year?
24. How much time do you usually spend on your English?
25. With whom will you prepare your home-task today?
26. Where will you go next Sunday?
8. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. We have many English books (3). 2. I shall have very much work to do next week (1). 3. My
sisters son has five lessons at school every Friday (3). 4. We had three dictations last month
(2). 5. My friends wife has a French lesson in the evening (5). 6. Her sister has two children
(3). 7. We will have an interesting lesson tomorrow (2). 8. My friend has four sons (1).
9. Change the possessive adjective with the nouns given in brackets.
1. His daughter is a girl of ten (my friend). 2. Their sons go to school every day (his sisters). 3.
Their marks are always good (these students). 4. Their parents are doctors (these children). 5.
His friend graduated from the university last year (my brother). 6. His family will live in London
(this man). 7. Her husband is a doctor (their teacher). 8. I will soon see his parents (my best
friend). 9. I like his work (Peter). 10. I know her brothers name (this woman).
10. Insert the right article where necessary. Retell the text.
My brother Peter lives in ___ Chiinu. He is ___ doctor. He has ___ family. He has ___ wife
and two children. His wife Helen has no ___ mother, but she has ___ father. ___ Helens father is
___ old engineer. He lives in ___ country. ___ Peters office is near his house. He goes there in
___ morning. ___ Peters son goes to ___ school. He is ___ good pupil. ___ Peters daughter is
two years old. In ___ year her mother will take her to ___ kindergarten. On their days off they
often go to ___ country to see ___ Helens father.
46

11. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.


Mary Brown is a woman ___ 32. Eight years ago she graduated from the university where she
studied economics. She is a teacher now. She teaches the management ___ this university. She
usually goes ___ the university ___ eight oclock ___ the morning and comes ___ home ___
three oclock ___ the afternoon. Her daughter Ann is a girl ___ nine. She goes ___ school. Every
day she spends four hours ___ school. ___ home she prepares her home task and helps ___ her
mother. Marys son is a boy ___ four. Every morning Marys husband takes him ___ the
kindergarten. Marys parents do not live ___ her. They live ___ the country ___ ___ Bli. ___
summer Mary takes her children ___ the country and they live ___ their grandparents there.
Their grandfather often tells ___ them ___ his life and work.
12. Use the appropriate word from the list below in the right form.
( to help, a subject, old, the country, to be born, an office, a mark, to graduate from, a university,
a pupil, a village, again, summer, a girl, to tell)
1. My sister ____ ______ in 1986. Now she is 18 years ____ . She studies at ________ . She
takes many _____ there. She sometimes ____ her brother and sisters to prepare their lessons. 2. I
live in Chiinu, but I like to spend the weekend in _____ . 3. My brother is an economist now.
He _____ ____ the university last year. He works at _____ and he _____ us about his work very
often. 4. Tess is ____ of twelve. She is a ____. She studies well. She always gets good ____. 5.
Last year I spent two months in ______ . In the _____ I will go there ____.
13. Translate. Pay attention to the meaning of the given words.
a) to make, to do.
1. Prietenul meu a fcut ieri o prezentare (a presenatation) interesant. Ea ne-a plcut foarte
mult. 2. Acest student iari a fcut multe greeli n lucrarea sa i a primit o not rea. 3. Cine a
fcut aceast lucrare anul trecut? Ea este foarte bun. 4. Ce fel de exerciii facei de obicei
acas? 5. Cine va face un raport pe aceast tem (on this subject)? Peter.
b) to tell, to speak.
1. Sora mea vorbete bine engleza. 2. Profesorul nostru ne vorbete des despre greelile noastre.
3. Noi vorbim des despre lucrul nostru. 4. Vorbete cu ea despre aceasta desear. 5. Povestii-i
ei despre aceasta. 6. Poimine prietenul meu John va veni s m vad i noi vom vorbi despre
noul film.
c) many, much, few, little
1. Cte articole ai tradus ieri? 2. Ct timp vei cheltui pentru acest lucru? 3. Noi am fcut
puine exerciii la ultima lecie. 4. Cnd avei mult lucru? 5. El are mult sau puin hrtie
bun? 6. Copiii lui vor citi multe cri interesante luna viitoare. 7. Cine v-a pus multe ntrebri?
8. Cte luni prietenul tu a locuit la voi? El a locuit la noi trei luni. 9. Ct timp sora lui
studiaz engleza?
14. Write by five sentences of each type.
a)
b)
c)
d)

My sister is 23 years old.


How old is your friends son?
She is a woman of 30.
My brother was born in 1982.

47

15. Make sentences using the given words.


to be born, young, to go to school, in the summer, subject, to help, to graduate (from), in the
autumn, again, soon, to make mistakes, parents, to finish school, to make a report on, as a rule, to
have much work to do.
16. Translate.
1. Feciorul prietenului meu este elev. El nva bine. El nu primete note rele. Acas el i ajut
des mama. 2. Eu nu am surori, dar am doi frai. 3. Pete a absolvit universitatea patru ani n urm.
El este economist. Acum el locuiete n Londra. El are un apartament spaios. 4. Aceast femeie
este profesor. Ea lucreaz la coal. Ea are muli elevi. n fiecare diminea ea l duce pe fiul ei
mic la grdini. Seara dup lucru ea l ia acas. 5. Nu venii la mine duminic. Eu nu voi fi
acas. Eu voi pleca la ar la prinii mei. 6. Avei sor? Da. Cinci ani n urm ea absolvit
universitatea. Acum lucreaz la un oficiu n Chiinu. 7. Ci copii are prietenul dumneavoastr?
El are doi copii: un fiu i o fiic. 8. Domnul Smith este un inginer btrn. El nu are nepoi, dar
are dou nepoate. Prima nepoat s-a nscut apte ani n urm. 9. Anul trecut eu n-am studiat
limba englez. Eu nu am avut manual de englez. Acum am multe cri n limba englez. De
regul, citesc seara. Sora mea tot cunoate aceast limb i cteodat vorbim engleza mpreun.
Anul viitor noi vom studia limba francez. 10. Cinci ani n urm eu n-am locuit la Bli, eu am
locuit la Chiinu. Aveam acolo un apartament bun. n zilele de odihn prietenii mei m vizitau
des. Vara i iarna plecam des mpreun la ar. 11. Sora mea are dou fiice. Fiicele surorii mele
nva bine i i ajut mama acas. 12. Prinii mei au o cas la ar. Casa prinilor mei este
foarte mare. Ea are trei camere, ele sunt curate i luminoase. Eu i vizitez des toamna. 13.
Sptmna viitoare eu voi avea mult de lucru. 14. Fiica fratelui meu va fi degrab student. Ea
va studia limba german. Ea are multe cri n limba german. 15. Smbta viitoare prietenul
meu va avea puin lucru i el va merge la cinema mpreun cu noi. 16. Cum l cheam pe
prietenul vostru? Numele lui este Gabriel. Ci ani are? El are 23 de ani. 17. Cnd i unde
v-ai nscut? Eu m-am nscut n 1986 n Orhei. 18. Eu am avut mult lucru sptmna trecut.
19. Anul trecut, de regul, n ce zile aveai lecii de englez? 20. Ct timp, de regul, cheltuii
pentru tema de acas? De obicei eu cheltuiec pe ea dou ore. 21. Cte cri engleze ai citit luna
trecut? Eu am citit trei cri engleze. 22. Colegul meu a avut puin timp s pregteasc
raportul, dar el l-a dat la timp (in time). 23. Nu-l ajutai pe fiul dumneavoastr s-i fac tema de
acas.
17. Translate the following text and retell it.
Eu locuiesc cu prinii n Chiinu. Prinii mei nu sunt n vrst. Tatl are 40 de ani, iar mama
35. Tatl meu este inginer. El lucreaz la o fabric (factory) mare. Lui i place lucrul su i el
lucreaz mult. Mama mea este profesoar. Ea lucreaz la coal. Copiii o iubesc foarte mult. Ei
nva bine. Ei pregtesc ntotdeauna temele de acas i rspund bine la ntrebrile profesorului.
Noi avem o cas la ar. Vara mergem deseori acolo. Mie mi place s m odihnesc acolo. Eu ajut
prinii mei s lucreze n grdin (garden). Degrab voi pleca iari acolo.
18. Make a short essay on one of the topics below using the given words.
a) My Brothers Friend.
to have a good friend, to be born in..., to go to school, to want, to help, parents, to begin to work,
office, to begin to study, again, to graduate from the university, to be an economist.
b) My Father.
48

to be ... years old, a doctor, to work, in the country, in the summer, to like, in the winter, to come
to see, to ski, again, to tell.
c) My Friends Studies.
at the university, subjects, interesting, to help, to want, much, to make a report, to make
mistakes, class, English, well, teacher, student, group.

49

LESSON SEVEN (THE SEVENTH LESSON)


MY SISTERS OFFICE
Two years ago my sister graduated from the university and went to Chiinu to work there. She
is a manager and works at an office of a foreign company. Last month she moved in a very
comfortable office in a new building. Her office is on the third floor. A week ago I received a
letter from my sister with many pictures of the town and of her office.
My sisters office is not too large, but there is enough workspace in it. It has a window
opposite the door and a little balcony with a nice view on the main street. The walls of the
office are greenish and there are posters on them. The ceiling is white. The floor is yellow.
There is not too much furniture in it. Near the window there is a desk where my sister works.
There is a computer, a fax and a telephone on this desk. My sister usually has much computer
work to do. There is also a desk lamp. In the left corner there is a bookcase with adjustable
shelves. There are a lot of books on them. In the middle of the office there is a round table,
where my sister usually receives guests when she has important meetings. On it there is a white
tablecloth and a vase with flowers. There is an armchair and four chairs at the table. To the
right of the door there are two sofas.
At home she has a study. There are many things in it and also a writing table, a radio set, and a
television set. She usually does there her paperwork. She stays there much time when she has
to prepare different projects.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a manager - un manager
a company - o companie
to move - a trece, a (se) mica
comfortable - confortabil()
a building - o cldire, un bloc
the third floor - etajul trei
a picture - o imagine
too prea
enough - destul, ndeajuns
workspace - spaiu de lucru
a window - o fereastr
opposite - opus(), vizavi
a balcony - un balcon
a view - o vedere, o privelite
a street - o strad
the main street - strada principal
greenish verzui
a poster - un afi
furniture mobil
a desk - un birou, o mas de lucru
a fax - un fax
a telephone - un telefon
a desk lamp - o lamp de mas
right - drept (dreapt)
to the right - la dreapta
left - stng()
to the left - la stnga
a corner - un col

a bookcase - un dulap de cri, o bibliotec


adjustable - ajustabil()
a shelf - o poli
(the) middle - mijloc(ul)
in the middle - la mijloc(ul)
round - rotund()
important - important()
a meeting - o ntlnire
tablecloth - fa de mas
a vase - o vaz
a flower - o floare
an armchair - un fotoliu
a chair - un scaun
a sofa - o canapea
a study - un birou, o camer de lucru
a thing - un lucru, un obiect
a kitchen - o buctrie
a bedroom - un dormitor
a bathroom -(odaie de) baie
a dining room - sufragerie
a writing table - o mas de lucru
a radio set - un aparat de radio
a television set - un televizor
paperwork - lucru cu documentele
to prepare - a (se) pregti
different - diferit()
a project- un proiect

50

GRAMMAR
THERE IS..., THERE ARE...
THERE IS/ARE
Examples:

Examples:

subject

There is
There are

place

a newspaper
English books

on the table.
on the shelf.

place

THERE IS/ARE

subject

On the table
On the shelf

there is
there are

a newspaper.
English books.

Other examples: There is a table and five chairs in this room.


There are five chairs and a table in this room.
There are many students there.
Is there a map in your room?
Were there many mistakes in his homework?
What is there on the wall? There is a picture on the wall.
Who is there in the room? There is a boy in the room.
Negation

Total negation

There is not (isnt) a book on the table.


table.
There arent newspapers on the shelf.
on the shelf.

There is no book on the


There are no newspapers

GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Make the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.
1. There is a blackboard in our room. 2. There are English books in my bag. 3. There was a letter
on the table. 4. There will be a new cinema in our town next year. 5. There were many mistakes
in your dictation yesterday. 6. There are many new grammar rules in Lesson four. 7. There is
much paper on the table. 8. There was enough ink in my pen to write two letters.
2. Choose the right variant.
1. There (is, are) a large table in my room. 2. There (is, are) three windows in my office. 3. There
(is, are) a table and four chairs in my sisters room. 4. There (is, are) a blackboard, a table and
many chairs in our classroom. 5. There (is, are) many pencils and a pen in my bag. 6. There (is,
are) a textbook and two exercise books on my table. 7. There (was, were) no school here ten
years ago. 8. There (was, were) many children in the park yesterday.

51

3. Answer the questions. Pay attention to the use of There is and There are.
1. Is there a blackboard in your classroom?
2. Are there many tables in your classroom?
3. What books are there in your bag?
4. Are there bad students in your group?
5. How many mistakes were there in your dictation?
6. Are there many chairs in this office?
7. In what room is there a large table?
8. In whose room are there two windows?
9. What is there in your room?
10. What will there be in your room soon?
11. Were there many children in the park yesterday?
12. Will there be many people in the park on Sunday?
13. Was there a foreign company in your town two years ago?
14. When will there be a new office in this building?
15. How many pages will there be in your friends new book?
4. Translate using There is or There are.
a) 1. n oraul nostru sunt multe coli. 2. n grupa noastr erau zece studeni, acum vor fi ase. 3.
Sunt multe reviste i ziare pe aceast mas? Nu, nu sunt multe. 4. n clasa noastr nu este tabl.
5. n aceast camer sunt trei ferestre. 6. Ce fel de cri sunt pe aceast poli? Acolo sunt
multe cri engleze. 7. n grupa voastr erau muli studeni anul trecut? Nu. Ci studeni erau
n grupa voastr? Acolo erau zece studeni. 8. Ce fel de companii sunt n oraul nostru? n
oraul nostru sunt multe companii strine. 9. n Chiinu sunt multe universiti? Da, acolo
sunt multe universiti. 10. n oficiul nostru este puin mobil. 11. Pe aceast mas nu sunt
reviste engleze.
b) 1. Eu am o carte interesant.
Pe mas este o carte interesant.
La mine n geant este o carte inetersant.
2. n ultima dictare el nu are greeli.
n aceast lucrare nu este nici o greeal.
El nu are greeli.
3. n acest ziar sunt multe articole interesante.
Ea are multe articole interesante.
n revista ei sunt multe articole interesante.
4. Pe masa lor sunt puine reviste engleze.
Ei au puine reviste engleze.
Pe mas sunt puine reviste engleze.
5. Noi nu am avut hrtie ieri.
Pe masa de lucru nu a fost hrtie ieri.
Pe masa noastr de lucru nu a fost hrtie ieri.
c) 1. Lng casa mea este o coal nou. 2. coala nou este lng casa mea. 3. n centrul
oraului este un teatru. 4. Teatrul este n centrul oraului. 5. Greeala este n propoziia a cincea.
6. n propoziia a cincea este o greeal. 7. Cartea este pe mas. 8. Pe mas sunt cri. 9. n
52

aceast revist sunt puine articole interesante. 10. Articolul interesant este la pagina zece. 11. n
acest articol englez nu sunt cuvinte noi. 12. Cuvintele noi sunt pe tabl.
5. Write by five sentences of each type.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

There is a book and many exercise books in my bag.


There are no mistakes in your dictation.
There arent many mistakes in your dictation.
Will there be a new company in your town next year?
There was no English book in my bag yesterday.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES

6. Read aloud.
picture, lecture, rapture, nature, culture, feature;
receive, ceiling, deceive, perceive;
flower, power, shower, powerful, photo, phase, phrase, phosphor, phonic;
out, loud, bow, bowl, howl, fellow, willow;
true, toil, spoil, frail, sheer, steer, tear, sear, sour, ware, dare, lull, maid, square.
7. Answer the questions.
1. Did your brother study at the university?
2. When did your brother graduate from the university?
3. Did he stay to work in Bli?
4. Where does he work now?
5. Has he a new office?
6. Is his office large or small?
7. On which floor is his office?
8. What colour are the walls in his office?
9. What furniture is there in your brothers office?
10. Is there a bookcase in the left corner?
11. Where is the telephone?
12. What else is there in his office?
13. Where does he receive his guests?
14. Has he a study at home?
15. Has he a radio set or a television set?
16. Has he a computer at home?
17. Has he much paperwork to do?
18. Does he often see films on television?
19. Is there a kitchen and a bathroom in his flat?
20. What is there in his bedroom?
8. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. There is a picture of my sister on that wall (1). 2. The picture of my sister is on that wall (1).
3. There is a bathroom in her flat (1). 4. There was a round table in the middle of your office
last year (3). 5. The round table is in his office (2). 6. There are five chairs to the right of the
desk (1). 7. There is a large writing-table to the left of the door (1). 8. There will be sixty-four

53

offices in that building (1). 9. We will have a comfortable flat in Chiinu (3). 10. His children
speak in English very well (2). 11. These students parents like music (2).
9. Ask alternative questions to the bold words.
1. Anns brother usually spends much time on his English (2). 2. My friends sister will
graduate from the university next year (2). 3. Her husband will be an engineer (2). 4. Her
daughter is three years old (1). 5. His father was born in 1960 (2). 6. My sisters son studies
very well (1). 7. We shall live in the country next summer (2).
10. Insert the right article where necessary.
This is ___ picture of my study. Look at it! There is ___ large window in my study. ___ ceiling
of my study is white, ___ floor is yellow, ___ walls are bluish. There is ___ writing-table near
___ window. There is ___ armchair at ___ writing-table. There is ___ telephone and ___ desk
lamp on it. I often speak over ___ telephone. To ___ right of my writing-table there is ___
bookcase. There arent many English books on ___ shelves of ___ bookcase. There is no ___
radio set in my study. ___ radio is in my parents room. My father likes to listen to ___ radio. In
his room there is also ___ television set. In ___ corner of my study there is ___ sofa. I usually
spend ___ much time in my study. I usually work there in ___ evening. On my days off I often
work there in ___ morning and in ___ afternoon.
11. Insert the right preposition where necessary.
I have a friend. Her name is Mary. Mary is a girl ___ sixteen. She goes ___ school. She usually
comes ___ home ___ school ___ three oclock ___ the afternoon. She often helps ___ her mother
___ home. Marys brother does not live ___ his parents. Last year he graduated ___ the
university and went ___ Bucharest to work ___ there. He often speaks ___ his parents ___ the
telephone. He sometimes writes letters ___ them. ___ summer he always comes ___ Chiinu to
see his parents. He tells ___ them ___ his life and work ___ Bucharest. Last month he moved
___ a new office. His office is ___ the second floor ___ a fine large building.
12. Make sentences using the words and word combinations.
a building, on the first of March, on the fourth (...) floor, in the middle of, to have much
computer work, to the right (left) of, else, to listen to, to look in, to speak over the telephone, a
picture, an office, a desk, a computer, three chairs, etc.
13. Use many, much, few, little.
1. Our teacher gave us ____ homework the day before yesterday. 2. Our teacher will give us
____ homework tomorrow too. 3. We usually see ____ men and women in the parks on Sundays.
4. Our office received ____ letters this morning. 5. Did your friend do ____ paperwork
yesterday? 6. Will you spend ____ time on this translation? 7. Did you read ____ English books
last year? 8. How ____ questions did your teacher ask you at the lesson? 9. How ____ computer
work did this manager have yesterday? 10. When will we have ____ new interesting films?
14. Answer the questions using many, much, few, little.
1. How many English classes did you have last month?
2. Did you have much or little paperwork to do last week?
3. Did your friend have few or many English lessons last month?
54

4. Did you spend much time on your English last year?


5. Did your friend spend much time on his French last year?
6. Who spends little time on his homework?
7. Do you usually ask many questions at your lessons?
8. Does your teacher always give you little homework?
9. Will your teacher give you much homework on Friday?
10. Did you receive many or few e-mails from your friends last month?
11. Do you spend much time or little time with your family?
12. When will you have little computer work to do at the office?
15. Write with letters.
27.01.1930
04.02.1986
19.03.1980
01.04.2000

29.05.1940
13.06.1999
25.07.1986
12.08.2004

04.09.1990
28.10.1967
05.11.1956
03.12.2002

16. Translate
1. Unde este faa de mas cea alb? Ea este pe masa cea rotund din mijlocul camerei. 2. Ce
fel de fa de mas este pe masa cea rotund? Pe masa cea rotund este o fa de mas alb. 3.
n colul camerei mele este o canapea. 4. n acest ziar sunt puine lucruri interesante. 5. Ce va fi
n colul stng al acestei camere? Acolo va fi un birou. 6. Telefonul vostru este pe masa de
lucru sau pe televizor? El este pe masa de lucru. Aparatul de radio tot este acolo? Da. i
unde este televizorul? El este la sufragerie. 7. Ieri am primit o scrisoare de la fratele meu.
Acolo erau multe lucruri interesante. n ea erau dou poze de-ale fiicei sale. Ea este deja mare.
Ea are deja trei ani. 8. n aceast camer sunt multe lucruri. n ea sunt opt scaune i cinci fotolii,
o mas i o canapea. Ce mai este n aceast camer? Acolo mai este un dulap de cri. De ce
culoare este dulapul de cri El este brun. 9. n apartamentul fratelui meu este o buctrie foarte
confortabil, dar acolo nu este balcon. 10. Unde se afl calculatorul (computerul)
dumneavoastr? El se afl n biroul meu. 11. Pe aceast imagine sunt muli studeni din grupa
noastr. Pe care i cunoatei? 12. n aceast revist sunt puine lucruri interesante. N-o citii. 13.
Ce este pe peretele oficiului dumneavoastr? Acolo este o hart (map) a oraului nostru. Ce
va mai fi pe peretele acesta? Acolo vor mai fi trei afiuri. 14. n manualul nostru sunt imagini,
dar acolo nu este nici o hart. 15. Fratele meu are un oficiu foarte confortabil. El s-a mutat acolo
trei luni n urm. 16. Privii aceste imagini ale oraului nostru. El v place? Da, oraul vostru
este foarte frumos. Eu am fost acolo civa ani n urm. 17. Sptmna trecut prietenul meu i-a
cumprat un apartament nou. Noi ieri l-am vizitat. Apartamentul este confortabil. El ne-a plcut
foarte mult. Acolo sunt dou camere, sala de bi i buctria. 18. Deschidei crile la pagina 100
i privii imaginea. Ce vedei acolo? Acolo este o cldire nou. 19. n partea dreapt a
universitii se afl un parc frumos. n el sunt multe flori. 20. Voi deschidei des ferestrele de la
camera dumneavoastr? Da. Ele sunt ntotdeauna deschise dimineaa. i seara ele sunt tot
deschise? Nu, seara ele sunt de obicei nchise. 21. Eu am mult de lucru cu documentele i
vreau s termin astzi. 22. Dumneavoastr avei lamp de mas n oficiu? Da. 23. Avei mult de
lucru pe mine? Da. Mine voi pregti un proiect i voi traduce diferite articole. 24. n oficiul
tatlui tu este mult mobil? Nu, acolo este un birou, un dulap de cri cu polie ajustabile. 25.
Pe aceast poli sunt multe cri i reviste n limba englez. 26. Apartamentul surorii mele nu
este prea mare. Dar el are un balcon mare cu o vedere minunat spre strada principal. 27. Pereii
clasei noastre sunt verzui. Pe ei sunt multe afiuri. 28. Vizavi de coala fratelui meu este un bloc
nou unde sunt multe oficii.

55

17. Make a short story on the topic How I Once Went to See My Friends New Office.
to move
a week ago
new
an office
a building
on the second floor
to ask
to come to see
to like
comfortable

a desk
light
clean
a computer
a desk lamp
the colour (of)
in the middle (of)
in the corner
to the right (of)
to the left (of)

flowers
a vase
a picture
a bookcase
a sofa
near
often
a chair
a round table
opposite

56

LESSON EIGHT (THE EIGHTH LESSON)


AT THE LIBRARY
Nowadays many people study foreign languages. They attend lessons before or after work. At
home they prepare their home tasks. They read their exercise books and write many exercises.
They want to know foreign languages very well. So they read many books in foreign languages.
There is a library of foreign literature at our university. Our students often go there to get books
in English.
Jane is one of our students. She also goes to the library when she has no English books at home.
Now she is in the library.
Jane. Good morning!
Librarian. Good morning!
Jane. Have you got any interesting English books?
Librarian. Yes, we have some. What English writers do you like?
Jane. I like Dickens. I read many books by Dickens in my childhood.
Librarian. Did you read them in English or in Romanian?
Jane. I read them in Romanian. I did not know English then.
Librarian. When did you begin to study English?
Jane. I began to study English two years ago.
Librarian. Dont take books by Dickens now. They are too difficult for you. Take a book of
Oscar Wilde or Jack London. Their books are easy. You will read them with interest.
Jane. All right. Show me some books by Oscar Wilde, please, but dont bring The Picture of
Dorian Gray. I read it last month.
(The librarian goes away and soon returns.)
Librarian. I am very sorry, but we have no books by Oscar Wilde on the shelves now. I advise
you to take some books by Jack London. Shall I bring you Martin Eden or The White Fang?
Jane. Give me The White Fang, please.
Librarian. Here it is!
Jane. Thank you very much.
(The student takes the book and leaves the library)
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a library - o bibliotec
a librarian - un bibliotecar
people - oameni, persoane, lume
to attend - a frecventa
so - deci, aadar
literature literatur
history istorie
geography geografie
a book by... - o carte de...
childhood copilrie
difficult - dificil(), greu(ea)
easy - uor(oar)
with interest - cu interes
right - corect, adevrat

wrong - greit
all right - bine
all - tot
to show - a arta
a TV show - un program TV
to bring - a aduce
to go away - a pleca
to be sorry (of) - a prea ru (de)
to advise - a recomanda, a sftui
to leave - a prsi, a pleca
any - ceva, civa, unii, vreun(o)
some - ceva, civa, unii, vreun(o)
one of - unul, una dintre (sg.)
some (any) of - unii, unele dintre (pl.)

57

GRAMMAR
SOME, ANY
1. Some is used generally in affirmative sentences.
Examples: I have some interesting English books.
Some children do not like to read.
Give me some interesting book.
He took some money and went to the cinema.
2. Any is used generally in interrogative and negative sentences.
Examples: Were there any interesting books in the library?
Do you have any good magazines to read?
There arent any mistakes in this sentence. = There are no mistakes in this sentence.
Dont take any books here!
Is there any chalk here?
Are there any pictures in this book?
- Yes, there are some.
- No, there arent any.

Have you any interesting books at home?


- Yes, I have some.
- No, I havent any.

THE ABSENCE OF THE ARTICLE


We dont use the article before nouns indicating sciences and subjects.
Examples: At the university we study Economics, History and Geography.
My friend studies English Literature.
He knows French History very well.

GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Choose the right variant from brackets.
1. There are (some, any) pictures in our textbook. 2. Are there (some, any) flowers in your room?
3. Do you study (some, any) foreign languages? 4. Does your friend have (some, any) English
magazines? 5. Were there (some, any) boys in your group at the university? 6. I did not receive
(some, any) letters last month. 7. There will be (some, any) posters on the walls in my room. 8.
Did you write (some, any) exercises on the blackboard yesterday?
2. Make the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.
1. I read some English magazines yesterday. 2. There were some new words in that text. 3. I
wrote some letters last night. 4. My friend will know some foreign languages soon. 5. There are
some German books in my bookcase. 6. In my office there are some chairs. 7. My sister
translated some articles from this newspaper. 8. I made some mistakes in my dictation yesterday.

58

3. Answer the questions. Pay attention to the use of some and any.
1. Do you study any foreign languages?
2. Did you know any foreign languages last year?
3. Do you read any English books?
4. Have you got any interesting English books at home?
5. Will there be any interesting English magazines at the office tomorrow?
6. Have you got any friends in London?
7. Did you receive any e-mails from your friends yesterday?
8. Have you any brothers?
9. Have you got any pictures of your mother?
10. Does your friend ask you any questions about your work?
11. Did you go to any park on Sunday?
12. Were there any children there?
13. Will there be any children in this park on Sunday?
14. Have you got any questions?
15. Did you have any lessons yesterday?
16. Is there any garden near your house?
17. Were there any flowers in your garden last year?
18. Are there any flowers in your room today?
4. Translate using:
a) some or any.
1. Peste trei ani prietenul meu va cunoate cteva limbi strine. 2. Dumneavoastr citii ceva cri
engleze? Da. 3. Eu nu vd nici o greeal n aceast dictare. 4. n aceast camer sunt ceva
afie? Da. Acolo sunt cteva afie frumoase. 5. Ieri am tradus cteva texte din romn n
englez. 6. Ieri aici au venit civa studeni. 7. Ai primit ceva scrisori luna trecut? Da, luna
trecut eu am primit cteva scrisori de la prietenii mei. 8. Unii studeni vin la biblioteca noastr
s citeasc. 9. Tatl dumneavoastr vorbete vreo limb strin? Nu. 10. El nu tie nici o limb
strin. 11. n dictarea mea sunt ceva greeli? Da, acolo sunt cteva greeli. 12. Fratele meu
cunoate civa economiti din oficiul dumneavoastr. 13. Luna trecut eu n-am citit nici o carte
interesant.
b) one of or some of.
1. Unii dintre colegii notri studiaz limba german. Eu studiez limba englez. 2. Sptmna
trecut eu am citit un articol interesant n unul dintre aceste ziare. 3. n unele dintre aceste
exerciii nu sunt cuvinte noi. 4. n una dintre scrisorile sale prietenul meu scria despre fiica lui.
Ea are trei ani. Ea merge la grdini. 5. Unele dintre aceste cri nu sunt interesante. 6. Mama
mea este profesoar. Ea lucreaz n una din colile oraului nostru. 7. Eu cunosc pe muli dintre
aceti biei. Prinii lor lucreaz n oficiul nostru. 8. Eu vreau s vd unele dintre crile
dumneavoastr. 9. Ieri am vorbit despre dumneavoastr cu unul dintre colegii notri. 10. Familia
noastr este foarte mare. Trei dintre noi lucreaz, i patru studiaz. 11. n oficiul nostru sunt cinci
ingineri. Doi dintre ei cunosc bine limba englez.
c) nouns denoting sciences or subjects.
1. Literatura este un obiect foarte interesant. Mie ea mi plcea foarte mult n coal. 2. Voi
frecventai leciile de (a lecture on) istorie? Da. 3. Prietenul meu nva la universitate istoria,
managementul i geografia. 4. Profesorul nostru cunoate bine literatura englez. 5. Ce pred (to
teach) prietenul dumneavoastr? El pred economia la universitatea noastr. 6. Ce not ai
primit la englez? Eu am primit o not bun. 7. Ieri am asistat la o lecie foarte interesant de
civilizaie german.
59

VOCABULARY EXERCISES
5. Read aloud.
before their work
one of our students
in my childhood

at the library
on the shelves
read them

he leaves the library


she takes the book
here is the book

again, aside, sofa, village, moderate, receive, begin, repeat, rebuke, ticket, teacher;
interval, picnic, army, pilot, pardon, university, multitude, difficult, doctor, motor, grammar,
martyr.
6. Translate the following words and write their transcription.
literature
student
easy
badly
ninety
translation
adviser

central
childhood
economist
doctor
fourteen
engineer
economist

advisable
textbook
fifth
picture
graduation
question
usually

7. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Is there a library at your university?
2. Do many or few people usually go to the library?
3. Are there any books on English Literature in your library?
4. Do you like English Literature?
5. Did you read any books by Jack London in your childhood?
6. Do you read books with interest?
7. Which of your friends advised you to study English last year?
8. Is English difficult or easy for you?
9. Do you study it with interest?
10. When do you usually attend your English lessons?
11. Do you know English History and Geography?
12. Were there any wrong sentences in your last translation?
13. Do the students show their exercise-books to their teacher before or after the lesson?
14. What time do all the students usually leave the classroom?
15. Have you got a television set at home?
16. Were there any interesting television shows last week?
17. Did all your family like the last TV show?
8. Give the antonyms of the following words.
to begin
to leave
to give
to bring
wrong

good
well
difficult
long
to answer

after
to go
old
here
large

60

9. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.


1. Yesterday I was ___ the Central Library ___ Foreign Literature. There were very many people
___ there. 2. Where did you get this book ___ Dickens? I took it ___ the library. 3. Have you
got any English books ___ home? Yes, Ive got some, but they are too difficult ___ you. You
will read them ___ interest ___ a year or two. 4. ___ her childhood she read many books ___
Romanian and ___ English writers. 5. There is an English magazine ___ that table. Show it ___
me, please. 6. Repeat this sentence ___ English, please. 7. What books ___ Jack London have
you got ___ the shelves now? 8. When do you usually leave ___ home? I usually leave ___
home ___ eight oclock ___ the morning. 9. My brother left ___ London ___ Paris last week.
___ two weeks he will return ___ London again. 10. My sisters friend reads many books ___
English and French.
10. Insert the right article where necessary.
There is ___ reading hall of ___ Foreign Literature at our library. Yesterday I went to ___ library
to take ___ book for my report. Have you got any books by Jack London on ___ shelves? I
asked ___ librarian. Yes, weve got some, she answered. Take Martin Eden. It is ___ very
good book. You will read it with ___ interest. I took ___ book, thanked ___ librarian and left
___ library.
11. Pick up all the irregular verbs from the dialogue and give their Past Indefinite forms.
12. Use the appropriate word from those given below.
(a library, a writer, to attend, a television show, childhood, so, to bring, away, difficult, to advise,
easy, interest)
1. I _____ English lessons on Tuesday, Wednesday and Friday. 2. My daughter often _____
many interesting books home. 3. Sometimes I take books from our _____ and sometimes from
my friends. 4. Last year I read many books by English _____. 5. I was born in Orhei and I spend
my _____ in that town. 6. I _____ you to begin to study English next year. 7. Please, help me to
translate this sentence. It is very _____. 8. This book is not difficult, it is _____. I _____ you to
read it. You will read it with _____. 9. Yesterday I went to see Nick. We saw a _____ together
and then I went _____.
13. Make sentences using the words and word combinations given below.
at the library
to attend
a book by ...
in his childhood
a librarian
too (prea)
with interest

all right
to be sorry
on the shelves
to leave
to go away

14. Write with letters.


23.01.1946
07.03.1979
05.02.1994
09.04.1982

04.05.1950
14.06.1902
20.07.1990
28.08.1958

17.09.2000
12.10.1963
19.11.2004
25.12.1800
61

15. Translate.
1. n oficiul nostru multe persoane tiu limba englez. 2. Ci oameni lucreaz n oficiul
dumneavoastr? 3. Eu vreau s cunosc bine limba englez, de aceea eu ntotdeauna frecventez
leciile i fac temele de acas. 4. La mine acas sunt multe cri interesante, de aceea eu merg rar
la bibliotec. 5. Prietena mea este bibliotecar. Sptmna trecut ea mi-a recomandat s citesc
cartea nou a unui scriitor tnr. Aceast carte mi-a plcut foarte mult. 6. Cte lecii de geografie
i istorie pe sptmn aveai la coal? 7. Sora mea iubete literatura. Ea are multe cri de
scriitori strini. 8. Unde v-ai petrecut copilria? Eu mi-am petrecut copilria nu de parte de
Chiinu. 9. Luna trecut ai citit ceva cri engleze? Nu. Eu v sftuiesc s citii aceast
carte. Ea este foarte uoar i inetresant. 10. Cnd fratele dumneavoastr va pleca din (va
prsi) ora? El va pleca sptmna viitoare. 11. mi pare ru c nu ai venit s m vizitai ieri
seara. Prietenul meu din Bucureti a venit n vizit i mi-a adus multe reviste interesante n limba
englez. Eu am vrut s vi le art. 12. Cineva dintre economitii oficiului vostru a plecat n
Londra luna trecut? Da, civa dintre economitii notri au plecat acolo. Ei se vor ntoarce
peste o lun. 13. Toate aceste cri sunt foarte interesante. Eu vreau s iau una dintre ele. 14.
Avei ceva cri despre istoria Angliei? Da. 15. Anul trecut n-am citit nici o carte de acest
scriitor. Ele erau prea grele pentru mine. 16. Nu uitai caietele acas. Aducei-le ntotdeauna la
lecie. 17. Ai nvat vreo limb strin n copilrie? Da. Eu am studiat limba german. 18.
Medicii nu recomand copiilor mici s priveasc mult timp televizorul. 19. Avei ceva reviste
interesante? Aducei-mi, v rog, vreo revist s citesc. Bine, o s v aduc una dintre revistele
mele. 20. Pe poli este vreo carte? Nu, acolo sunt doar ziare. 21. Lumea din aceast cas au
primit apartamente noi.
16. Translate and retell the following text.
n oraul nostru sunt multe biblioteci. Oamenii iubesc s citeasc cri interesante. Copiii de la
diferite coli vin la bibliotecile din ora ca s ia cri. Aici sunt cri de muli scriitori strini.
Aici este de asemeni o bibliotec a universitii noastre. n aceast bibliotec sunt multe sli de
lectur (a reading hall). Studenii notri se duc des la bibliotec pentru a citi sau s pregteasc
temele de acas. La etajul trei se afl sala de literaturi strine. Ea nu este mare dar n ea sunt
multe cri interesante. Aici sunt cri n limbile englez, francez, german, spaniol. Studenii
citesc cri de cei mai cunoscui (the most known) scriitori englezi i americani: Dickens, Wilde,
Twen, London. Studenii vor s cunoasc bine limbile strine, de aceea citesc mult. Ei nva
multe cuvinte noi. Pe poliile bibliotecii noastre sunt de asemeni diferite reviste i ziare. n ele
sunt foarte multe articole interesante.
17. Retell the text as if you were a) Jane; b) the librarian.
18. Ask 15 questions on the dialogue.
19. Make a short story entitled At the Library using the words given below.
literature, people, in my childhood, a book by, difficult, librarian, to show, on the shelves, to be
sorry, to advise, to bring, to leave.

62

LESSON NINE (THE NINTH LESSON)


A TELEPHONE TALK
Ann. Hallo, is that you, Mary? How are you? Why didnt you come to the lectures yesterday?
Mary. Hallo, Ann, Im all right today, but I felt very bad yesterday. I couldnt even get up.
Ann. What was the matter with you?
Mary. I dont know, but I had a very high temperature.
Ann. Can you go to the university today?
Mary. No, I cant. I feel that I must stay at home today. Im very sorry that I cannot go to the
university and attend the lecture on Economics.
Ann. Its all right! You may have my notes. If you are ill, you must certainly stay at home. May
I come to see you?
Mary. Certainly, you may. Can you come after the lectures?
Ann. I am sorry, I cannot, as after the lectures I must go to the library. I want to take some books
for my report.
Mary. Dont go to the library. Come to my place after the lectures. Ive got many interesting
books at home. You can take any of them.*
Ann. All right! Can I get to your place by trolley bus 22?
Mary. Dont go by trolley bus. There is a new bus station near my house now. You can come
here by bus 35. I always go to the university by bus now. It takes me twenty minutes to get
there.**
Ann. All right and now I must hurry to the university. So long.
Mary. So long. Dont forget to bring me your notes. Ring me up, if you cant come.
* You can take any of them. Poi s o iai pe oricare dintre ele (cri).
In an affirmative sentence any has the meaning of oricare.
** It takes me twenty minutes to get there. Drumul pn acolo mi ia douzeci de minute.
How long did it take you to translate this article? It took me two hours to do it.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a talk - o convorbire, o dicuie


hallo - alo, salut
why - de ce
because, as - deoarece, dup cum
a lecture - o lecie
to feel - a (se) simi
a to feel bad - a se simi ru
to feel well - a se simi bine
even - nici, chiar
high - nalt()
a high temperature - o febr
low - jos(oas)
tall - nalt() dimensiune
note - conspect, notie
to make notes - a face notie
that c
if dac
ill - bolnav()
sick - bolnav()

can - a putea
must - a trebui
may - a putea
certainly -(de) sigur
a place - un loc
to come to his place a-l vizita
at my place - la mine acas
to get to a place - a ajunge ntr-un loc
a trolley bus - un troleibus
to go by trolley bus - a merge cu troleibuzul
a trolley bus stop - o oprire de troleibuze
a bus - un autobuz
a station - o staie
to hurry - a (se) grbi
to forget - a uita
to remember - a(-i) aminti
to ring up - a telefona
good-bye - la revedere
so long - pe curnd
63

GRAMMAR
MODAL VERBS: CAN, MUST, MAY

infinitive without to. After them we do not use to either. Ex. I must go (I must to go).
can = to be able to (for Future Indefinite Tense) indicates the possibility of doing sth.
must = to have to (for Past and Future Indefinite Tense) - indicates the obligation of doing
sth.
may = to be allowed to (for Future Indefinite Tense) - indicates the probability of doing
sth.
Present Indefinite Tense
affirmative
Can

Must

May

I can
You can
He (she, it) can
We can
You can
They can
I must
You must
He (she, it) must
We must
You must
They must
I may
You may
He (she, it) may
We may
You may
They may

negative
I cannot (cant)
You cannot
He (she, it) cannot
We cannot
You cannot
They cannot
I must not (mustnt)
You must not
He (she, it) must not
We must not
You must not
They must not
I may not (maynt)
You may not
He (she, it) may not
We may not
You may not
They may not

interrogative
Can I?
Can you?
Can he (she, it)?
Can we?
Can you?
Can they?
Must I?
Must you?
Must he (she, it)?
Must we?
Must you?
Must they?
May I?
May you?
May he (she, it)?
May we?
May you?
May they?

Past Indefinite Tense


affirmative
Can

Must

May

I could
You could
He (she, it) could
We could
You could
They could
I had to
You had to
He (she, it) had to
We had to
You had to
They had to
I might
You might
He (she, it) might
We might
You might
They might

negative
I could not (couldnt)
You could not
He (she, it) could not
We could not
You could not
They could not
I had not (hadnt) to
You had not to
He (she, it) had not to
We had not to
You had not to
They had not to
I might not (mightnt)
You might not
He (she, it) might not
We might not
You might not
They might not

64

interrogative
Could I?
Could you?
Could he (she, it)?
Could we?
Could you?
Could they?
Had I to?
Had you to?
Had he (she, it) to?
Had we to?
Had you to?
Had they to?
Might I?
Might you?
Might he (she, it)?
Might we?
Might you?
Might they?

*
*
*
that c. Ex.: He writes that he will write soon.
if dac. Ex.: If the book is interesting, give it to me to read.
as dup cum. Ex.: I work hard at my English as I want to know it well.
because deoarece. Ex.: I could not go to the university yesterday because I was ill.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Make the following sentences negative and interrogative.
a) 1. I can show you an interesting picture of this city. 2. He can give you this report on the life
of Jack London. 3. His brother could play the piano very well. 4. She could translate these
English texts.
b) 1. We must attend a lecture on American History on Tuesday. 2. You must return my
magazines on Wednesday. 3. You must take your friend to the country for the weekend. 4. I
must go to see my grandmother on my day off.
c) 1. You may discuss these questions after work. 2. They may take four magazines from that
shelf. 3. She may sit on the sofa in my study. 4. He may leave London on Saturday.
2. Answer the following questions using modal verbs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Can you speak English?


Can you write English?
How can you speak and write English?
Can you read English well or badly?
Can your friend play the piano?
How can he play the piano?
Where can we get some English magazines?
What can you see on the walls of this room?

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Must your brother attend any lectures at the University?


What must you do to know English well?
When must you come to the office?
With whom must you work at this report?
When must children go to bed?

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

May I take your pen?


When may your father go to the country?
Till what time may we stay at our library?
May we sometimes finish our work at three oclock?
When may children go to the cinema?

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Can you speak English well or badly?


What foreign language can you speak well?
When must you come to your lessons?
May I ask you a question?
Can you go to the park now?
What time may you leave the office on Friday?
Who can speak French well at your office?
May you study at the library?
Where can you prepare your lessons?
65

10. What book must you read now?


11. When must you leave the office?
12. How long may you wait for the bus?
3. Insert must, can or may.
1. When ____ you come to your lessons? I ____ come to my lessons at eight oclock. 2. You
____ not go away now, you ____ stay here till six oclock. 3. ____ I take your pen? Yes, you
____. Here it is. 4. Gabriel knows English well. He ____ translate these texts. 5. I ____ not
translate this letter. It is too difficult. 6. ____ I come into the room? No, you ____ not. 7. You
____ come to your lessons in time. 8. ____ you read this text? Yes, I ____. It is easy. 9. Who
____ bring me The White Fang? I ____ prepare a report on this book. 10. I ____ not go to the
library today. I have no time. 11. You ____ read this book. It is very easy.
4. Translate paying attention to the use of modal verbs.
a) 1. Prietenul meu poate s vorbeasc bine n englez. El a absolvit universitatea trei ani n
urm. 2. Nu v pot da aceast carte. Trebuie s-mi pregtesc leciile. 3. Putei lua aceste flori de
pe mas? Da, desigur. 4. Eu cunosc limba german ru, dar pot s traduc texte uoare. 5. Nu
am putut citi aceast carte. Ea este prea dificil pentru mine. 6. Putei s cntai bine la pian? 7.
Cine trebuie s vin la lecia noastr? Domnul director. 8. Ce carte putei s-mi recomandai
pentru lectur (reading)? 9. M scuzai, dar nu pot s v dau acum revista. Am uitat-o ieri la
oficiu. 10. Putei traduce aceast propoziie? Ea este foarte uoar. 11. n copilrie fratele meu
putea s vorbeasc bine n englez. Acum nu poate vorbi nici ntr-o limb strin. El trebuie s
nceap din nou s studieze limba englez. 12. Cine poate s rspund la ntrebarea mea?
Mihai. El citete mult i cunoate multe lucruri.
b) 1. Pot s intru (mi permitei s intru)? 2. Putei s venii la noi seara? 3. Pot s fumez aici? 4.
Eu nu pot s patinez, dar pot s schiez bine. 5. Pot s deschid fereastra? 6. Eu nu pot s deschid
aceast fereastr. Ajutai-m, v rog. 7. Pot s vorbesc cu dumneavoastr acum? 8. Fratele meu
poate s vorbeasc n trei limbi strine.
5. Make up five sentences using the verb must and five sentences using can. Translate them.
6. Translate using if, that, as, because.
1. De ce nu tii aceste cuvinte? Eu nu tiu aceste cuvinte deoarece ieri nu am avut timp s le
nv. Eu le voi nva azi. 2. De ce nu ai fost la lecia de management? Eu nu am fost la lecie
deoarece am fost bolnav. 3. De ce fiica dumneavoastr nu cnt la pian? Ea nu cnt la pian
deoarece nu poate. 4. Dup cum vedei, am venit la lecii la timp. 5. Ieri l-am vizitat pe prietenul
dup cum am i vrut. 6. Dac nu tii aceste cuvinte, v pot ajuta s le traducei. 7. V pot da
notiele mele, dac putei s mi le ntoarcei degrab. 8. Eu voi lua de la bibliotec aceast carte
de Dickens, dac ea nu este prea grea. 9. Dac doreti s mergem la Nick, vino la mine smbt.
10. Nu luai aceast carte, dac este prea dificil pentru dumneavoastr. 11. Eu tiu c fratele
meu a primit ieri o not rea la istorie. 12. tii c John cunoate cteva limbi strine? 13. Vd c
n dictarea dumneavoastr nu sunt greeli. 14. Prietenii mei tiu c eu voi pleca degrab n Paris.
15. Ne pare ru c prinii notri nu sunt acum cu noi.

66

VOCABULARY EXERCISES
7. Read aloud and translate.
carry, flurry, merry, hurry, marry, berries, ferry, lorry, scurry, barrel, squirrel;
cigarette, afar, interval, mischief, tobacco, remark, remember, delicate, aside, arrive.
8. Answer the questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Do you attend lectures at the University?
2. What must you do if you have high temperature?
3. Is Mary ill today?
4. Do your friends often come to your place?
5. How often do you go to see your friends?
6. Can you get to the office by bus?
7. Is there a bus station near your house?
8. How long does it take you to get to the office?
9. Who reads many books by English writers in your group?
10. How are you?
11. How is your friend?
12. What is the matter with your friend?
13. Does your friend often feel bad?
14. Do you like to go to the station to meet your friends?
15. What do you do if you have little time to get to the office in time?
16. Why do we usually stay in bed if we have a high temperature?
17. Why does Pete often attend lectures on History?
18. Why don't you like to go to the office by trolley bus?
19. Why can he often walk to the office?
9. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. I cannot go to the lecture today because I feel bad (2). 2. It takes me one hour to get to the
University (1). 3. My friend made a very interesting report yesterday (3). 4. My friend will
come to see me on Sunday (2). 5. I usually get to the library by trolley bus (3). 6. My
sister's house is high (1). 7. I always forget these words. (2).
10. Use the appropriate word from those given below.
(to forget, a lecture, to feel, a place, to ring up, a note, to remember, high, to make notes, a
talk, ill, to stay)
1. Do you attend ________ at the University every day? 2. As I ________ bad, I must ________
at home. 3. Why is Gabriel not at the lecture? Is he ________ ? Go to his ________ after
the ________, please. 4. Tell me Ann's telephone number, please. I always ________ it. She
is ill and I want to ________ her ________ . 5. Why can't you ________ this grammar rule?
It is not difficult! 6. I know that Peter always ___ ______ of the lectures which he attends. So
you may ask him for his ________ if you didn't attend the last lecture. 7. Please, help me to
get that thick book from the shelf. It's too ________ for me. 8. Yesterday Peter and Mary
came to my ________ and we had an interesting ________ about our studies.

67

11. Use the following words in sentences of your own.


to have a talk, to ring up, to remember, to be ill, to go to see, a lecture on, even, to make
notes, high, to stay, temperature, to feel well, to get to, to hurry, by bus, by tram, because
(as).
12. Arrange the following words in order to make sentences.
1. usually, it, me, to get, takes, my, one hour, to, office.
2. it, him, this, took, days, book, to read, ten.
3. her, takes, it, breakfast, 20 minutes, to have, always.
4. take, did, how long, it, to prepare, you, your, home task?
5. to translate, how long, it, take, will, them, letters, these ?
13. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. It usually takes me thirty minutes to get up, wash and dress (2). 2. It will take them two
hours to get to Nicks house (2). 3. It took us fifteen minutes to discuss this question
yesterday (2). 4. It will take you two days to read these notes (2). 5. It took them an hour to
get to the library (2).
14. Translate using it takes.
1. Pete locuiete la ar. El are nevoie de dou ore ca s ajung la oficiu. 2. De ct timp avei
nevoie ca s pregtii raportul dumneavoastr? Eu voi avea nevoie de dou sptmni. 3. Ct
timp i-a trebuit lui pentru a rspunde la aceste scrisori? 4. De ct timp ai avut nevoie ieri pentru
a nva cuvintele noi? Eu am avut nevoie de dou ore. 5. De ct timp ei au nevoie pentru a
termina lucrul lor? Ei au nevoie de zece zile.
15. Make up sentences using the given models.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)

It takes me five minutes to get there.


It took him half an hour to do that work.
It will take them an hour and a half to get to the University.
Does it take you much time to get there?
How long did it take him to read this story?
Will it take them an hour to do this exercise?
It doesnt take me long to get to my office.
It didnt take her long to rpare her report.
It won't take you long to copy this text.

16. Translate paying attention to the meaning of the following words.


) good, well, bad, badly.
1. Cunoatei bine cuvintele noi din ultima lecie? 2. Prietenul meu tie bine dou limbi strine. 3.
Avei copii buni. Ei ntotdeauna rspund bine la ntrebrile profesorului, deoarece ntotdeauna i
pregtesc bine leciile. 4. Nu pot s traduc bine acest text deoarece nu cunosc aceste cuvinte. 5. Tatl
lui se simte astzi ru. 6. Ieri ai citi ru aceast lecie. 7. Ieri timpul a fost foarte ru. 8. Ieri prietena
mea se simea bine, dar astzi iar se simte ru. 9. Eu nu voi putea s vin la voi deoarece tatl meu se
simte ru.

68

b) very, very much.


1. Cntai foarte bine la pian. 2. Acest film este foarte bun. El mi-a plcut foarte mult. 3. Eu vreau
foarte mult s-l vd pe prietenul nostru. 4. Astzi este o zi foarte bun. 5. Pete se simte foarte ru. El
nu poate s vorbeasc cu dumneavoastr.
c) can, may.
1. Pot s iau notiele dumneavoastr la istorie? 2. Dumneavoastr putei s traducei aceste
scrisori din romn n englez. Ele nu sunt tare dificile. 3. El poate s frecventeze leciile de
literatur englez luna viitoare? Nu, el va avea mult de lucru seara. 4. Poate fiul
dumneavoastr s mearg la ar cu noi? 5. De ce nu putei s venii la noi azi seara? Eu nu
pot s vin la dumneavoastr deoarece m simt ru. 6. Se poate de ajuns la dumneavoastr cu
autobuzul? 7. Pot s deschid fereastra? 8. Nu pot s uit despre aceasta. 9. Pot s ies? M simt
ru. 10. El nu poate vorbi n francez, dar poate s citeasc n aceast limb.
17. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Bun ziua! Ce mai facei? Bun ziua. Mulumesc, bine. Ai fost ieri la ora de literatur? Din
pcate, nu am fost. M simeam ru i am rmas acas. 2. Ce este cu dumneavoastr? V simii ru?
Mergei la medic. La noi la universitate este un medic foarte bun. 3. Cum ajungei de obicei la
universitate? Cteodat merg cu troleibuzul, dar de obicei cu autobuzul. Ct timp v ia drumul
pn la universitate? Cu autobuzul 20 de minute. 4. Putei s-mi dai notiele dumneavoastr la
literatur? Desigur. Venii la mine mine. Bine, mulumesc. 5. S nu uii s m telefonezi seara. 6.
Nu pot s-mi amintesc aceast regul gramatical. 7. Lecia se ncepe la ora opt. Trebuie s ne grbim
la universitate. 8. Avei febr. Trebuie s rmnei acas. 9. Ai fcut ieri raportul? Nu. Eu nu am fost
ieri la universitate. Am fost bolnav. 10. Astzi nu pot s vin la dumneavoastr. Trebuie s merg la
bibliotec s m pregtesc de raport. 11. De ct timp avei nevoie pentru a v pregti bine tema de
acas? De obicei am nevoie de o or sau dou, dac tema nu este foarte grea. 12. Uitai-v la acest
om nalt. l inei minte? Am nvat mpreun cu el la universitate.
18. Make a short story on one of the given topics:
1. A Visit to a Sick Friend.
to ring up, to go to see, how are you, what is the matter, temperature, to feel bad, to be very ill, to
be sorry, to attend.
2. How I Get to the Office.
near (far), to get to, an Underground station, by the Underground, to hurry, to forget, it takes me.

69

LESSON TEN (THE TENTH LESSON)


A LETTER TO A FRIEND
Dear Paul,
At last I can write you a letter. I could not answer your letter last week because I was very busy.
Yesterday I passed my examination in Mathematics and in two days I will be quite free. In
three days my sister will take her last examination and in a week we will leave Chiinu for
Constana. We will go to a rest-home for our holiday.
When we were in Constana last year, we had a very good time there.
You know that I like the sea. I will swim and lie in the sun two or three hours a day. I am sorry
you won't be with us. You write that you cannot forget the holiday which we spent in Mangalia
two years ago. I can't forget it either. I am sorry you will not go to any resort this year. When
will you have your holiday? Is your wife's health still poor? I hope that soon she will be all
right. How long do you intend to live in the country? Is there a river and a forest there? I will
return to Chiinu at the beginning of August as I must prepare for the new university-year. I
think I will visit you then. May I come to your place on the tenth or eleventh of August?
We will be very glad to hear from you before our departure.
My best regards to your family.
Yours, Nick.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

dear drag
at last n sfrit
to be busy a fi ocupat
to be free a fi liber
an examination examen
to take an examination a avea un examen
to pass an examination a susine examenul
to examine a examina
quite destul de
at all deloc
a rest-home o staiune de odihn
a holiday o vacan
to have a good time a petrece timpul bine
a sea o mare
to swim a nota
(the) sun soare(le)
to lie a sta ntins
to lie in the sun a se bronza
either tot (n prop. negative)

health sntate
still nc
poor srac, srman
rich bogat
to hope a spera
to intend a avea intenia
a river un ru
a forest o pdure
(the) beginning ncepu(ul)
(the) end sfrit(ul)
at the beginning la nceputul
at the end la sfritul
a university-year un an universitar
to think a se gndi, a crede
a visit o vizit
to visit a vizita
to hear a auzi
to hear from a auzi despre
a departure o plecare

70

VOCABULARY EXERCISES
1. Read aloud.
In three days
In that place
In the sun

not go
intend to live
glad to hear

at the beginning
forget the holiday
forest there

culture, rapture, lecture, nature, feature, furniture; can, letter, day, wife, will, three, week, resthome, spent, that, place, too, good, time, like, swim, lie, sun, vacation, beginning, departure.
2. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. When do you usually have your examinations?
2. When will you take your examination in English?
3. How did you pass your last examination in English?
4. Will you be free tomorrow afternoon?
5. Why will you be busy?
6. Were you at the theatre last Sunday? Did you have a good time there?
7. Where did you have a good time last Sunday?
8. Did you go to a rest-home for your holiday last year?
9. Do you like the sea? Why do you like the sea?
10. How much time a day can you lie in the sun?
11. Can your friends swim?
12. Do they swim well or badly?
13. Do your friends like to swim in the river?
14. How many hours a day do you rest?
15. Will you go to the country or stay in the town next Sunday?
16. Why will you stay in the town? (What will you do in the country?)
11. Will you have your holiday at the beginning of July or at the end of it?
17. What places will you visit in the summer?
18. Why do people like Constana?
12. Are you glad to hear from your friends, when you are away from your town?
13. Do you visit your friends before departure or do your friends come to your place?
3. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. It will take you two hours to get there (2). 2. I won't go to the cinema either because I am
busy to-night (1). 3. At the end of the school-year we usually have five English lessons a week
(1). 4. We will have our examination at the end of June (2). 5. His wife's health is still poor
(1). 6. He can't write you a letter as he has no time (1). 7. Our students passed their examination
in English very well last year (3). 8. I intend to spend three hours a day on my English before
the examination (4).
4. Insert the definite or the indefinite article if necessary.
Yesterday I received ______ letter from my friend. He is ______ student. He lives in ______
Chiinu and studies at ______ Chiinu State University. He studies English Literature. Last
year we spent our holiday together. We were in ______ Mangalia and had ______ very good
time there. We swam in ______ sea and lay in ______ sun two hours ______ day. This summer
my friend lives in ______ country. "There is ______ river and ______ forest here", he writes. "I
often go there. I will stay in this place till _____ September. I will return to Chiinu at _____
71

end of August. I will be very glad to hear from you soon". Today I will write ______ letter to
him. I will write about ______ work of our office and about my life.
5. Insert the prepositions where necessary.
______ next week I will take my examination ______ English. I will begin to repeat the texts
______ two days. I will work ______ my English two or three hours a day. ______ the
examination we can usually attend lessons five times ______ a week. ______ examination I will
leave ______ Bli ______ Constana. I usually live near ______ the sea there. I will swim
______ the sea and lie ______ the sun. I will return ______ Bli ______ the end ______
August. I hope I will have a good holiday ______ this year.
6. Translate into English paying attention to the following word combinations:
) take an examination, to pass an examination.
1. Cnd ai susinut ultimul examen? Eu am susinut ultimul examen trei zile n urm. Cum
l-ai susinut? Bine. Am luat o not bun. 2. De ce nu ai susinut ieri examenul la literatur?
Eu nu am susinut examenul deoarece m-am simit ru. Am avut febr. 3. Cine trebuie s susin
examenul de istorie la ora trei? Eu. Putei s susinei examenul acum. John a luat
examenul la ora dou. Profesorul este acum liber. 4. Cum au susinut studenii notri examenul
de englez ieri? Bine. Doar unul dintre ei nu a luat examenul. El a primit o not rea. El
lucreaz puin asupra limbii engleze. 5. Unde de obicei ei susin examenul la istorie? n sala
40. 6. Trebuie s lucrai mult dac dorii s susinei bine examenul la german.
b) Else, still
1. Ce mai dorii s scriei n scrisoarea dumneavoastr? 2. Cine mai trebuie s vin aici? 3. Mai
suntei nc acas? 4. Prietenul dumneavoastr nc este n oraul nostru? Rugai-l s vin la noi.
5. Ce ai mai vzut ieri la teatru? 6. Mai studiai la universitate? 7. Unde l-ai mai vzut pe Tom
ieri? 8. De ce suntei nc aici? Trebuie s mergei la ore. 9. Ce ai mai pregtit asear? 10. Pete
nc este bolnav. 11. V mai simii ru? 12. Unde mai avei de gnd s v ducei astzi? 13. Cui
s-i mai dau aceast carte? 14. Michael nc este n ora? Nu, el a plecat la ar ieri. 15. Cine
mai poate face acest lucru? Noi.
c) visit, to attend.
1. Cnd frecventai de obicei leciile de istorie? Miercurea i vinerea. 2. Cnd am fost n
Londra am vizitat multe teatre i muzee. 3. Soia mea nu frecventeaz leciile de literatur. Ea a
susinut examenul la acest obiect anul trecut. 4. Dac dorii s cunoatei mult despre ara voastr
trebuie s cltorii mult, s vizitai muzeele, s citii mult. 5. Ieri civa ingineri strini au vizitat
uzina noastr. 6. Nick nva bine. El ntotdeauna face temele de acas i frecventeaz leciile.
d) Quite, at all.
1. Deloc nu vreau s merg la ar. 2. Sunt deja destul de liber i pot s merg cu voi la cinema. 3.
Nu pot s not deloc. 4. Tatl meu este deja destul de btrn, el are aptezeci i cinci de ani. 5.
Fiica mea nu poate deloc s se bronzeze. 6. Prietenul meu triete destul de aproape de mine. 7.
Aceast traducere nu este deloc dificil. 8. Eu sunt destul de sntos. De ce credei c sunt
bolnav? 9. Nu tii deloc aceste reguli. nvai-le. 10. Cer scuze, dar nu v cunosc deloc.
e)
Too, also, either.
1. Fiul meu tot nu poate s cnte la pian. 2. Fiul dumneavoastr tot a susinut toate examenele
sptmna trecut? 3. Tot nu primii de la el scrisori? 4. Dumneavoastr toi v vei ntoarce la
sfritul lui octombrie? 5. Ei tot sunt nc aici? 6. Ei tot nu iubesc s se bronzeze. 7. Noi tot nu
avem de gnd s mergem la o cas de odihn anul acesta. 8. Prietenii mei tot nu pleac azi la
72

ar, deoarece fiica lor este bolnav. 9. Eu tot nu v sftui s mergei la aceast lecie. 10. Acest
text tot nu este greu.
f)
In, for, on, at, to.
1. Ieri dimineaa eu am susinut examenul la limba romn i am luat o not bun. 2. Vara noi
mergem de obicei la ar n vacan. 3. Mine eu voi pleca la Chiinu. Cred c m voi ntoarce
peste trei zile. 4. Duminica trecut noi am fost la ar. Am stat acolo trei ore. Am mers la ru, am
notat acolo i ne-am bronzat. 5. Aceast carte este prea dificil pentru mine. 6. Ce fel de exerciii
ne-a dat profesorul pentru acas? 7. Lecia noastr se ncepe de obicei la ora nou. 8. Aceast
femeie lucreaz la universitate, iar soul ei lucreaz la uzin. 9. Noi am terminat lucrul nostru la
nceputul anului 2000. 10. Cte ore pe zi lucrai asupra limbii engleze? Eu lucrez de obicei
asupra limbii engleze dou ore pe zi. 11. Privii acest tablou! Ce vedei pe el? 12. Unul dintre
studenii notri nu lucreaz deloc asupra limbii engleze. Noi tot avem un student care nu
lucreaz asupra limbii engleze. 13. Sunt ceva tablouri pe pereii acestei camere? 14. Noi vom
avea o dictare joi. 15. Unde vei merge n week-end? 16. Intenionez s-mi vizitez prietenii pe 10
noiembrie. 17. Ct timp ai cheltuit pe raportul dumneavoastr? 18. Cte ore de istorie au
frecventat aceti studeni luna trecut?
7. Make sentences using the given words.
else, still; at last; to be busy, to be free; quite, at all; to have a good time; to lie in the sun; two or
three times a day (a week, a month); too, also, either; at the beginning, at the end; to hear from;
before his (her, our...) departure; to have a good holiday.
8. Translate into English the following verbs and give their three forms.
a studia, a se grbi, a juca, a ncepe, a telefona, a nota, a sta culcat, a se gndi, a aduce, a asculta,
a nva, a uita, a simi, a ajunge, a prsi, a vedea, a schia, a ti, a vorbi.
9. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
) 1. Cnd vei susine examenul la limba englez? Cred c-l voi susine la sfritul lui iunie.
2. Noi vom pleca n zilele de odihn la ar. Sper s petrecem acolo bine timpul. Putem s
mergem n pdure sau la ru. 3. Cnd sora dumneavoastr intenioneaz s mearg la ar? Eu
cred c ea nc (yet) nu va pleca sptmna aceasta (this week). 4. Cnd vei discuta ultima
ntrebare? Noi o vom discuta peste o or. 5. Ce medic va examina sora dumneavoastr
bolnav? Medicul Smith. 6. Venii la noi desear. Noi vom fi liberi i vom petrece timpul
bine. 7. Vei fi foarte ocupat luni? Vreau s v art noua noastr lucrare la istorie. Poftim,
venii. Eu nu voi fi deloc ocupat. 8. Fratele meu i petrece de obicei vacana n staiune. 9.
Prietenul dumneavoastr mai nva? Nu. El a terminat universitatea anul trecut. Eu tot nu
nv acum. Eu lucrez. 10. Ce trebuie s mai pregtim? 11. Cnd intenionai s plecai la
staiune? Sper c voi pleca la staiune peste o sptmn. Acum nu pot pleca acolo deoarece
sunt foarte ocupat. Soia mea tot nu poate pleca acum. 12. Eu voi pleca n Marea Britanie la
nceputul lui aprilie. Pn la plecarea mea eu trebuie s termin lucrarea mea i s i-o dau lui
Gabriel. 13. De cte ori pe sptmn v ocupai de englez? Noi ne ocupm de englez de
patru ori pe sptmn. 14. Cte ore pe zi v ia pregtirea ctre examenul de literatur englez?
b) Studenii notri pot s nvee i s lucreze bine. Ei de asemeni tiu cum s se odihneasc bine.
Cnd au timp liber, ei merg la cinema, la teatru, frecventeaz ore interesante sau se odihnesc
acas mpreun cu prietenii lor. Muli (studeni) i petrec vacana la mare, unde vara pot s
petreac bine timpul: s se plimbe, s noate, s se bronzeze.

73

c) Drag Ana,
tii c eu tot nu am putut s-i scriu imediat scrisoare, deoarece luna trecut am fost foarte
ocupat. Trei zile n urm eu, n sfrit, am terminat lucrul. Acum sunt destul de liber i pot
scrie scrisori prietenilor mei. Copiii mei degrab vor susine examenele, i vom pleca n vacan
la ar.
Vom tri la vil (country house), unde am trit anul trecut. Nu iubesc s triesc n locuri pe care
nu le cunosc deloc. Dar acest loc este foarte bun. El ne-a plcut foarte mult. Acolo este o pdure
i un ru. Ne vom sclda (vom nota) i ne vom bronza cte dou sau trei ore pe zi. Sora mea i-a
petrecut vara trecut n acest loc mpreun cu fiul. tii c sntatea lui este foarte rea. Acum el se
simte destul de bine. Tu nu ai de gnd s vii la noi? Vino la nceputul lui iulie mpreun cu
familia, vom petrece bine timpul mpreun.
Vreau s am veti de la tine pn la plecare.
Salutri soului i copiilor, Maria.
10. Make a short story about your last summer vacation using the given words.
at last, to be on holiday, in the summer, to take (pass) an examination in..., free, a rest-home, a
departure, to have a good time, the sea, to swim, to lie in the sun, a poor health, to intend, a river,
a forest, at the beginning (end) of..., to visit, to be glad, to hear from..., to have a good holiday.

74

LESSON ELEVEN (THE ELEVENTH LESSON)


MY FRIEND IN LONDON
My friend is a very clever fellow, but he does not like to show this. His name is John. His
parents are very kind people. His father retired on a pension not long ago. My friend likes very
much reading and in general studying. We are members of a non-governmental organization.
He likes to help people, thats why he has got a very good reputation among us. My friend
studies very much. Last month our non-governmental organization sent him as our delegate to
an exhibition in London. Two days ago he returned home. In the evening many friends came to
his house. They wanted to listen to his story about the capital of the Great Britain.
"Tell us about London", they asked him, "What kind of city is London? Did you like it? What
did you see there?"
"Well, well, I will try to answer all your questions", my friend said.
"It was my first visit to London", he began. "I visited many interesting places, where we
could see a lot of amazing things. There are very many tourists in London, especially during
the summer.
And what about the weather? Did it rain?, asked one of our friends.
The weather was nearly all the time beautiful except some rainy days at the beginning of
my journey there. I easily recognized the places I had seen in the books. I could see straight
and wide streets, beautiful squares, green parks and gardens. I saw very many monuments,
universities, hospitals and hotels. I saw the famous London underground and many new
buildings. There are many fine buildings in the suburbs of the city, too. I did not see dirty or
narrow streets there. London is an important financial and industrial centre. There are many
big banks in it. I visited some of them and met many interesting people there.
"Thank you for your story", one of us said. "I think, that next year some of us will also
have the possibility to visit London.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

clever detept
fellow tip
to show a arta
kind (adj.) bun la inim
to retire on a pension a se retrage la pensie
a non-governmental organization un ONG
to help a ajuta
thats why iat de ce
a reputation o reputaie
as (prep.) ca, drept
a delegate un delegat
an exhibition o expoziie
to listen to a asculta
a story o istorie
a capital o capital
to try a ncerca
a place un loc
a lot of o mulime de
important
amazing uimitor
a tourist un turist

a weather un timp
to rain a ploua
nearly aproape
beautiful frumos
a journey o cltorie
to recognize a recunoate
straight drept
wide larg
a square un scuar
a garden o grdin
a hospital un spital
a hotel un hotel
an underground un metro
a suburb o suburbie
in the suburbs n suburbii
dirty murdar
narrow ngust, strmt
important

financial financiar
industrial industrial
75

Word Formation
-ive [iv] this suffix forms adjectives from verbs:
to collect collective
-ful [ful] this suffix forms adjectives from nouns and sometimes from verbs:
beauty beautiful
to forget forgetful
-age [id] this is a noun suffix (especially in words coming from French):
village
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
1. Read aloud.
fate, fact, 'comrade, 'cabbage, a'like, a'gain, farm, 'grammar, fare, pet, Pete, pert, 'reader, release,
re'main, 'ticket, 'cricket, here, pin, pine, first, fire, mis'took, 'valid, bun, fume, burn, cure,
'difficult, 'multitude, box, pro'cure, 'phone, po'tato, born, more.
2. Translate the following words. How are they formed?
a) building
exhibition
beginning
farmer
meeting
industrial
dirty

sunny
cultural
collective
villager
delegation
capitalist

builder
recognition
listener
agricultural
departure
healthy
certainly

b) beautiful
hopeful
thankful
forgetful
helpful

3. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. What is the capital of the Great Britain?
2. Are there many or few high buildings in London?
3. Is there an underground in London?
4. Where does our non-governmental organization send their best members as delegates
every year?
5. What did your friend see there?
6. Are there many beautiful houses in the suburbs of London?
7. Are the streets of London wide or narrow?
8. When did you visit Chiinu for the first time?
9. Are the streets of Chiinu narrow?
10. Do you live in the suburbs or in the centre of Bli?
11. When did you see the new building of Bli University?
12. Are there many important industrial centres in our country?
13. What industrial centres of our country do you know?
14. Where did you live when you studied at school?
15. What books did you read when you were a child?
16. With whom did you prepare your home-work when you studied English?
17. Do you remember well the time when you studied at school?
18. What is the name of the town (village) where you were born?
76

19. Where did your family live at the time when you were born?
20. Does your best friend know the town (village) where you were born?
21. Where were you (on) the day when your friend came to see you?
4. Fill in the gaps with the verbs to say, to speak, or to tell in the right tense form.
1. Yesterday I came to see my friend. He _______ , "Peter and I will go to the country on our day
off together with our friends. Do you want to go with us?" 2. What did your teacher _______
you? 3. Our teacher always _______, "Jane _______English well". 4. What did you _______ to
about after classes yesterday? 5. Whom did you _______ to about our plan to go to Chiinu ?
I saw Pete yesterday and _______ to him about it. He _______ to me, "I like your plan very
much." 6. Did I _______ that? 7. "We got up early on Sunday", my sister _______
8.
He
______ very well. (He is a good speaker). 9. "We will _______ English after our lesson too",
Nick _______. 10. My grandfather likes to _______ us about his life. 11. Ann knows three
foreign languages. She often _______ French at the office and at home. 12. Don't _______ him
about it. 13. My friend _______ to me, "They want to _______ about this matter at the meeting
tomorrow." 14. Our father always _______ that we must work hard to study well. 15. I shall
_______ them about this matter today.
5. Translate paying attention to the use of the verbs to go and to come.
1. Nu vreau s intru n camer. Dai-mi, v rog, geanta. Eu am lsat-o ieri n fotoliul de lng
fereastr. 2. Cnd am ieit din camer, l-am vzut pe Nick n coridor (corridor). El vroia s
vorbeasc cu mine, dar nu vroia s intre n camer. 3. Mergei n clas i aducei-v caietele i
crile. 4. Venii ncoace. Stiloul dumneavoastr este la mine pe mas. L-ai lsat aici smbta
trecut. 5. Intrai. Vom vorbi cu dumneavoastr acum. 6. Intrai n camer. Nu pot s vorbesc cu
dumneavoastr cnd suntei n coridor. 7. Mergei la Tom acas. El este foarte bolnav i nu poate
s vin astzi. 8. Venii la mine desear. Prietenul meu va fi la mine. El ne va povesti multe
lucruri interesante. 9. Mergei n camera 49 i aducei un scaun. 10. Nu mergei la el mine. El
nu va fi acas.
6. Make 10 sentences using the words either, also, at all, quite.
7. Give antonyms to the following words.
narrow
clean
large

old
tall
after

rich
short
wrong

low
to remember
busy

8. Give synonyms to the following words.


to go away, to come to see, high, fine, much.
9. Give the three basic forms of the following verbs.
to say, to build, to send, to spend, to listen, to hear, to tell, to see, to try, to hurry, to meet, to
think, to bring, to lie, to show, to know, to speak, to forget, to leave.
10. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Ieri ai lucrat n cldirea nou sau veche a bibliotecii oreneti? 2. Sora mea lucreaz la
expoziia central. Ea lucreaz acolo ca (n calitate de economist) economist. 3. Unde ei vor
77

construi o coal nou? Ei vor construi o coal nou pe aceast strad. 4. Anul trecut eu miam petrecut vacana la ar cu prinii. Cteodat eu lucram mpreun cu ei. Mie mi plcea
aceasta foarte mult. Acum m simt foarte bine. Astzi vreau s trimit o scrisoare de la ar
prietenilor mei. 5. Noi am ascultat povestirea ei cu atenie. 6. Delegaii la expoziia din Londra
au ascultat ieri raportul domnului Smith despre lucrul firmei. 7. Bunica mea cunoate multe
povestiri interesante. Ea ne povestete des aceste povestiri. Nou ne place foarte mult s-o
ascultm. 8. Mie mi-au plcut toate aceste cri. ncercai s le citii. 9. ncercai s facei acest
lucru astzi. 10. Pete a ncercat s deschid ua, dar nu a putut. Eu tot nu am putut s-o deschid.
11. Ai ncercat s traducei acest articol? El nu este deloc dificil. 12. Am ncercat s vorbesc cu
el de cteva ori, dar el nu a vrut s m asculte. Voi ncerca iari s vorbesc cu el mine. 13. Pe
ce strad locuii? Locuiesc pe strada Libertii. 14. Pe piaa Alecsandri este un teatru. 15. n
republica noastr sunt puine centre industriale importante. 16. Aceast ntrebare este foarte
important. Mine noi o vom discuta iari. 17. Copilria lui Dickens a fost foarte grea. 18.
Acest scriitor tnr lucreaz mult (din greu) asupra crilor sale. 19. Oare nu-l cunoatei pe
acest om? Am lucrat mpreun cinci ani n urm. 20. Ieri nu am putut s v recunosc.
Dumneavoastr tot nu ai putut s m recunoatei. 21. Londra este capitala Angliei (England).
11. Translate the following text and retell it.
Unul dintre prietenii mei buni locuiete la Bucureti. El are un apartament ntr-o cldire nou de
pe strada principal. El nu are familie. El locuiete cu fratele, care studiaz la universitate.
Fratele are 20 de ani. Prietenul meu i eu am nvat mpreun la coal n Bli n 1998. n 2004,
cnd am terminat coala, eu am nceput s studiez la universitate, iar el a plecat la Bucureti. El
acolo tot studiaz n una dintre marele universiti. Cnd avem vacan, ne ntlnim deseori. Anul
acesta intenionm s petrecem iari vacana mpreun. El va veni la Bli, va petrece aici
cteva zile cu noi, iar mai apoi noi vom pleca la Soroca. n Soroca sunt multe locuri frumoase.
Am fost acolo anul trecut i ne-a plcut foarte mult acest ora.
12. Retell the text as if you were ) a member of another non-governmental organization,
b) John.
13. Make a dialogue between John and another participant to the exhibition in London.
14. Make a short essay choosing one of the topics below using the given words.
a) We Study Foreign Languages.
to attend, a lesson, a lecture, to come in time, to say, to speak, a grammar rule, to write, to make
notes, to make mistakes, to prepare, to work hard at..., to repeat, together, to translate, to read, a
library, from the library, it takes me..., to take an examination in..., to pass an examination, well,
badly, to get a good (bad) mark, to know.
b) My Working Day.
to wake up, early, to get up, to wash, to dress, to go by bus (by trolley bus), a building, high, it
takes me..., to hurry, to work hard, to be busy, to translate, to receive, to discuss, important, to
last, to return.
c) My Day Off.
to be free, to go to the country (a park), to have a good time, to have a rest, to walk, the sun, a
river, a forest, to go to the cinema (to the theatre), a new play (film), with interest, to play the
piano, to listen to, to see a television show, music, to play chess (volley-ball, football etc.), to be
glad.

78

d) My Family (My Friend's Family).


to be born, at my (my friend's) place, to live near (far from), to have a large family, parents,
grandfather (grandmother), children, a woman (man) of..., a girl (boy) of..., to go to school, to
take to the kindergarten, to spend much time on..., a university, an engineer, an economist, a
student, a teacher, a doctor, a worker, a farmer, to come (go) to see..., to graduate from...
e) Our Holiday.
to leave my town for..., to go for a holiday, poor health, to intend, to have a good time, the
weather, fine, a river, a sea, to go to the sea, to swim, to lie in the sun, to play chess (volley-ball,
tennis etc.), a forest, a library, to go to the cinema, with interest, at the beginning of..., at the end
of..., to have a good holiday.
f) The Capital of England.
a street, a square, a club, a museum, the centre, the City, Whitehall, an office, the Houses of
Parliament, the Westminster Abbey, the suburbs, crooked, narrow, dirty.
g) My Flat.
on the... floor, a dining-room, a bedroom, a bath-room, a kitchen, a study, in the middle of..., to
the right, to the left, in the corner, a piano, an armchair, a book-case, a television set, a sofa, a
cupboard, a vase, a flower, comfortable.

79

LESSON TWELVE (THE TWELFTH LESSON)


AT DINNER-TIME (Meals)
I usually have dinner at half past one, but yesterday I went to the office
without breakfast (I had only a cup of tea) and at twelve o'clock I was already hungry. I don't
like to have dinner alone. So I said to Nick: Let us have dinner together. All right, he
answered. I shall join you as soon as I translate this letter.
When we came into the restaurant there were few people there. We sat down at a table near
the window. Soon the waitress came up to our table. She brought spoons, forks, knives and
plates.
Will you have soup today? I asked Nick.
No, I won't. I am not very hungry, he said. But I shall have some salad, meat and
potatoes, and ice-cream. Why, do you like ice-cream so much? I never take ice-cream in
winter. I like tea with lemon or, coffee for sweet.
Oh! Here is the waitress! (The waitress brings some salad). The salad is very good, but there
is not enough salt in it. Pass me the salt, please.
Here is the salt!
Thank you.
Shall I pass you some brown bread?
No, thank you. I usually take it with the soup, and with the meat course I like white bread.
Are there any sweets at the buffet? I want to buy some for my tea. Ill be back soon. Shall I
get some sweets or a cake for you too?
Don't go there now, we shall go to the buffet together when dinner is over."
So, when dinner was over, we went to the buffet, bought some sweets, talked a little and at
five minutes to two we left the restaurant.
As it took us only 25 minutes to have our dinner, we had some time before work to read a
newspaper and have a smoke*.
Half an hour later we began to work again.
*

to have a smoke a fuma ()


to have a talk a discuta ()
to have a swim a nota ()
to have a rest a se odihni ()
to have a look a se uita ()
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

meal bucate
past dup, trecut de
without fr
tea ceai
a cup of tea o ceac de ceai
hungry flmnd
to be hungry a fi flmnd
to be thirsty a fi nsetat
alone singur
to join a se altura
a restaurant un restaurant
a waitress o chelnri
a waiter un chelner
to come up a se apropia

ice-cream ngheat
never niciodat
coffee cafea
sweet dulce
enough destul
salt sare
sugar zahr
to pass a da
bread pine
brown bread pine neagr
white bread pine alb
course fel de mncare
sweets dulciuri
to buy a cumpra
80

a fork o furculi
a knife un cuit
a plate o farfurie, un fel de mncare
soup sup
salad salat
meat carne
potato(es) cartof(i)

to sell a vinde
to be back a se ntoarce
a cake o prjitur
to talk a discuta, a vorbi
a little puin
to smoke a fuma

when cnd
as soon as ndat ce
till, until (conj.) pn cnd
before (conj.) nainte de
after (conj.) dup
while n timp ce
later mai trziu
GRAMMAR
EXPRESSING A DESIRE OR AN ORDER
Let + noun or pronoun (object case) + short infinitive
Ex: Let us go there.
Let my son do it.
Let them answer this letter.
PRESENT SIMPLE IN CLAUSES TIME OF AND CONDITION
In clauses of time and condition introduced by when, as soon as, till, until, after, before and if
we never use Future Indefinite Tense. Instead of it we use Present Simple Tense.
Ex.: When I come to see you, I will bring you this book.
I will do it tomorrow, if I have time.
As soon as you finish your work, we will go to the cinema.

EXPRESSING THE TIME IN ENGLISH


a second [ 'seknd] o secund ()
a minute [ 'minit] un minut ()
an hour [ '] o or ()
half an hour ['ha:f n '] jumtate de or ()
quarter of an hour [ 'kwo:tr v n 'u] un sfert de or ( )
an hour and a half [n ' nd h:f] o or i jumtate ( )

81

a.m. ante meridiem from 12 oclock in the midnight till 12 oclock in the afternoon.
p.m. post meridiem - from 12 oclock in the afternoon till 12 oclock in the midnight.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Use the pronouns from brackets in object case and translate.
1. Let (we) discuss these questions. 2. Let (he) translate these letters from English into
Romanian. 3. Let (I) go to see him. He is ill. 4. Let (they) return those books to the library today.
5. Let (she) learn the new words from Lesson two. 6. Let (we) read that book about our city.
2. Translate in English.
1. S deschidem fereastra n camer. 2. Lsai-l pe Tom s povesteasc despre capitala Angliei.
3. Dai eu o s traduc acest articol. 4. Lsai-i s citeasc i s discute aceast carte. 5. Las
copiii s mearg la ar duminic. 6. S mergem la universitate cu autobusul. 7. Jane cunoate
limba francez. Lsai-o s ntlneasc aceast delegaie. Eu nu pot vorbi franuzete. 8. S
mergem la lecia de literatur englez. Cred c va fi interesant. 9. Permitei-mi s pun cartea
aici. 10. M scuzai, permitei-mi s iau revistele mele.
3. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses in time and condition clauses.
1. If I am not busy on Sunday, I will go to see my friend. 2. My friend will go to the country on
holiday if he passes his examinations well. 3. The children will swim in the river and lie in the
sun when they come here to stay over the weekend. 4. As soon as my brother returns to our
village, he will begin to work on our farm. 5. I will come in after the lesson is over. 6. We shall
work with this delegation till they leave for their home country. 7. Don't go to the cinema before
you finish this work. 8. You may stay here until I return from the country.

82

4. Finish the following sentences.


1. I will go to the country when

I
my friend ...
m father ...

2. We will visit Nick if

we...
he...
you...

3. Stay here till

I ...
these economists ...
Tom ...

4. We shall finish this work before

our teacher ...


we ...
this man ...

5. My friend will go to Mangalia as soon as he ...


we ...
his sister ...
6. I will give you this book after

I ...
my friend ...
one of our students ...

5. Translate paying attention to the use of Present Simple Tense in clauses of time and
condition.
1. Unde vei pleca s v odihnii dup ce vei susine examenele? 2. Cnd vom pleca la ar, n
fiecare zi vom merge la pdure. 3. Eu v voi da aceast carte, dac o voi gsi. 4. Noi putem s
citim un ziar pn ce se ncepe lecia. 5. Dac n sala de lectur (reading-room) va fi mult
lume, eu voi lucra acas. 6. ndat ce voi fi liber, eu v voi vizita. 7. Putei s lucrai n camera
mea pn ce voi veni eu.
6. Answer the following questions using the time indicated in brackets.
1. (At) What time do you usually get up? (7:10 a. m.). 2. What time does your son have
breakfast? (8:30 a. m.). 3. What time do you usually go to the office? (8:15 a. m.). 4. What time
does your teacher come into the class-room if the lesson begins at 10 o'clock? (9:50 or 9:55 a.
m.). 5. What time did you return home yesterday? (6:45 p. m.). 6. What time were you at the
library two days ago? (1:40 p. m.). 7. What time did you prepare your home task yesterday?
(7:15 - 9:10 p. m.). 8. What time did you go to see your friends the day before yesterday? (5:20
p. m.). 9. What time does your sister go to bed? (9:30 p. m.). 10. What time did you go to bed
yesterday? (11:50 p. m.).
7. Translate.
1. Ieri am venit la staia de autobuze (bus-stop) la apte i un sfert, dar autobuzul nu era i eu am
hotrt s merg acas pe jos. 2. S mergem la cafenea la ora unu fr zece. La aceast or acolo
este puin lume. 3. Venii aici la trei i douzeci, vom pleca mpreun la bibliotec. 4.

83

ntotdeauna v sculai la ora aceasta? Da. Noi ntotdeauna ne sculm la ora apte fr un sfert.
5. Noi vom veni la gar la unsprezece fr douzeci i cinci.
8. Choose the right word from the brackets.
1. There are too (much, many) people at the library now. I will come here tomorrow. 2. Did you
read (little, few) in your childhood? 3. My friend brought me (much, many) interesting books to
read yesterday. 4. The doctor advised my father not to walk (much, many). 5. There is (much,
many) fresh air in this room. 6. Did you have (much, many) work to do last night ? 7. Does your
brother read (little, few)? No, he does not. He reads (much, many). 8. Let him think (a little, a
few). 9. I attended (a little, a few) lectures here last year. 10. Please, give me (a little, a few)
money. 11. We spent (a little, a few)days in the country and then came back to town. 12. There
are (a little, a few) mistakes in your dictation. 13. You know German (a little, a few), try to
translate this sentence. It's not difficult at all. 14. My little sister knows (a little, a few) English
words.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
9. Read aloud.
pass, class, glass, grass, last, past, fast, ask, task, far, smart, dark, cart; bread, ready, breath,
potato, Negro, firm, bird, berth, birth, stern, furs, clear, here, care, cure, tired.
10. Answer the questions.
1. How many meals a day do you have?
2. Do you like to have dinner alone or with your friends?
3. With which course do you like brown bread?
4. In what season do people eat much ice-cream?
5. What do you say if there is not enough salt in the soup?
6. Do you usually buy bread in the morning or in the evening?
7. Does your little brother (sister) talk much or little at table?
8. Do you smoke before or after dinner?
9. Do you take sugar with your tea or do you like tea without it?
10. What do you usually do if you are thirsty?
11. Did you have enough time to read a newspaper after breakfast yesterday ?
12. Why did you go to the office without breakfast?
13. Which of you never has dinner at the restaurant?
14. Why do you never go to the restaurant alone?
11. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. I am hungry because I had breakfast at half past seven (1). 2. My friends do not like to stay
at home alone (1). 3. I will have meat and potatoes for the meat course (2). 4. My sister cannot
eat much ice-cream (1). 5. The salt is near your plate (1). 6. There are some forks, spoons and
knives on the table (1). 7. I like white bread with the meat course (1). 8. I won't take any soup
today because I am not hungry at all (1).
12. Use the appropriate word from those given below.
(enough, a fork, a waitress, to eat, to buy, to have a smoke, hungry, alone, to pass, for sweet).
84

1. If you are _________, go to the restaurant and have dinner. 2. Please, help me to translate this
letter, I cannot do it _________ 3. I cannot eat the salad. I have no ________. Bring one, please.
4. Will you have ice-cream or a cup of coffee _________? 5. We have a little free time before the
lesson. Let us _________. 6. Why don't you _______ brown bread? I never _________ it with
the meat course. 7. When did you _________ this nice pen? I _________ it last month. 8.
There is not _________ salt in the soup. Shall I _________ you some?
13. Fill in the gaps with to speak, to talk, to say or to tell and translate the sentences.
1. Listen to me, Nick, do not _________! 2. My friend can _________ three foreign languages.
3. Yesterday we discussed our plans. Some of our colleagues _________ about the work of our
firm. They _________ many interesting things about it. 4. Did you _________ to your father
about it? What did he _________ you? 5. On my day off I visited my uncle. I _________ with
his children. I asked them to _________ me about their studies. "We study well", they
_________. "Our marks are always good." 6. We had some time _________ after dinner. My
friend _________ me about his new work. 7. Did you show your report to the teacher? What did
he _________ about it? 8. Let us _________ about the new film. Gabriel, did you like the film?
_________ us about it, please. 9. You _________ well, but there was a mistake in your last
sentence. _________ it again. 10. When my friend returned from Paris, he often _________ us
about his visit to the capital of France. He _________ us about the beautiful streets, green parks,
fine theatres and buildings of Paris. "Next year I will go there again", he _________.
14. Make sentences using the following words and word combinations.
at the university, to stay at home, over the week-end, on Sunday, in two days, with the meat
course, for sweet, with brown bread, to be over, by bus, to be back, from Romanian into English,
at page six, an hour and a half, a few, a little, half an hour later, never, to have a smoke.
15. Answer the following questions based on the text.
1. What time do you usually have dinner?
2. What time did you have dinner yesterday?
3. With whom did you go to the restaurant yesterday?
4. Were there many people in the restaurant at dinner time?
5. What did you do first?
6. Where did you sit down?
7. Who came up to your table?
8. What did the waitress bring?
9. Why did Nick not take any soup?
10.
What did he take for the meat course?
11.
What did he take for (the) sweet?
12.
What do you like for (the) sweet in winter?
13.
Why did Nick ask you to pass him the salt?
14.
What bread do you usually take with the meat course?
15.
What did you want to buy at the buffet?
16.
What did you do when dinner was over?
17.
How long (how much time) did it take you to have dinner?
18.
Did you have a smoke after dinner or did you go to the office at once?
19.
Why did you have enough time to have a smoke after dinner?
20.
When did you begin to work again?

85

16. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.


1. Dac peste jumtate de or nu vei merge la restaurant, eu voi merge fr voi. Mie deja mi-e
foame deoarece azi am luat dejunul foarte devreme. 2. Putei termina lucrul acesta singur?
Da, desigur. El este uor. ndat ce-l voi termina, v voi spune despre aceasta. 3. Dorii s
mncai? Nu, eu am luat prnzul o jumtate de or n urm. Dai-mi, v rog, o ceac de ceai,
eu sunt nsetat. 4. S ne aezm la aceast mas. Eu cunosc aceast chelnri. Ea lucreaz foarte
bine, eu cred c prnzul ne va lua foarte puin timp. 5. Apropiai-v, v rog, de masa noastr. Pe
mas nu sunt furculie, am spus eu chelnriei. 6. Cine aduce furculiele i cuitele? 7. S v
aduc pine alb sau neagr? Aducei-mi, v rog, neagr. Eu nu iubesc pinea alb cu sup. 8.
Eu nu voi lua sup. Nu sunt flmnd. Voi lua doar salat i felul doi. 9. nc nu sunt flmnd. Am
luat prnzul la ora unu i un sfert. 10. ndat ce vei termina leciile, i-a spus mama fiicei,
s te duci i s cumperi pine neagr. Avem mult pine alb, dar puin pine neagr. 11. Nu
lua ngheat acum, i voi da ngheat dup prnz, i-a spus mama fiului. 12. Niciodat nu
merg la restaurant singur s iau prnzul. 13. Iat sarea, carnea nu este srat ndeajuns. 14. Daimi, v rog, zahrul, cafeaua nu este destul de dulce. 15. Dac fratele dumneavoastr mai mic nu
va mnca sup, s nu-i dai bomboane. 16. Eu voi mnca prjitura cnd vei aduce cafeaua. 17.
Unde ai cumprat aceste bomboane? Ele mi plac foarte mult. 18. Cnd lecia se fa termina, noi
vom vorbi puin, iar mai apoi vei merge acas. 19. S mergem s fumm n grdin. Eu
niciodat nu fumez n camer. 20. Ct timp v va lua prnzul? Cred c dac nu voi mnca
felul nti, prnzul mi va lua doar o jumtate de or. 21. Putei deja citi n englez? Da, puin.
17. Make dialogues on one of the following topics: a) At the Buffet, b) At the Restaurant, c)
At Table at Home.

86

LESSON THIRTEEN (THE THIRTEENTH LESSON)


MY FRIEND IS LEAVING FOR HIS TOWN
John is a good man. He is a friend of mine. A week ago he graduated from the University and
tomorrow he is leaving for his native town, where he will work as an economist. Now he and his
wife are preparing for departure. Their little son is also busy. He is packing his things. He is
putting his toys into a box now. He has a smiling face. He is happy because he likes to travel.
Johns wife, a young woman of twenty-four, is also very busy. There are very many different
things which she must pack. There are shirts, trousers, dresses, hats, suits, coats, shoes and
other things on the sofa and on the chairs.
What are you doing now?, asks John.
I am closing a suit-case. Besides, I must go to the shop to buy some food. But I will not
go shopping until I pack all the things.
There are some boxes near the door. John is writing his new address on them.
He is in a hurry. He must finish this work because his brother is already waiting for him in a
car. As soon as he finishes writing, his brother and he will take the boxes to the bus station.
Johns mother is not helping them here now. She is in the kitchen. She is preparing supper
while they are packing their things.
In an hour and a half many friends will come to say good-bye to John and his family and
wish them a happy life and fruitful work in a new place.
DIALOGUES
At the shop
Buyer. I want a coat for a boy of fourteen.
Saleswoman. Here are some fine brown coats.
Buyer. I don't like this colour. Will you show me another coat? Id like to have a look at that gray
coat over there. How much is it?
Saleswoman. It's five hundred and fifty lei.
(The Buyer's son tries on the coat).
Buyer. Well, I think I'll have it.
At home
A. Where were you at two o'clock in the afternoon? I came to see you, but you were out.
B. I went shopping.
A. What did you buy?
B. A coat for my son.
A. I'd like to have look at it.
B. Here it is!
A. It's very fine. How much does it cost?
B. I paid five hundred and fifty lei for it.
A. I think it's not dear at all.

87

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a friend of mine un prieten de al meu


native natal
to pack a mpacheta
a box o cutie
to smile a zmbi
a face o fa
happy fericit
to travel a cltori
different diferit
a shirt o cma
trousers pantaloni
a dress o rochie
a hat o plrie
a suit un costum
a coat un veston, un palton
a shoe un pantof
other (another) alt(ul)
a suit-case valiz
besides (adv.) n afar de aceasta
a shop un magazin

food alimente
to go shopping a merge dup cumprturi
to do some shopping a face cumprturi
an address o adres
to be in a hurry a se grbi
to wait (for) a atepta
to say good-bye a-i lua rmas bun
fruitful fructuos
fruitless (ant.) nefructuos
a salesman un vnztor
a saleswoman o vnztoare
to try on a ncerca, a msura
to be out a fi absent de acas
to be in a fi acas
to cost a costa
to pay a plti
dear scump
expensive costisitor
cheap ieftin

Word Formation
-ent [ent] adjective suffix:
different
-less[les] this suffix forms adjectives from nouns:
fruit fruitless
child childless

GRAMMAR
PARTICIPLE I
In English the verb has four basic forms. The forth form is called participle I. Ways of
formation:
a) General rule: short infinitive + -ing
Ex.: to read reading
to see seeing
to speak speaking
b) verbs ending in e (only after a consonant): omitting e and adding -ing
Ex.: to write writing
to take taking
to give giving
*** Exception: to be being.
c) verbs ending in -p, -b, -n, -t, -d in one syllable verbs and in some two syllable
verbs, double this consonants.
Ex.: to stop stopping
88

to rub rubbing
to run running
to put putting
to nod nodding
d) verbs ending in ie: -ie y.
Ex.: to lie lying
to die dying
PRESENT CONTINOUS TENSE
Present Continuous Tense refers to an action that takes place at the time of speaking.
How do we form it?
Present Simple of the verb TO BE + PARTICIPLE I of the verb.
Affirmative Form
singular
I am speaking
You are reading
He (She, It) is writing

plural
We are listening
You are sleeping
They are discussing

Negative Form
singular
plural
I am not speaking
We are not listening
You are not reading
You are not sleeping
He (She, It) is not writing
They are not discussing
Interrogative Form
singular
Am I speaking?
Are you reading?
Is he (she, it) writing?

plural
Are we listening?
Are you sleeping?
Are they discussing?

Adverbs used with this tense: now, at this moment, etc.


Present Continuous Tense is also used to indicate actions that will take place in the near future.
Ex.: They are going to cinema at five oclock.
My friend is coming from London tomorrow.
She is leaving for Paris tonight.
Verbs that are not used in continuous form:
These are generally verbs referring to feelings and perceptions, as well as some other verbs:
to want, to like, to love, to wish, to see, to hear, to feel, to notice, to know, to understand, to
remember, to recognize, to forget, to seem, to be, etc.

89

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
Personal pronouns
I
you
he (she, it)
we
you
they

Possessive pronouns
Conjoint form
Absolute form
my
mine
your
yours
his, her, its
his, hers, its
our
ours
your
yours
their
theirs

Ex.: Here is my copy-book. Where is yours?


Yesterday a friend of mine told me about it.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Give the Participle I of the following verbs.
to go, to smoke, to sit, to study, to lie, to eat, to come, to buy, to sell, to talk, to give, to put, to
stop, to pay.
2. Translate in English.
) care ntreab, care se mbrac, care d, care ajut, care face greeli, care povestete, care arat,
care pleac, care se grbete, care susine examenele, care noat, care st culcat, care se
odihnete, care construiete, care ascult, care ncearc.
b) un om care vorbete, o fat care zmbete, nite copii care se joac.
3. Give the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.
1. The waitress is bringing our meals. 2. Nick and Pete are talking. 3. I am reading a very
interesting book now. 4. My friend is smoking now. 5. The little boy is eating his cake. 6. This
woman is selling ice-cream.
4. Answer the following questions paying attention to the verb tense form.
) 1. Are you having an English lesson now?
2. What is your friend doing?
3. What is Nick writing in his exercise book?
4. Where is John writing a sentence?
5. What language are you speaking now?
6. What am I showing to you?
7. Is Jane looking at that picture?
8. What is she reading?
9. Are we sitting or standing?
10. Are you writing or speaking?
b) 1. What time do you usually have dinner?
2. Are you having dinner now? What are you doing now?
3. What kind of books do you like to read?
4. What book is Pete reading now?
5. What do we usually write on the blackboard?
90

6. What am I writing on the blackboard now?


7. Where do you usually prepare your homework?
8. Are you preparing your homework or writing an exercise now?
9. Who is answering my question now?
10. Who usually answers the teacher's questions without mistakes?
c) 1. What are you looking at?
2. What are we speaking about?
3.
Who(m) are you listening to now?
4.
Who(m) is Gabriel looking at?
5.
Who(m) can you speak English with at home?
6.
Who(m) do you usually play chess with?
7.
What is he waiting for?
5. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. Nick is passing me the salt (2). 2. I am buying some sweets here (3). 3. These children are
eating their soup without bread (1). 4. They are playing chess with their friends in that room
(3). 5. They are looking at this new building (2). 6. I am talking to my old friend (2). 7. They
are building a new school (1).
6. Translate paying attention to the verb tense form.
) 1. Unde este fiul dumneavoastr? El a plecat la un prieten acum o or. Ei joaca acum ah
acolo. 2. Nu intrai, v rog, acum n camer. Acolo unul dintre studenii notri susine examenul
la limba englez. Peste cteva minute examenul se va termina. 3. Bunelul dumneavoastr
lucreaz? Nu. El este deja n vrst. El are 75 de ani. 4. Privii, cine lucreaz la masa ceea?
Nu pot s-i recunosc pe aceti oameni. Dumneavoastr nu-i cunoatei? Acetia sunt noii
notri economiti. 5. La ce v uitai? M uit la aceast nalt cldire nou. mi place foarte
mult.
b) De obicei ne odihnim (avem vacan) vara, dar anul acesta am hotrt s mergem la staiune
iarna. Trei zile n urm am ajuns n una din staiunile nu departe de oraul nostru. Locuim ntr-o
camer bun i cald (warm). Noi ne odihnim bine (petrecem timpul bine). Ziua ne plimbm, iar
serile le petrecem de obicei n sala (hall) mare a staiunii. Acum suntem n sal. Eu stau la mas
i scriu aceast scrisoare. Prietenul meu joac ah cu fratele su, iar sora mea privete
televizorul. mi place foarte mult aceast staiune. La anul iar vom veni aici.
7. Make sentences using the given verbs in Present Continuous Tense.
to make a report, to look at, to speak about, to listen in, to smoke, to listen to.
8. Translate paying attention to the possessive pronouns.
1. Luai vestonul meu. Al dumneavoastr nu este destul de cald (warm). 2. Ct ai pltit pe
pantofii dumneavoastr noi i pe cei ce i-ai cumprat pentru fiul dumneavoastr? Ai mei
cost 400 de lei, iar ai lui 350. 3. Casa dumneavoastr se afl nu departe de oprire, iar a noastr foarte departe. 4. Bli este oraul nostru natal, iar Chiinu, al lor. 5. Pe strada noastr este un
spital, iar pe a lor o coal. 6. Ceaiul dumneavoastr este cu totul rece, luai-l pe al meu. Eu nu
vreau deloc s beau acum. 7. Nu luai stiloul lui. El este ru. Luai-l pe al meu. 8. Eu am pltit
700 de lei pentru vestonul meu. Dar ct ai pltit pentru al dumneavoastr? 9. Ieri ei au luat
revistele noastre i ni le-au lsat pe ale lor. 10. Dictarea dumneavoastr este rea, iar a ei bun.

91

9. Make sentences using the given models.


a) is playing chess with friend of his in the sitting-room.
b) That pen is not mine, it's yours.
c) My little brother goes to school, his goes to the kindergarten.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
10. Read aloud.
a) boat, coat, moan, loan, groan, soap, roam, foam, throat;
b) window, now, how, town, fellow, mellow, swallow, bowl, borrow;
c) happy, you, busy, young, type, myth, yet, hurry, funny.
11. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Do people smile or cry when they are happy?
2. When do people usually smile?
3. What is your native town?
4. Will you go to your native town when you have your holiday?
5. When do people usually pack their things?
6. Do you take a large suit-case or a small suit-case when you go to visit your parents?
7. Do you like to travel?
8. Why do you like to travel?
9. Do you change your dress when you come home from the office?
10.
What colour is your new suit (coat)?
11.
When do you usually go shopping?
12.
Why can't you go shopping in the afternoon?
13.
Would you like to do some shopping today?
14.
Where does your little brother (sister) stay until you return from the office?
15.
Do you know Nick's address?
16.
When are you usually in a hurry?
17.
Can you work well if you are in a hurry?
18.
Do any of your friends always wait for you to leave the office together?
19.
Is your friend waiting for you now?
20.
Is your new pen dear?
21.
How much does your new pen cost?
22.
Would you like to buy a new pen?
23.
How much do you think you will pay for it?
12. Ask questions to the bold words
1. Nicks wife is packing her things now (2). 2. I shall come to see you before my departure
(3). 3. My parents were very busy yesterday (2). 4. They are waiting for their teacher in the
club (4). 5. My sister bought fine shoes yesterday (2). 6. We were already hungry at eleven
o'clock in the morning (1).

92

13. Fill in the gaps with the necessary article or possessive pronoun where necessary. Retell
the text.
Yesterday after _____ lectures I went together with _____ brother Peter to one of _____ shops in
_____ centre of our town to buy _____ new coat for him. At _____ shop _____ saleswoman
showed us many different coats. We liked _____ two coats. One of them was too small for _____
brother and we bought _____ other coat. It was _____ fine brown coat for _____ boy of fifteen.
Then half _____ hour later we went to _____ another shop and I bought _____ toy for _____
little sister. Besides, I bought some good things for _____ mother. We spent _____ hour and
_____ half at _____ shop. At _____ quarter past eight we came home. _____ little sister took
_____ boxes from us and opened them. She liked _____ new toys very much. She likes to go
shopping and said, On _____ Sunday we will go shopping with _____ Mum, too. We will buy
_____ new hat for _____ Daddy and _____ new shirt, _____ for Peter. Will we buy _____ new
dress for me, Mum?
14. Insert the right preposition where necessary.
Do you like to prepare _____ departure? I like it very much. The day _____ tomorrow I am
leaving _____ Constana. I am not going _____ a holiday there. A month ago I graduated _____
the University and I will work as a doctor _____ a rest-home in Constana. Tomorrow I will pack
_____ my things. Ill put my suits, shirts, shoes, books and other things _____ my suit-case.
_____ the evening some friends _____ mine will come _____ my place to say good-bye _____
me. At half _____ nine we will go _____ the railway station together. My friend Nick will not
come _____ my place because he will be busy. He will go _____ the station and wait _____ us
there. _____ a day I will be _____ Constana. As soon as I know my address, I will send it _____
my friends.
15. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.
to smile, to travel, to pack, to go shopping, to wait, to cost, to pay, to pass, to put, to stay, to
hurry, to begin, to play.
16. Use the appropriate word from the list below in the right form.
(a railway station, happy, different, to travel, an address, a toy, to do some shopping, in a hurry,
to hurry, a suit-case, to hurry up)
1. Why are you smiling? I am smiling, because I am _______ to see you. 2. I cannot go to the
cinema with you, I must _______. My brother is leaving today, and I'd like to buy some things
and some food for him. 3. Children like to play with new _______. 4. If you want to know your
country well, you must _______ much. 5. My friend's daughter likes literature very much, she
reads many _______ books. 6. We cannot write a letter to Sam either, because we do not know
his _______. 7. Don't _______, we will have enough time to get to the station before the train
starts. 8. If you are not _______, wait for me for a few minutes, we will go to the library
together. 9. Why are you not packing? Where is your _______? We must go to the _______ in
half an hour. 10. _______, or we will be late for the lecture.
17. Finish the following sentences.
1. I am sorry, I cannot speak to you now because ... 2. I don't want to come up to the child
because ... 3. I am leaving for Chiinu tomorrow, so I must ... 4. We have much time, we will
93

not be late, so ... 5. The child is smiling because ... 6. In the evening some friends will come to
see us, so .... 7. We will go to the restaurant as soon as ... 8. Will you go shopping when ... 9. Will
they wait for us until ... 10. My mother will go to his native town after ... 11. Will you pack your
things before ...
18. Make by five sentences with each of the given models. Translate them.
a) I will wait for you here until you return.
b) Ann is packing her things while her mother is preparing supper in the kitchen.
) My husband won't go to the country on Saturday and I shan't go there either. We shall be
very busy.
19. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Dac vei putea, venii la noi la ar duminic. Toat familia noastr va fi bucuroas s v
vad. V vei odihni puin la noi. 2. Privii! Pete vorbete cu vnztorul. Dai s ne apropiem de
el. Ce cumpr el? 3. La var am de gnd s plec n satul meu natal. Am plecat de acolo cnd
aveam aisprezece ani. Vara trecut nu am fost acolo. Nici sora mea nu a fost acolo. Dac va
avea vacan vara ea tot va merge cu mine. 4. Lsai-o pe Ana s ne povesteasc cum a cltorit
anul trecut. 5. Stiloul meu este foarte ru. Pot s-l iau pe al dumneavoastr? 6. S mergem acum
la restaurant! Cer scuze, dar acum nu pot s merg. Eu termin traducerea unui articol foarte
important, plus la aceasta, peste o jumtate de or aici va veni unul dintre economitii din
Chiinu cu care trebuie s vorbesc. 7. Trebuie s merg s fac cumprturi ndat ce voi termina
acest lucru. Ce vrei s cumperi? Nu avem pine neagr, iar eu nu iubesc s mnnc sup
cu pine alb. Plus la aceasta, vreau s cumpr ceva bomboane la ceai. Ateapt-m aici pn ce
nu voi veni de la magazin. 8. Las vnztoarea s ne arate costumul cela. Cred c nu este scump.
9. Dac nu v grbii, ateptai-m, v rog, vom merge mpreun acas cu autobuzul. 10. Peste
cteva zile vei termina universitatea i vei ncepe s lucrai. Cred c vei fi nite economiti
buni. V doresc un lucru fructuos! le-a spus decanul (dean) facultii studenilor. 11. Eu voi citi
un ziar pn cnd tu iei prnzul. Eu nu vreau s mnnc. 12. Artai-mi, v rog, pantofii ceia.
Ct cost ei? Ei nu sunt scumpi. Ei cost 250 de lei. Uitai-v la aceti pantofi, ei tot nu sunt
scumpi. 13. Nu pot s merg acum cu dumneavoastr la magazin. Eu mi mpachetez lucrurile.
Dac m vei atepta pn cnd eu le voi mpacheta, vom merge dup cumprturi mpreun. 14.
Putei s-mi artai alt rochie? Nu-mi place aceast culoare. Desigur. n magazinul nostru
sunt multe rochii de diferite culori. 15. Ieri sora mea i eu am cumprat plrii noi. Ele nu sunt
tare scumpe. A mea cost 50 de lei, iar a ei 65.
20. Make sentences with the following words using the verb let, Present Continuous Tense,
and the Possessive Pronouns.
to come (go) up, to hurry, an hour and a half, happy, to travel, besides, either, to be in a hurry,
dear, fruitless, to cost, cheap, another, other, to go shopping, to do some shopping, to wait for, to
pay, to say good-bye, to try on,
21. Read and retell the following text.
HOW WE PACKED
So we decided to travel ... On Friday evening we met to pack the necessary things. We got a
big suit-case for the clothes and two large boxes for the food. We put all the things which we
wanted to take with us in the middle of the floor, sat round them and began to think how to pack
it all.
94

"I shall pack the things", I said, "I like to pack, and I can do it very well". Harris and George
were very glad. They smiled and began to smoke. There were many things to pack and it took
me a long time to put them all into the suit-case. But when I finished the work and sat down on
the suit-case, Harris said smiling, "Will you take your shoes with you?" I looked around and saw
my shoes under the bed. So I opened the suit-case and put them into it. When I wanted to close
the suit-case, I thought, "Where is my tooth-brush? Once I forgot to pack it and carried it to the
station in my pocket", I remembered. So I decided to unpack the suit-case. "What are you
doing?" smiled George. But I did not answer him. I took all the things out of the suit-case and at
last found my tooth-brush in one of the shoes ...
(After Three Men in a Boat by Jerome K. Jerome)
22. Make a short story using the following words.
to travel, different, to pack, to buy, a suit-case, happy, wait, until, while, which, to hurry, to
forget, an address, a railway-station, to leave.
23. Write an essay on one of the following topics.
1. My First Journey.
2. Preparation for Departure.
3. A New Shop in Our Street.

95

LESSON FOURTEEN (THE FOURTEENTH LESSON)


A SEA STORY
One evening we asked our friend Captain Brown to tell us some interesting story about his
voyages. And he told us the following:
It was fifteen years ago. I was a young man then. Our ship was going to New York. We
were having a very fine voyage. One morning the captain came up to me and said: 'Mr. Brown,
last night I heard such a strange thing that I don't know what to do about it. I could not sleep at
night and I heard a voice in my ear: 'Sail north-north-west! Sail north-north-west!' I think we
must sail in that direction'.
Excuse me, but I think that you ate too much last night, sir, and that is why you could not
sleep' I answered.
The captain got angry.
'I did not eat much yesterday,' he said, 'and I heard the strange voice three times, sir.'
The captain ordered his men to sail north-north-west. The next day one of our men saw a
black thing in the sea. The captain looked through his glasses and said to me: There is a small
boat there with a man in it. Wasn't I right last night? We must save the man.
Soon we reached the small boat and saw a man in it. He was fast asleep. We took him into
our boat and sailed in the direction of the ship. The captain was waiting for us.
When we reached the ship, the man suddenly opened his eyes and cried out loudly, Where
am I? Where is my boat?'
Happy to see you', said the captain, 'I am very glad that we could save you.'
'Did you order your men to take me out of my boat while I was asleep?' asked the man.
'Certainly,' answered the captain. 'Did you want to perish in your little boat?'
'Look here', said the man, 'My name is Captain Wilson and I am making a record voyage
from New York to Liverpool in a small boat'..."
(After W. W. Jacobs)
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a captain un cpitan
a voyage o cltorie
to make a voyage a interprinde o cltorie
(the) following urmtorul
a ship o corabie
such aa
strange straniu
to sleep a dormi
to be fast asleep a dormi strns
to fall asleep a adormi
to fall ill a se mbolnvi
a night o noapte
at night noaptea
in the daytime ziua
a voice o voce
in a loud (low) voice cu voce tare (slab)
an ear o ureche
an eye un ochi

to sail a nota
the North nord
the South sud
the West vest
the East est
a direction o direcie
to excuse (for) a se scuza (pentru)
that is why iat de ce
to be (to get) angry (with sb) a fi suprat
to order o ordona
through prin
to look through a rsfoi
a boat barc
to save a salva
to reach a ajunge, a atinge
suddenly brusc, deodat
to cry out a striga
loudly cu voce tare

96

GRAMMAR
PAST CONTINOUS TENSE
Past Continuous Tense refers to an action that took place at a given moment in the past.
How do we form it?
Past Simple of the verb TO BE + PARTICIPLE I of the verb.
Affirmative Form
singular
I was speaking
You were reading
He (She, It) was writing

plural
We were listening
You were sleeping
They were discussing

Negative Form
singular
I was not speaking
You were not reading
He (She) was not writing

plural
We were not listening
You were not sleeping
They were not discussing

Interrogative Form
singular
Was I speaking?
Were you reading?
Was he (she, it) writing?

plural
Were we listening?
Were you sleeping?
Were they discussing?

Adverbs used with this tense: yesterday at 5 oclock, at that moment, etc.
Ex.: I was waiting for you yesterday at 10 oclock.
I was preparing may homework when my friend came in.
What were you doing when Nick came to see you?
FUTURE CONTINOUS TENSE
Future Continuous Tense refers to an action that will take place at a given moment in
the future.
How do we form it?
Future Simple of the verb TO BE + PARTICIPLE I of the verb.
Affirmative Form
singular
I will be speaking
You will be reading
He (She, It) will be writing

plural
We will be listening
You will be sleeping
They will be discussing

97

Negative Form
singular
I will not be speaking
You will not be reading
He will not be writing

plural
We will not be listening
You will not be sleeping
They will not be discussing

Interrogative Form
singular
Will I be speaking?
Will you be reading?
Will he (she) be writing?

plural
Will we be listening?
Will you be sleeping?
Will they be discussing?

Adverbs used with this tense: tomorrow at 9 oclock, this time tomorrow, etc.
Ex.: I will be listening to a lecture at this time tomorrow.
They will not be playing chess at twelve on Sunday.
What will you be doing at eight oclock tomorrow?
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Put the verbs from the following sentences in Past and Future Continuous Tenses.
1. What is Nick's wife doing? She is preparing for departure. 2. John is not packing his
things. 3. Are you waiting for your friend? No, I am not, I am waiting for my father. 4.
Where are you hurrying to? I am hurrying to the railway station. 5. He is talking to a
friend of his. 6. My sister is washing her dress. 7. They are not smoking now.
2. Give the negative and the interrogative forms of the following sentences.
a) 1. Michael was having dinner at half past three yesterday. 2. My sister was paying for her new
coat when I came into the shop. 3. Our mother was preparing dinner in the kitchen at five
o'clock. 4. I was hurrying to the buffet when I met you. 5. Your friends were smoking in the
corridor when we saw them.
b) 1. I will be waiting for you at seven o'clock in the evening. 2. They will be having dinner
when you come to see them. 3. We will be discussing this question at this time the day after
tomorrow. 4. We will be preparing for departure at three o'clock tomorrow. 5. They will be
receiving their friends at this time tomorrow.
3. Answer these questions paying attention to the use of Past and Future Continuous
Tenses.
1. Were you preparing your homework at six o'clock yesterday?
2. What will you be doing at three o'clock tomorrow?
3. What was your brother doing when you came home the day before yesterday?
4. Where were you hurrying to when a friend of yours met you yesterday?
5. What time were your friends playing chess on their last day off?
6. Will you be waiting for us at this time tomorrow?
7. Who(m) were you speaking to when I came into the room?
8. Were you writing your exercises or translating a letter when they came to see you?
9. What were you talking about when they came in?
98

4. Ask questions to the bold words and sentences.


a) 1. We were waiting for Dr. Smith at five o'clock yesterday (2). 2. We were looking at the
pictures of my sister's flat when you came to our place (2). 3. The boy was eating ice-cream
when we came in (2). 4. Captain White was smoking when we opened the door (2).
b) 1. They will be discussing our plan at three o'clock tomorrow (4). 2. We will still be
packing our things when you come to our place (3). 3. My sister will be having breakfast at
this time tomorrow (3).
5. Translate in English paying attention to the use of tenses.
) 1. Cnd am intrat n restaurant, chelnria punea (to put) pe mas lingurile, furculiele i
cuitele. 2. Ce reviste citeai cnd noi am venit la bibliotec? 3. Ce cumprai cnd eu am intrat n
magazin? 4. Ce fceai ieri la ora trei dup amiaz? Eu luam prnzul. 5. V-am vzut ieri la ora
cinci n strad. Unde v grbeai?
b) 1. Nu venii la noi mine la ora unsprezece dimineaa. Noi vom fi ocupai. Noi vom discuta
articolul acestui scriitor. 2. Ce vei face mine la ora cinci? Eu voi rspunde la scrisorile
firmelor strine. 3. Citii un ziar pn cnd eu voi pregti prnzul. Peste jumtate de or voi fi
liber. 4. Las-l pe Nick s vin aici mine la ora opt fr un sfert. Eu l voi atepta aici.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
6. Read aloud
boat, coat, loan, roam, foam, goat, barrel, fracture, mild, carry, receiver, Larry, knack, ruler, lull,
fast, donkey, feather, clearer, mask, central, cutting, cycle, carriage.
7. Answer these questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Why do children often want to be sea captains?
2. Did you like to read books about voyages in your childhood?
3. When did you make your first voyage?
4. Can we go from Bli to Chiinu by ship?
5. Which of the students of your group usually speaks in a very loud voice?
6. What colour are your friend's eyes?
7. Till what time do children usually sleep in the daytime?
8. Why must you sometimes work at night?
9. Why do many people like to go to the South on holiday?
10. What big cities in the North of Great Britain do you know?
11. Are you angry with any of your friends now?
12. Why do you sometimes get angry with your friends?
13. How much time does it take you to reach Paris if you go there
by plane?
8. Ask questions to the bold words and sentences.
a) 1. My brother wants to be a sailor (2). 2. In my childhood I liked to read books about
voyages (1). 3. Our students went to the sea in the summer (3). 4. In 15 minutes we will reach
the station (1). 5. The children are fast asleep in the garden (1). 6. I heard my friend's voice in
the garden five minutes ago (2). 7. The boats were sailing in our direction (1).
b) 1. He did not attend the lecture yesterday because he was ill (1). 2. I am already hungry
99

because I did not have breakfast in the morning (1). 3. Our village will change next year
because we will build many new houses there (1). 4. I don't like the salad either because there
is not enough salt in it (1). 5. I asked him to come up to me because I could not see him well
(1).
9. Insert the right article where necessary.
1. ____ Michael! Go to ____ blackboard and write ____ following sentence: " ____ capital of
____ United States is ____ Washington D. C.". 2. Yesterday there was ____ meeting at our
office. ____ economist Brown spoke at ____ meeting and said many interesting things about
____ work of their firm. 3. ____ Tom usually speaks in such ____ low voice that sometimes I
cannot hear him at all. 4. ____ last year _ Dr. Smith was spending his holiday in ____ South of
____ Romania. Once he and his friends decided to make ____ voyage from Constana to
Mangalia in_____ small boat. They left Constana early in ____ morning. ____weather was fine.
When they were near Mangalia, they saw ____ black thing in ____ sea and heard ____ voice:
"Help, help!" They sailed in ____ direction of ____ black thing and soon saw that it was ____
man. They sailed up to ____ man and took him into ____ boat. Dr. Smith tried to help him.
When they reached Mangalia, ____ doctor took him to ____ hospital. ____ next day when ____
doctor and his friends were walking along ____ street, they met ____ man again. He recognized
____ doctor and thanked him for his help.
10. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
1. Chiinu is ______ the South ______ Bli. 2. The captain looked ______ his glasses and saw
a man ______ the sea, not very far ______ the ship. He ordered ______ his men to sail ______
that direction. 3. I am angry ______ you because you are not listening ______ me. 4. "Will we
reach ______ the village early ______ the morning?" asked one ______ the travellers. "No,
we shall reach ______ it ______ night," answered the other. 5. Don't be angry ______ his words.
6. Yesterday when I was speaking ______ our teacher, Nick came ______ me and asked me
______ an English magazine. I took the magazine ______ my bag and gave it ______ him. He
thanked me ______ the magazine, put it ______ his bag and went away. 7. Tell ______ him that I
must return the magazine ______ the library tomorrow. I shall be waiting ______ him ______
the library ______ ten o'clock.
11. Fill in the gaps with to hear or to listen (to) in the right tense form.
1. My sister often plays the piano in the evening and we ________ her. 2. Repeat the last words
of the sentence, please. I did not ________ them well. 3. Jane, you are sitting very far from me.
Can you ________ me? 4. Why are you not ________ us? We are discussing a very important
question. 5. My grandfather often tells me about his life and I like ________ him. 6. The lecturer
spoke in a low voice and I couldn't ________ him. 7. I ________ this story from him last week.
12. Translate using:
) such or so.
1. Aceasta a fost o cltorie aa de interesant! 2. Aceast cltorie a fost aa de interesant! 3.
Aceasta este o povestire aa de scurt, c o vei citi foarte repede. 4. Aceast povestire este aa de
scurt, c o vei citi foarte repede. 5. Aceasta este o povestire aa de stranie! 6. Aceasta povestire
este aa de stranie! 7. Aceast salat este aa de srat (salty), c nu o pot mnca! 8. Eu nu pot
mnca aa salat srat. 9. M simt aa de ru c nu pot vorbi acum cu dumneavoastr. 10. Avei
un stilou aa de ru! Luai-l pe al meu, v rog. 11. Oare nu iubii aa bomboane?

100

b) to hurry or to be in a hurry.
1. De ce el este aa de grbit? El este grbit deoarece are o ntlnire. 2. Dac v vei grbi, vei
face multe greeli. 3. Biatul s-a grbit la u cnd i-a vzut mama pe fereastr. 4. Cer scuze, nu
pot vorbi acum cu dumneavoastr, m grbesc la gar. 5. Dac v grbii, rugai chelnria s v
aduc supa i felul doi deodat. 6. De ce oamenii se grbesc n direcia ceea? Ei se grbesc la
coal. Acolo va fi o lecie. 7. Acest elev nu se grbete niciodat, iat de ce el face foarte puine
greeli.
13. Make by five sentences with each of the given models.
a) Yesterday I saw such an interesting film that I can't forget it.
b) The book is so interesting that I advise you all to read it.
c) Nick works hard at his English, that's why he knows it well.
.
14. Make ten sentences using the following words and word combinations.
to make a voyage, the following story, in such a loud (low, strange) voice, to be fast asleep, to
fall asleep, to fall ill, at night, in the direction of, to be (get) angry (at, with), to look through, to
order.
15. Continue the following sentences. Translate them.
1. I will not be angry with you if ... 2. My friend's brother will be captain after ... 3. I will not
take soup either if ... 4. My sister will not fall asleep until ... 5. The waitress will come up to our
table as soon as ... 6. Your examination will be over before ... 7. The boy will be asleep until ...
8. I shall be looking through these magazines while ...
16. Answer the following questions.
1. Who wrote this story?
2. Where was the ship going to?
3. What did the captain of the ship hear one night?
4. What did he order his men to do?
5. What did the captain and his men see the next day?
6. What was that thing?
7. What did they see in the boat?
8. What did the men do?
9. Where did they take the man?
10. Why did they do that?
11. What was the captain doing at that time?
12. When did the man open his eyes?
13. What did the man cry out when he opened his eyes?
14. Who was the man?
15. Why was he in a small boat?
16. Did the captain of the ship help Captain Wilson?
17. Why was Captain Wilson angry with the captain of the ship?
17. Give antonyms.
to speak loudly, in the daytime, to wake up, the South, always, to buy, to begin with, happy, to
pack, fruitful, low, wide

101

18. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.


1. S v povestesc despre prima mea cltorie pe mare, pe care am fcut-o cnd aveam apte ani.
2. Nick, mergei la tabl i scriei urmtoarea propoziie: Fiul fratelui meu vrea s fie cpitan.
3. Pe cine ateptai aici? Noi ateptm delegaii care vor veni aici peste jumtate de or. 4.
Lsai-o pe Ana s v arate florile ei, ele sunt foarte stranii, ele sunt aproape (almost) negre. 5.
De ce culoarea sunt ochii surorii dumneavoastr? 6. De ce vorbii aa de ncet? Fratele meu
mic nu doarme. 7. M-am trezit la ora dou de noapte i pn la ora patru nu am putut s adorm.
8. Mie mi place foarte mult nordul. Cnd voi termina universitatea voi merge s lucrez ntr-un
ora din nord. 9. Ce orae mari cunoatei la vestul SUA? 10. S mergem n aceast direcie. Aici
sunt multe cldiri frumoase. 11. Cer scuze, dar nu v recunosc. La ce universitate ai nvat? 12.
De ce v-ai suprat ieri pe mine? Eu nu m-am suprat. Eram aa de ocupat, c nu am putut s
vorbesc cu dumneavoastr. Ateptai-m puin, v rog, i vom discuta toate ntrebrile
dumneavoastr, ndat ce termin acest lucru. 13. Fiul prietenei dumneavoastr are aa un nume
straniu, c nu pot s mi-l amintesc. 14. Barca mea este prea mare, s o lum pe a dumneavoastr.
15. Nu-l voi uita niciodat pe acest om. El mi-a salvat viaa. 16. Noi am ieit din ora la apte i
jumtate dimineaa i am ajuns la pdure doar dup o or i jumtate. 17. Cnd ne-am ntors
acas, fiul dormea strns, noi am luat cina, am vorbit tare, dar el nu ne-a auzit. 18. Luni l-am
vizitat pe colegul meu, care era bolnav, de aceea nu am putut veni la dumneavoastr. 19. Oare nu
tii c Tom s-a mbolnvit? Iat de ce el nu este azi la lecie. Dai s-i sunm dup lecie. 20.
Profesorul Smith mi-a recomandat s dorm ziua. Am ncercat de mai multe (several) ori s
adorm ziua, dar nu am putut. 21. Putei s citii aceste reviste pn cnd eu m voi uita prin
scrisori i telegrame. 22. Sora mea s-a simit ru noaptea. Iat de ce nici eu nu am putut s
adorm. 23. Mergei n aceast direcie pn cnd nu vei vedea un bloc sur. Biblioteca se afla la
dreapta lui.
19. Translate the text below and retell it.
Ieri un prieten de al meu m-a vizitat. Noi am vorbit despre copii. Eu i-am povestit
urmtoarea istorie despre fratele meu: Cnd eram copii locuiam la ar. Fratele meu avea o
barc mic, i des fcea cltorii cu prietenii lui. Mama noastr mereu se supra pe noi, cnd
plecam la ru. n timpul uneia din cltoriile noastre am auzit o voce necunoscut. Am notat
n aceast direcie i n curnd am vzut un om la mijlocul rului. El striga: Ajutor! Ajutor!
Trebuie s-l salvm, a spus fratele meu. n curnd am ajuns la mijlocul rului i l-am adus pe
omul acela n barca noastr la mal (bank).
Am venit acas trziu. Mama nu ne-a dat ntrebri, dar ne-a ordonat cu voce suprat s
lum cina i s mergem la culcare. Eu m-am apropiat de mama i i-am spus: Ascult, mam, nu
te supra pe noi. Dar mama nu vroia s asculte istoria noastr. Culcai-v, a repetat ea. Noi
ne-am culcat la ora doisprezece, dar nu puteam adormi...
Acum fratele meu are treizeci de ani. Doi ani n urm el a devenit (to become, became)
cpitanul unui vas mare. Cteva zile n urm el s-a ntors cu corabia sa din New York i peste
dou sptmni el va veni la noi n vizit.
20. Retell the text as if you were: a) the author, b) the captain of the ship, c) Mister Wilson
21. Make a short story using the given words.
to make a voyage, the sea, to sail north (south etc.), in the direction of, to hear, strange, the
weather, to perish, to reach, it took us ... to , to save, to think.

102

LESSON FIFTEEN (THE FIFTEENTH LESSON)


TRAVELING ABOUT THE UNITED STATES
The sun was rising from behind the Cordeliers. The mountains were unusually beautiful
that fine summer morning. All the passengers of an express train were fast asleep. Only Nick, a
young tourist, was still sitting at the window and looking at the rising sun. In front of him, on
the table there was a thick note-book with golden letters: 'New York the USA. The boy looked at
the letters, then slowly opened the note-book and read:
June 15, 2002.
- New York. What a beautiful city! It's one of the most famous places in the United States.
Thousands of tourists come to see the Statue of Liberty for holiday. One can meet here people
from France and from South Africa, from New Zeeland and from Argentina.
He turned over some pages:
July 17.
Our tourist ship is sailing down the Mississippi, the famous American river. The river where
the world known American writer Mark Twain spent his childhood. Here and there one can see
beautiful and amazing places... On this ship one can hear all the languages in the world..."
July 21.
A little old town on the Mississippi River...
The people of the town are proud of it. They say they are the first settlers of the region.
They showed us many interesting things. Their new comfortable houses differ much from
those old ones which are kept for tourists.
Then Nick took his pen, turned over some more pages and wrote down:
August 10, 2002.
In a few days we will leave the United States land. I hope next year I will come back here not
as a tourist, but as a student of an American university.
He stopped and closed his eyes. He was thinking of his native country, of his parents, friends
and relatives who were waiting for him.
The plane was flying higher and higher to the East, first over the ocean and then over high
mountains, rivers, lakes and beautiful cities of the Europe...
DIALOGUE
. Hallo, Peter! How are you? Where were you a few days ago? I rang you up but there was no
answer.
B. Why, I was in Paris on an excursion. Didn't you know about it? I came back only last night.
A. I see ... How did you like the city?
B. It's wonderful! I think it's one of the most beautiful cities in the world.
A. Did you have enough time to go sightseeing?
. I am sorry to say not. There are so many places of interest in Paris, you know, so many
palaces, museums and monuments. I couldnt see all of them.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to travel about a cltori prin


to travel in the mountains a cltori n muni
to rise a rsri
to set a apune
behind dup
from behind de dup

to turn over a ntoarce


down jos
a language o limb, un limbaj
world lume
a settler colonist
a region o regiune
103

a mountain un munte
a train un tren
by train cu trenul
a tourist un turist
still nc
in front of n faa
famous renumit
to be famous a fi renumit

to differ a fi diferit
to stop a (se) opri
a relative o rud
to fly a zbura
high nalt, sus
over peste
a lake un lac

Word Formation
-ese [i:z] adjective suffix indicating the nationality:
Japan Japanese
China Chinese
-ic [ik] this suffix forms adjectives from nouns:
hero heroic
child childless
-ous [as] as a rule, this suffix forms adjectives from abstract nouns:
fame famous
-ship[ip] noun suffix forming abstract nouns from adjectives and nouns.
a friend friendship
hard hardship
CONTINENTS, COUNTRIES AND CAPITALS
Europe ['ju]
Asia ['eia]
North America ['no: 'merk]
South America ['sau 'merk]
Australia [o'strel]
Albania [lben]
Bulgaria [bl'gr]
China ['tan]
England ['glnd]
France [fr:ns]
Germany ['d:mn]
Hungary ['hngr]
India ['ndi]
Italy ['tl]
Japan [d'n]
Korea ['r]
Moldova [mol'douv]
Poland ['poulnd]
Romania [rou'men]
Russia ['r]
Turkey ['t:k]
The USA ['ju:'es'e]
Vietnam [vjt'n:m]

Europian ['jui: n]
Asian ['eian]
North American ['no: 'merkn]
South American ['sau 'merkn]
Australian [o'streln]

Albanian [l'benn]
Bulgarian [bl'grn]
Chinese ['ta'ni:z]
English ['gl]
French [frent]
German ['d:mn]
Hungarian [hgrn]
Indian ['ndin]
Italian ['tljn]
Japanese ['d'ni:z]
Korean ['rn]
Moldovan [mol'douvn]
Polish ['poul]
Rumanian [rou'menn]
Russian ['rn]
Turkish ['t:k]
American ['merkn]
Vietnamese [vjetn:'mi:z]
GRAMMAR
104

Tirana [ti:'r:n:]
Sofia ['souf]
Beijing ['bed]
London ['lndn]
Paris ['prs]
Berlin [b:'1n]
Budapest ['bju:d'pest]
Delhi ['del]
Rome [roum]
Tokyo ['toukjou]
Pyongyang ['pjio'j]
Chiinu ['knu]
Warsaw ['wo:so:]
Bucharest ['bju:krest]
Moscow ['mosku]
Ankara ['nkr:]
Washington ['wotn]
Hanoi [h:'no]

THE USE OF DEFINITE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NOUS


As a rule we dont use the definite article with proper nouns: Ex.: Europe, London, Mary,
etc. But we use it in the following cases:
1. cardinal points.
Ex.: the North, the South, the West, the East.
2. names of countries and other geographical names which have in their structure such
nouns as union, state, republic, etc.
Ex.: the United States, the Republic of Moldova, etc.
3. names of oceans, seas, mountains, island and groups of islands.
Ex.: the Pacific Ocean, the Black Sea, the Alps, the West Indies, the Greenland, etc.
4. before the names when speaking about all the members of the family. In this case the
noun takes a plural form.
Ex.: the Smiths, the Browns, the Waynes, etc.
WE DO NOT USE THE ARTICLE with:
1. names of countries and continents:
Ex.: Japan, South Africa, North America, Central Asia, etc.
2. names of villages, towns and cities:
Ex.: London, Washington, Paris, Chiinu, Bucharest, etc.
Exception: the Hague
3. names of streets and squares:
Ex.: Independence Street, Liberty Square, etc.
THE USE OF ONE, ONES
As a rule we use one or ones in order not to repeat a noun already mentioned before.
Ex.: I have no book. I want to buy one.
I dont like these red flowers. Please, give me some white ones.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Answer the following questions paying attention:
) to the use of the definite article with geographical nouns.
1. In what part of the Republic of Moldova do you live?
2. Were you on holiday in the North or in the South of our country last year?
3. Did you spend your last holiday in the Carpathians or in the Alps?
4. Do you often go for holiday to the Carpathians?
5. What are the Carpathians famous for?
6. What is the Danube famous for?
7. Why do many people like to go for holiday to the Black Sea shore?
8. Are there any resorts on the Nistru?
9. On what other rivers are there good resorts?
105

10. Is the Prut in the West or in the East of our country?


11. Do you like to go for holiday to the sea shore or to the river bank?
12. What cities on the Nistru do you know?
13. Which of them is the biggest?
14. Were you on holiday on the Nistru or on the Prut last year?
15. Which river is more beautiful: the Danube or the Nistru?
16. Which river of the Europe is the longest?
17. Is the Danube as long as the Volga?
18. Are the Carpathians between the Siret and the Tisa?
19. Where are the Carpathians?
20. Are the Carpathians very high?
21. Are the Himalayas higher than the Carpathians?
b) to the use of one.
Where can one get if one crosses the Atlantic (Ocean)?
What cities will one pass if one sails down the Nistru?
What rivers will one cross if one travels from the West Europe to
the Republic of Moldova?
What rivers will one cross if one goes from Bucharest to Bli?
What countries will one pass if one travels from the Republic of Moldova to England?
2. Translate paying attention:
) to the use of the definite article with geographical nouns.
1. n Romnia sunt multe ruri mari: Dunrea, Siret, Bistria, Mure, Some i altele. 2. Prutul
este mai ngust ca Nistrul, dar este foarte frumos. El desparte Republica Moldova de Romnia. 3.
n fiecare an eu mi petrec concediul n Carpai, dar anul viitor eu nu voi merge acolo, eu voi
merge n una din staiunile de pe Dunre. 4. Soul surorii mele nu merge vara n Turcia. Acolo
vara este foarte cald. El iubete s se odihneasc n Romnia. 5. Prietenul meu iubete foarte
mult Marea Neagr, iat de ce n fiecare an n vacan el merge la Constana. 6. La anul noi vom
merge n excursie n Carpai. Profesorul nostru spune c vom vedea acolo multe lucruri
interesante. 7. Ce orae pe Dunre cunoatei? Pe Dunre sunt multe orae: Tulcea, Galai,
Brila, Giurgiu i altele. 8. Unde sunt mai multe ruri: la estul sau la vestul Europei? 9. Unde
sunt mai multe pduri: n sudul sau n centrul republicii noastre? n centru. 10. Noi cu prietenul
locuim n centrul oraului: el pe strada Independenei, iar eu pe piaa V. Alecsandri.
b) to the use of one.
1. Trebuie s citeti ziare n fiecare zi. 2. n aceast bibliotec poi lua orice carte. 3. Nu poi uita
acest film. 4. Trebuie s citeti mult ca s cunoti bine literatura. 5. n Carpai te poi odihni bine.
6. n Londra poi ntlni oameni din diferite ri. 7. Trebuie s studiezi mult pentru a nva bine
limba englez. 8. Ieri nu s-a putut iei afar: era foarte frig i ploua tare.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
3. Read aloud.
gold, golden, knave, brutal, bluebird, storey, fear, fast, cast, task, feather, bold, mind, monthly,
per'ceive, folding, cherry, lorry, married, ferry, horror, terror, merry, con'ceive, leather, famous,
nervous, con'tinuous, glorious, jealous, 'callous, 'perilous, eco'nomic, his'toric, ro'mantic, comic,
e'lectric, hardship, 'leadership, membership.
4. Pay attention how the following words are formed. Translate them.
106

tourist
indifferent
heroic
landless
Chinese
sailor

hardship
weakly
uncomfortable
agreement
unhappy
healthy

democratic
proudly
famous
rainy
irregular
unimportant

5. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. What time does the sun usually rise in summer?
2. Does the sun set in summer as early as in winter?
3. What is there in front of your house and behind it?
4. Are there more rivers in the North or in the South of the Europe?
5. Which Romanian songs do you like best of all?
6. What heroes from tales do you know?
7. How many people at your office know the Chinese language?
8. Was your grandfather a peasant or a worker?
9. Did you travel much about our country when you were at school? Why?
10. Where is it easier to swim: in the sea, in the lake or in the river?
11. Where is the Black Sea?
12. Will you go to the sea or to the Carpathians for holiday in the summer?
13. Are the mountains in the Carpathians as beautiful as in the Alps?
14. What are the Carpathians famous for?
6. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
a) Last summer my sister's son, who lives ______ a village ______ the North ______ our
republic, came ______ Chiinu. He was a boy ______ ten. I went ______ the station to meet
him. I waited ______ the bus only ______ some minutes. I met Victor, and we started ______
the nearest bus station. When we were going ____ the street, he looked
all the houses and
buildings. Suddenly a car appeared ______ the corner. Victor did not know what to do and ran
______ me, but another car appeared. The driver saw the boy. He almost turned ______his car,
but stopped it. I ran ______ the boy, took him and thanked the driver. ______ the evening I told
the boy that he must be very careful ______ the street.
b) 1. Turn ___ page ten! _____ page eleven you will see a new rule. Read it and write it _____
your exercise-books. 2. I was going _____ street when I saw my friend Nick, who was standing
_____ the corner. 3. We are proud _____ our city. Many tourists _____ all parts _____ the
world come to New York to have a look _____ our places of interest, said Tom. 4. There is a
beautiful river _____ our village and the nearest town. 5. Last summer we travelled _____
Poland for two weeks. 6. We saw many interesting things when we were traveling _____ the
mountains last year. 7. The American people are proud _____ their beautiful cities.
7. Make 10 sentences using the words given below.
a passenger, to sing, a tourist, to be famous for, to turn over, between, a lake, a mountain, to
travel about a country, in the fields.
8. Give synonyms.
to get up, large, fine, a town, to go away, high, to come back.
9. Give antonyms.
107

behind
often
winter

young
thick
slowly

most
to set
never

uncomfortable
further
lowest

10. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models.


a) How beautiful the sunset is!
b) What a dark night!
c) What a nice song they are singing!
11. Translate using yet, still, else, other, some more or one more.
1. Vreau s cumpr nc o valiz. 2. Pe cine mai ateptai? 3. Ce va mai povestit Tom? 4. Eu
nc nu tiu despre aceasta. 5. nc mai plou. 6. n ce orae ai mai fost anul trecut. 7. Ce
ntrebare mai dorii s-mi punei? 8. Oare nc nu-l cunoatei pe prietenul meu? 9. Mergi la
magazin i mai cumpr pine. 10. El nc mai lucra cnd noi ne-am ntors. 11. El a mai avut
nevoie de ceva timp pentru a-i termina raportul. 12. nc ce ruri n Europa cunoatei? 13. Mai
dai-mi nc o carte la literatura englez. 14. Prietenul meu nc nu lucreaz, el nva. 15. Unde
vom mai merge n excursie? 16. Ateptai-m puin. Eu nc nu sunt gata. 17. nc nu este ora
apte. Vom veni la gar la timp.
12. Use the appropriate word from the list below in the right form.
(famous, between, further, a tourist, past, heroic, a lake, friendship, Chinese)
1. There must be peace and _________ _________ the peoples of the world. 2. Paris is
_________ for its beautiful palaces and museums. 3. Though it was raining hard, the travellers
went _________ and _________ to the North. 4. Read this book. It's a book about the
_________ people of our country. 5. The _________ language is more difficult than the English
language. 6. The _________ of Baikal is the deepest in the world. 7. "Will we go _________ any
villages on our way to the mountains?" one of thesked.
13. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Anul trecut mi-am petrecut vacana n una din staiuni nu departe de mare. Aceasta este una
dintre cele mai frumoase staiuni. M-am simit acolo foarte bine, deoarece nu era foarte cald. 2.
S mergem acas. Soare deja apune i se face frig. 3. Vara soarele rsare mai devreme dect vara
i apune mai trziu. 4. Ieri am vizitat un vechi prieten de-al meu i ne-am amintit de copilria
noastr, oraul i casa noastr natal n care am trit. Noi locuiam la marginea oraului i direct
(right) dup casa noastr era pdurea. n faa casei era o grdin mic unde ne jucam des. 5. Anul
trecut, cnd cltoream prin muni, am ntlnit un ran care avea mai mult de o sut de ani. n
muni sunt muli oameni la fel de n vrst ca mine, chiar i mai n vrst, a spus el. 6. S
mergem vara n Carpai. Eu cunosc acolo un stuc frumos. Acest loc este vestit prin aerul curat
de munte i cu lacul lui frumos. Acolo se poate de petrecut timpul foarte bine. 7. Vei zbura n
Turcia cu avionul sau vei pleca cu autobuzul? Eu voi pleca cu autobuzul, chiar dac aceasta
mi va lua n jurul la dou zile. Cu avionul eu ntotdeauna m simt ru. 8. Ce cntec frumos i ct
de bine ei l cnt! 9. Eu mi voi petrece concediul n satul natal. ndat ce voi ajunge acolo, voi
ncepe s lucrez la cmp cu prinii. 10. n Carpai sunt multe staiuni bune. Mie mi plac
Carpaii mai mult ca marea. Eu m simt mai bine acolo. 11. Tatl meu s-a nscut ntr-un sat mic
unde i-a petrecut copilria. Acum el tot locuiete acolo. 12. Londra este unul dintre cele mai
frumoase orae din lume. Anul trecut noi am petrecut acolo cteva zile, cnd cltoream prin
108

Marea Britanie. 13. Cine poate arta pe hart toate oraele republicii noastre? a ntrebat
profesorul pe elevi. 14. Anul trecut n Paris au venit mai puini turiti dect anul acesta. 15.
Aprindei (Turn on), v rog, lumina. Este deja ntuneric i este greu de citit. 16. ntoarcei, v
rog, pagina. S citim aceast povestire. 17. Mark Twain, un scriitor american renumit, cunotea
foarte bine copiii.
14. Answer the questions.
1. Did Nick come to the USA as a student?
2. Why did he come to the United States?
3. Which places of the United States did Nick visit?
4. When did he visit New York?
5. Whom did she meet in New York?
6. When did Nick visit the little town on the Mississippi?
7. What did he see there?
8. Why are the people of the town proud of it?
9. In what month was Nick returning home?
10. Was she returning home by plane or by train?
11. How long does it take one to get to New York from Bucharest by plane?
15. Make a short story using the active vocabulary of the lesson. Begin with:
a. Once when we were travelling in the mountains a friend of mine suddenly felt bad...
b. The following incident took place in my town. Once when I was going along the street
c. Last year I was on holiday in the summer. I decided to travel about our country. It was early
morning when my friend and I...
16. Read and retell the following text.
JAMES SMITHS GOING TO THE UNITED STATES
It was already ten o'clock in the evening, but James Smith was not at home. His wife, a
woman of thirty, was sitting at the window and looking into the dark street. Her husband was an
economist. That day he had an important meeting.
Suddenly she heard a knock at the door. It was he! He always knocked three times ... The
woman hurried to the door.
James, a tall man, a little older than his wife, came into the room. He was smiling. It seemed
to her that he looked younger and stronger.
"I am sorry, dear, I am later than usual today. We had an important meeting. Some
economists of our firm are going on an excursion to the United States. I am one of them."
That night James could not sleep: the night seemed longer, the bed seemed less
comfortable ... He fell asleep only at four o'clock in the morning. He dreamed about the greatest
and the most beautiful city in United States New York. He, a simple economist, is walking
along the New York streets, hundreds of American friends are heartily greeting him.
A month later James was hurrying to the port with a small suit-case in his hand. Soon he
joined a group of economists who were waiting for the departure of the ship.
At last a man in uniform appeared with a list in his hand.
"John White!"
"Here!" said one of the men and hurried to the ship. "Mark West! Alan
Parker!"
"James Smith" ...
James looked at his wife, who was standing near him, and smiled:
109

"Well, dear, good-bye!"


But the man in uniform continued:
"James Smith, you will stay here. I am sorry, you cannot go. We have some reason for ..."
"Some reason ...," James Smith said slowly and looked at his friends who were standing in
silence. He noticed that one of them was smiling, and soon understood it was a joke. He hurried
to the ship where his friends were waiting for him.
His wife waved her hand. Though she was very sorry to part with her husband, she smiled
and said "A happy voyage, I am glad your dream came true".

LESSON SIXTEEN (THE SIXTEENTH LESSON)


110

THE CHILDHOOD AND YOUTH OF DICKENS


Charles Dickens, one of the greatest and most popular English novelists, was born on the
7th of February, 1812 in one of the small towns of England. He was a weak child and did not like
to take part in noisy and active games.
The little boy was very, capable. He learned to read at an early age and read many books in
his childhood.
When he was about six, someone took him to the theatre for the first time. He saw a play by
Shakespeare and liked it so much that he decided to write a play of his own. When it was ready,
he performed it together with some of his friends. Everybody enjoyed the performance, and the
little writer felt very happy.
When Dickens was nine years old, the family moved to London. They lived in the suburbs of
the capital of England. Their life was very hard. There were several younger children in the
family, besides Charles. The future writer could not even go to school (because at that time his
father was in the Debtors Prison of the Marshalsea. There was nobody in London whom Mr.
Dickens could turn to for money and his wife with all the children except Charles went to the
prison too to join him. The family lived in the prison until Mr. Dickens could pay his debts.
Those were the most unhappy days of all Charles life. The boy worked from early morning
till late at night to help his family.
Only at the age of twelve, when his father was out of prison, could Charles go to school. He
wanted to study very much, but he did not finish school. Two years later he began to work again.
He worked hard to earn his living, and tried many trades, but he did not like any of them.
His dream was to study.
At the age of fifteen he often visited the famous library of the British Museum. He spent
many hours in the reading-room of that library. He read and studied there and in this way he
received his education.
Later Dickens described his childhood and youth in some of his famous novels, such as
Little Dorrit, Nicholas Nickleby, Oliver Twist, David Copperfield.
The great writer died more than a hundred and fifty years ago, but everybody still reads his
books with great interest.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

youth tineree
popular popular, vestit
a novel un roman
a novelist un romancier
noisy glgios
active active
capable capabil
at the age (of) la vrsta de
at an early age la o vrst fraged
about (adv.) n jurul la
own propriu
ready gata
to be (get) ready (for) a fi gata de
to enjoy a savura
a performance o pies de teatru
to move a se deplasa

besides (prep.) n afar de, pe lng


several ma muli
to turn to sb. for sth. a apela la cineva
money bani
except n afar de
to pay a plti
to earn one's living a-i ctiga viaa
British britanic
a way o cale, un mod
by the way printre altele
on one's way n felul su
an education studii
to describe a descrie
such as ca
to die a muri

111

Word Formation
-ance [ans] suffix forming nouns indicating abstract notions usually from
verbs:
to perform performance

GRAMMAR
SOME, ANY, NO, EVERY AND THEIR COMPOUNDS
A number of compound words begin with some, any, no and every. These indefinite pronouns
usually form their compounds with such words as: thing, body, one, where.
English
something
somebody, someone
somewhere
anything
anybody, anyone
anywhere
nothing
nobody, no one
nowhere
everything
everybody, everyone
everywhere

Romanian
ceva
cineva
undeva
orice
oricine, oricare
oriunde
nimic
nimeni
nicieri
totul
fiecare
peste tot

Russian
-, -, -, -,
-, -, -, -,
-, -, -, -, etc.
-; ,
-, -, -, ,
-, -, -, -
,
,
,

, ,

The compounds formed from some are usually used in affirmative sentences.
Ex.: I can see something white in that room.
I want to go somewhere for a rest.
Somebody (someone) is looking at me now.
The compounds formed from any are usually used in interrogative and negative sentences.
Ex.: Can you see anything white in that room? I dont see anything there.
Did you go anywhere for a rest last summer? No, I didnt go anywhere.
Is there anybody (anyone) here? There isnt anybody (anyone) here.
The compounds formed from no are usually used in negative sentences. In this case the verb is
used in affirmative form.
Ex.: I see nothing there.
I went nowhere last summer.
There is nobody (no one) here.
Note: When somebody, something, anybody, no one, etc. are used as subjects we always put the
verb in the third person singular.
Ex.: Somebody goes to the office.
Does anyone come to see us?
112

GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Give the negative and interrogative forms of the following sentences.
1. Someone is waiting for you in that room. 2. He invited everybody to his country-house for the
week-end. 3. There is something interesting on in our club to-day. 4. Everybody is proud of this
work. 5. They are laughing at something funny. 6. Somebody is knocking at the door. 7. He sees
someone on the other bank of the river. 8. You will find this book somewhere.
2. Answer the following questions paying attention to the use of indefinite pronouns.
1. Is there anything on the table?
2. Can you see anything on the walls of our class-room?
3. Did you read anything interesting last week?
4. Did you read any interesting books last month?
5. Did you invite anybody to dinner on your last day off?
6. Will you invite any of your friends to dinner on your next day off?
7. Why did you invite none of our students to your place for your last birthday party? (Why
didn't you invite any of our students to your place ...?)
8. Why doesn't anybody come to the office on Sunday?
9. I think that some books by Oscar Wilde are not difficult for you. Does everybody agree with
me?
10. Did any of you read English books last year?
11. Why did none of you read English books last year?
12. Does everybody like it in the South?
12.Why doesn't everybody like the South in summer?
13.Will you go anywhere for holiday or will you stay in town?
14.Why will you go nowhere for holiday?
15.Will any of our students leave for London for their winter holiday?
16.Will all of us go somewhere tonight?
17.Why won't we go anywhere tonight?
18.Did each student in our group take part in the last English language party?
19.Can any of you speak three languages?
20.Can any of these students sing?
21.Could none of you play the piano in his childhood?
22.Are you always in a hurry if anyone is waiting for you? Why?
3. Fill in the gaps with the right word from below.
(something, anything, nothing, everything, somebody (someone), anybody, (anyone), nobody (no
one), everybody (everyone), somewhere, anywhere, nowhere, everywhere)
1. I saw this man _________ in our town last year. 2. Can _________ help me with this work? 3.
I shall be very glad if we invite _________ else to join our excursion. 4. _________ can answer
this difficult question. 5. I don't like this book, give me _________ else. 6. If you don't find
_________ at home when you return, wait a little until I come back. 7. I don't like this dress,
Mary. Put _________ else on. 8. If it rains, we won't go _________ 9. We returned home late
and soon _________ went to bed and fell asleep. 10. Can you buy such a book for me
_________? 11. I don't like to go shopping on Sunday, because there are usually very many
people _________. 12. Is there _________ in the room? No, there is _________ there. 13. Is
_________ clear to you or shall I repeat the rule? 14. _________ wants to go on an excursion,
113

but as it is raining hard, we will go _________ today. 15. Ask _________ else about it. I know
_________ about this matter and can't tell you _________. 16. As _________ is clear to
_________, I will tell you _________ else.
4. Translate in English.
1. Dac mine va fi frig, nu vom merge nicieri. 2. Dac cineva va ntrzia, noi nu vom atepta.
Trebuie s venim la timp. 3. Aici este mai ntuneric, dect n camera ceea. Nu vd nimic. 4. toi
vor adormi strns ndat ce vor ajunge la paturile lor. 5. Povestii-ne ceva interesant despre viaa
dumneavoastr. 6. S mergem la magazin. Trebuie s cumpr ceva pentru cin. 7. Cineva v
ateapt n camera dumneavoastr. 8. Eu tot nu aud nimic. Vorbii mai tare. 9. De ce zmbii?
Oare n povestirea mea este ceva de rs? 10. Dac nu vei lucra asupra greelilor voastre, nimic
nu v va ajuta. 11. Ieri v-a invitat cineva la aceast serat? 12. Copiii se bronzeaz acum undeva
pe malul mrii. 13. De ce nu suntei de acord s plecai undeva n concediu? 14. Acest om nu se
teme niciodat de nimeni. 15. Cineva mai vrea s ia parte la excursia noastr? 16. De ce nimeni
dintre voi nu ascult povestirea? Oare ea nu este interesant? 17. Fiecare dintre voi trebuie s
in minte aceste cuvinte, le-a spus copiilor si mama. 18. Poate cineva dintre voi s cnte acest
cntec? 19. Nimeni nu-l va uita pe acest om.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
5. Read aloud.
famous, nervous, in'dustrious, eco'nomic, ro'mantic, comic, capable, readable, Burmese,
Chinese, Japanese, performance, ap'pearance, 'utterance.
6. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. What kind of books did you like to read in your childhood best of all?
2. What famous English novelists do you know?
3. What new performances at the theatres of our republic are popular with the people? (... with
the children?)
4. Which of our students takes an active part in all our parties?
5. What kind of people do we call capable?
6. At what age did you begin to travel about our country?
7. What must one do to get ready for one's examinations?
8. What kind of novels do you enjoy best of all?
9. In what year did you move to this town?
10. What do people usually have with them when they move to another place?
11. Does anyone else know English at your office besides you?
12. Does everyone know English at your office except your friend?
13. Which of the famous American writers began to earn his living at a very early age?
14. When was Dickens born and when did he die?
15. Who(m) do you usually turn to for help?
7. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. My son took part in the performance at his university yesterday (3). 2. Some children do
not like noisy games (1). 3. We moved to Bli in 1996 (2). 4. My sister's daughter began to
play the piano at an early age (2). 5. Many famous writers worked hard in their youth to earn
their living (1). 6. My grandfather could not receive a good education, because his parents
114

were very poor (1). 7. We enjoyed the new film yesterday (2). 8. Their friends are waiting for
them in the garden (4). 9. Dickens decided to write a play of his own when he was about six
(3).
8. Insert the right article or possessive pronoun where necessary.
Jack London, ____ great American novelist, was born in ____ San Francisco in ____ family of
____ farmer. ____ life of ____ family, was very hard. John London, ____ father of ____ family,
left ____ farm and moved to one of ____ towns of ____ United States. He tried many trades, but
could not get enough money to send ____ children to ____ school. Jack London began to earn
____ living at ____ early age. He sold ____ morning and evening newspapers in ____ streets of
____ town. At ____ age of fourteen he began to work at ____ factory as ____ worker. He
worked eighteen to twenty hours ____ day. In 1893 he became ____ sailor and went to ____
shores of ____ Japan. Soon he became ____ good sailor. Jack London travelled very much.
He did ____ very hard work, but he also read much and tried to receive ____ education. He
studied at ____ school and at ____ university. He also read many books on ____ History and
____ Philosophy. ____ Jack London's dream was to become ____ writer. In 1897 London went
to ____ Far North of ____ America. He did not bring ____ gold from there, but he brought
something better than ____ yellow metal. It was ____ book of ____ stories about ____ life in
____ North. ____ dream came true. He became ____ writer.
9. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
1. When Dickens was a boy ____ ____ four, his father showed him a beautiful house not far
____ the place where they lived ____ that time. "Why cannot we live ____ such a fine house?"
the boy asked his father. "We are very poor and cannot pay ____ it", his father
answered. Little Charles often visited that place. He liked to look ____ the house and to play
near ____ it. Man years later he really moved ____ that house and lived there ____ a long time.
2. Theodore Dreiser, the great American writer, was born ____ the 27th ____ August, 1871 ____
one ____ the small towns ____ America. 3. ____ 1894 Jack London took part ____ a strike ____
San Francisco. 4. Jack London learned to read ____ the age ____ four. He often read interesting
stories together ____ his mother. When he was a boy ____ about ten, he sold newspapers ____
the streets ____ the town and ____ this way helped ____ parents. 5. What novels ____ Jack
London are popular ____ our reader?
10. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.
to be, to do, to take, to lie, to think, to bring, to see, to enjoy, to leave, to begin, to try, to spend,
to buy, to rise, to set, to travel, to die.
11. Fill in the gaps with one of the given words.
(else, more, still, other, another, yet)
1. What _______ books by Dickens, besides David Copperfield, did you read in your childhood?
2. Who _______ wants to take part in this performance? 3. How many _______ days shall we
travel about this country? 4. Will anybody _______ take part in our performance? 5. Aren't you
ready _______? 6. I don't think he is _______ at the office. He usually leaves the office at six. 7.
What _______ do you want to say besides this? 8. I will take _______ cup of tea, I am _______
thirsty. 9. I cannot go to the museum today. Ask someone _______ to join you. 10. What
_______ foreign languages does Pete speak? 11. I think that we'll _______ be working at this
subject at twelve o'clock tomorrow. 12. Ask John to sing at our party. No one _______ can do it
115

better than he. 13. My son cannot _______ read. 14. We hope that some _______ people will
take part in the discussion. 15. It seems to me that somebody _______ wanted to join our
excursion to Soroca. 16. I am not _______ sure that you are right.
12. Translate using to speak, to talk, to tell, to say.
1. Ieri Pete nu a vorbit mult, dar a spus multe lucruri interesante. 2. Spunei-i prietenului
dumneavoastr c ieri am primit o mare plcere de la raportul lui. 3. Descriei-v ziua de lucru,
le-a spus studenilor profesorul. 4. Eu voi vorbi despre aceasta cu inginerii notri. Eu le voi
povesti despre lucrul dumneavoastr. 5. Despre ce vorbesc ei? Ei discut piesa nou a acestui
scriitor. 6. Profesorii spun c acest biat este foarte capabil. 7. Ce ai spus? Repetai, v rog. Nu
vorbii aa de repede. 8. Vorbii mai tare, aici este foarte glgios, i ne este dificil s v
ascultm. 9. Povestii-ne ceva despre oraul dumneavoastr natal. 10. Spunei-i, v rog, c nu are
dreptate. 11. Noi vom vorbi despre acest spectacol mine dup lecie. 12. Cineva dintre prietenii
dumneavoastr vorbete engleza? 13. Ei v-au spus ceva despre aceasta? 14. Nu-i spune nimic
despre plecarea noastr. 15. Nu vorbii la lecie. Ascultai-i pe colegii votri cnd ei vorbesc n
englez. 16. Toi n afar de dumneavoastr spun c spectacolul a fost minunat. 17. Cui i-ai spus
despre aceasta? 19. Acest scriitor spune c a scris propria lui pies cnd avea cincisprezece ani.
20. Cu cine vorbeai aa de tare la telefon cnd noi am intrat? 21. De ce ieri nu ne-ai spus nimic
despre ultimul meci (match)? 22. Domnul Smith spune c a nceput s-i ctige viaa la o vrst
timpurie, deoarece tatlui su i venea greu s ntrein (to keep) familia singur.
13. Fill in the gaps with one of the given words in the right form.
(ready, to move, a novelist, capable, great, besides, except, to enjoy, an education, to take part
in, a novel, to describe)
1. Yesterday some students of our group went to the theatre. They saw a play by a _________
American writer. Everybody _________ it very much. 2. Ch. Dickens is a great English
________. 3. I received _________ in Orhei, where I studied at school, and then at the
university. 4. Peter is a very _________ boy. He studies well and knows some foreign languages.
5. In what novel did Dickens _________ his childhood? 6. All the students _________ me study
the second foreign language. 7. My parents have two children _________ me. 8. You may take
any book you like _________ this one. It isn't mine. 9. At the age of seventeen I _________ to
Chiinu to study at the university. 10. I am sorry, dinner is not yet _________. Wait a little. 11.
How many _________ did this novelist write? He wrote many fine _________. 12. Will Jane
_____ ______ _____ our concert? She sings very well. I think she will. 13. In my childhood
and I read all the _________ by Dickens _________ his American Notes. 14. Do you know any
other foreign languages _________ English?
14. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models.
a) I shall take all the books except this one.
b) Besides this book I should like to take two more.
15. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Poate cineva dintre voi s-mi povesteasc despre copilria marelui scriitor american Mark
Twain? i-a ntrebat mama copii. Da, desigur, mam. Profesorul nostru de literatur ne-a
povestit multe lucruri interesante despre anii timpurii ai vieii sale. 2. Cnd am venit n grdin,
acolo erau muli copii. Ei se jucau ntr-o joac glgioas i rdeau. 3. Dac aici va fi glgios,
putei lucra n camera mea. Peste cteva minute eu voi pleca la universitate i aici nu va fi
116

nimeni. 4. Toi spun c fiul fratelui meu este un biat capabil. El este unul dintre cei mai buni
elevi ai colii, cnt bine la pian i ntotdeauna ia parte activ n viaa colii. 5. La o vrst
timpurie am locuit la ar. Mai trziu am trecut ntr-un ora mic unde mi-am petrecut
adolescena. 6. Tatl prietenului meu are n jurul la aptezeci de ani, dar el nc mai lucreaz i
primete o mare plcere de la lucrul su. 7. Va merge cineva cu mine la restaurant? Ne vom
ntoarce degrab. Prnzul ne va lua aproximativ 25 sau 30 de minute. 8. Copii, toi sunt gata s
scrie dictarea? 9. Ateptai-m puin, dac nu v grbii. Eu nc nu sunt gata. 10. Cnd v-ai
mutat la Bli? Aproximativ zece ani n urm. 11. Dac vei privi piesa nou, vei primi o mare
plcere. Toi spun c aceasta este una dintre cele mai bune piese ale teatrului nostru. 12. V-a
plcut ieri noul film? Nu. Nici unuia dintre studenii notri nu i-a plcut acest film. 13. Nimeni
n afar de dumneavoastr n oficiul nostru nu studiaz limba francez. 14. Acum sunt foarte
ocupat. Lucrez mult, studiez engleza, n afar de aceasta nv la universitate. 15. Toi n afar de
Nick vor merge la spectacol. El va fi ocupat. Plus la aceasta el nu se simte prea bine. 16. Nu pot
s merg acum cu dumneavoastr la magazin. Eu voi face cumprturi n drum spre cas. 17. n
ce roman Dickens i-a descris copilria? Ce roman al lui Dickens este cel mai popular? 18. Pcat
c nu putei s-mi dai adresa lui John. Dar dac mi vei descrie casa, eu o voi gsi uor. 19.
Acest roman este la fel de interesant ca i cel pe care l-ai citit luna trecut? Nu. Acest roman
este mai puin interesant, cu toate c nu pot s spun c el este ru. 20. ndat ce voi citi acest
roman, vi-l voi da, dac dorii. Cred c v va plcea i dumneavoastr. 21. Dac sunt prieteni
buni, oricnd poi s te adresezi la ei dup ajutor.
16. Read, translate and retell the following text.
I began to earn my living at an early age. When I was about ten, my stepfather sent me to
London where I began to work with one of the firms. I did not enjoy my work, certainly, as it
was hard and uninteresting and I had to work from early morning till late at night. Nobody taught
me anything there; nobody ever thought about me, nobody even spoke to me except a few boys
who worked together with me. My life was hard, but I tried to think of it as little as possible.
Once, however, when I was lying awake at night, an idea came to me to run away somewhere.
But where could I go? I could not return to my stepfather... And then I remembered that I could
go to my mother's sister Miss Trotwood. I did not know her address, I only knew that she lived
somewhere in Dover.
The next Saturday I packed my box and when everything was ready, I asked a fellow to help
me take the box to the station. On the way to the station, however, the fellow suddenly
disappeared with my box and I was quite alone in the street...
(After "David Copperfield" by Dickens)
17. Answer the following questions.
1. What was Charles Dickens?
2. When was Charles Dickens born?
3. Where was he born?
4. What kind of child was Charles Dickens?
5. Did he like to take part in noisy and active games?
6. When did he learn to read?
7. How old was he when he went to the theatre for the first time?
8. What play did he see?
9. What did he write after that?
10. When did his family move to London?
11. In what place did he live?
12. Why couldn't Charles go to school at that time?
13. Why was Mr. Dickens in prison?
117

14. Could Charles' father send him to school?


15. What was Charles' dream?
16. What did he often visit at the age of fifteen?
17. In what way did he receive his education?
18. In what novels did Dickens describe his childhood?
19. What novels by Dickens do you like?
20. Can you read novels by Dickens in English?
18. Write a short essay using the given words.
to be born, at the age of, at an early age, to die, to earn one's riving, to do hard work, in this way,
to turn to sb. for sth., to receive an education, to travel about the country, in his youth, to take
part in, to become famous, to describe, such as, to be popular with, etc.

118

LESSON SEVENTEEN (THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON)


THERES NO SUCH WORD
I'll never forget my teacher. It happened when I was a student. Her name was Mildred T.
Pretz, and when we students spoke of her we played with her name as children often do, and
called her "Mrs. Pretzel". She was a quiet teacher, a little older than our other teachers, and
rather strict. She often kept me after school to redo my exercises, or something else she
considered wrong with my work. I didnt like these brilliant ideas, but I had to obey. There was
no reason to look for an escape, she didnt allow me to go out. I looked like a prisoner.
Usually, I did not have any conversation with her. One day, after I took a little breath, I
explained to her, saying "I can't do it, I just can't get it right." My right hand was trembling, I
could not hide it. The first few minutes she was silent, there was no sound. Then looked at me
and said in a whisper: "There's no such word as can't." "What?" "There's no such word as can't,"
she said again, "just work until you can." And that was that. She walked away, but I still worked
on my exercises. At that moment I could hardly understand her words.
I tried to make out her words that night, and many days after that. Finally I understood! Mrs.
Pretz was right! There really was no such word as can't! And so I learned a lesson for my entire
life, with its sad and gay moments. When you really want to do something, you must never give
up. I learned that no matter how difficult, when something is important, it's not only true that
you can do it, but that you must!
after Stephen Trussel
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to forget a uita
quiet linitit
rather destul de
to keep a ine, a pstra
to redo a reface
wrong greit
brilliant minunat
an idea o idee
to obey a asculta
to look for a cuta
an escape o ieire
to allow a permite
a prisoner un prizonier
a conversation o conversaie
to take breath a-i trage sufletul

to explain (to) a explica


to tremble a tremura
to hide a ascunde
silent tcut
a sound un sunet
a whisper o oapt
until pn cnd
to understand a nelege
to make out a-i da seama
entire ntreg
sad trist
gay vesel
to give up a renuna
true adevrat

GRAMMAR
TO BE ABLE TO, TO HAVE TO
to be able to is the equivalent of the modal verb can.
to have to is the equivalent of the modal verb must.

119

Both of them are used instead of these verbs in Future Indefinite Tense (to have to is also used in
Past Indefinite Tense).
Ex.: I can go there now. I will be able to go there tomorrow.
He must go there now. He will have to go there next week.
He had to go there last week.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Put the following sentences in the Future Simple Tense.
) 1. My sister can sing very well. 2. Everybody can do this work. 3. One of our students can
write plays of his own. 4. Can you play this game? 5. This girl cannot take part in active games.
b) 1. You must move to another town. 2. They must wait for us here. 3. The airplane must land at
once. 4. The boys must run to get to the station in time.
2. Give the interrogative and the negative form of the following sentences.
1. Nick could run as fast as John. 2. We will be able to see this performance tonight. 3. Charles
Goodman had to earn his living at an early age. 4. I will have to get off at the next stop to do
some shopping. 5. Pete had to agree with his friend because his friend was right. 6. They had to
come again because the director of the office was out at that time. 7. I will have to buy new
gloves. Mine are quite old. 8. They will have to hurry not to be late for the concert. 9. My friend
had to return home to take his watch.
3. Ask questions to the bold words and sentences.
1. Your son will have to stay in bed because he is still weak (4). 2. We shall be able to go on
an excursion the day after tomorrow (3). They had to put on their coats because it was very
cold (3). 4. We shall have to stay at home as it will soon begin to rain (4). 5. They had to
knock another time because no one opened the door (3). 6. This old man could tell very
funny stories (3).
4. Answer the following questions paying attention to the use of modal verbs and their
equivalents.
1. Did you have to earn your living when you were a child? Why?
2. What kind of English novels will you be able to read in a year?
3. What did you have to do when it began to rain yesterday?
4. Will you be able to go to the sea in the summer?
5. When will you be able to go somewhere for holiday?
6. In what year did you move to this town? Why did you have to leave your native town?
7. Did you have to go shopping last Sunday?
8. Which of your students will be able to take part in this concert?
9. When will you be able to speak English well?
10.
Why did Dickens' mother have to live in the Marshalsea Prison with her children?
12. Why did little Dickens have to help his family?
5. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models.
a) Did you have to work at the office till six o'clock last Saturday?
b) We did not have to take taxi. We got to the station in time by bus.
120

c) He wont be able to buy this book; he hasn't got enough money about him.
6. Translate in English.
1. Vei putea lua parte la aceast excursie? M tem c nu voi putea. Va trebui s lucrez asupra
raportului. 2. Cred c Pete va putea s vin n Londra la timp, doar c va trebui s zboare acolo
cu avionul. 3. Ea nu va putea primi plcere de la plimbare, dac nu va mbrca un veston cald,
deoarece va fi foarte frig. 4. Va trebui s v grbii la gar, dac nu vrei s ntrziai. 5. Deoarece
nimeni nu mi-a rspuns, eu trebuie s repet ntrebare mea mai tare. 6. Eu cred c el nu va putea
s invite aa de muli oameni. Apartamentul lui este la fel de mic ca i al dumneavoastr. 7. Ieri
am vrut s mergem n pdure, dar ploua i a trebuit s rmnem acas. 8. Cnd Dickens avea
nou ani, prinii lui au trebuit s se mute la Londra. 9. Eu sunt sigur c John va putea face un
raport bun, dar el va trebui s citeasc foarte multe cri. 10. Eu nu am putut s plec acas
deoarece ploua puternic i a trebuit s rmn la lucru mai trziu ca de obicei. 11. Duminic am
petrecut mult timp la aer liber, dar nu a trebuit s mbrcm haine clduroase deoarece timpul era
bun i soarele strlucea puternic. 12. Fiul dumneavoastr va putea s ni se alture desear? Da,
cred c va fi liber i va putea s vin la dumneavoastr. 13. Nu a trebuit s m adresez nimnui
dup ajutor. Eu am putut face singur acest lucru. 14. Ei nu au putut discuta aceast ntrebare
serioas ieri. Ei vor trebui s-o fac astzi. 15. Nu a trebuit s pierd mult timp pe acest text. El
este foarte uor.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
7. Read aloud.
race, coat, cure, mumps, thus, future, fracture, willow, bow, vast, flask, parry, village, stretch,
method, penny, slang, swoon, lain, fade, v heel, peer, code, moor.
8. Pay attention how the following words are formed. Translate them.
Everywhere
fatherless
direction
funny

homeless
hopeful
nameless
indifferent

unnecessary
someone
snowy
sailor

9. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Can you tell us something interesting that happened to you when you were a child?
2. Have you any friends? Do they look like their parents?
3. Who(m) do you look like?
4. Do you look more like your father?
5. What does your mother look like?
6. What does your sister (brother) look like?
7. Does your friend like quiet or noisy games?
8. What do you do if your little brother (sister) does not obey you?
9. Is it easy to understand a person when he is speaking in a whisper?
10. Can you understand your teacher easily when she speaks English?
11. Do you like gay or sad songs?
12. When do you usually ask the teacher to explain to you this or that rule again?
13. When does one have to look around?

121

10. Ask questions to the bold words and sentences.


1. We had to come back home because Mary felt bad and could hardly walk (1). 2. The child
will not be able to drink such hot milk (1). 3. You j will have to look through all these
articles before you begin to work at your report (2). 4. We had to speak in a whisper because
Father was asleep (1). 5. Peter looks like his brother (1). 6. The teacher had to explain the
difficult rule to his pupils once more (2).
11. Insert the right article where necessary and retell the text.
It happened on _____ cold autumn day. _____ Bishop of _____ city was sitting at _____
table. He was ready to have _____ supper when somebody knocked at _____ door. _____
moment later _____ door opened and _____ stranger came in. _____ Bishop looked at _____
man, but before he could say _____ word, _____ man began in _____ low voice, "Look here, my
name is _____ Jean Valjean. I am back from _____ prison. I was there nineteen years. They let
me out four days, ago. I walked thirty miles _____ last night. I want to go back _____ home.
When I came to this town, I began to look for _____ place where I could stay for the night. I
went to _____ hotel, but they did not allow me to stay there. They said to me, 'Be off or we shall
call _____ police', and I had to obey. I decided to sleep in _____ park, but _____ good woman
showed me your house and said: 'Knock at that door'. Is this your hotel? I can pay for _____
room. See! Here is my money. I worked hard in _____ prison for nineteen long years and I
earned very much money. I am hungry. May I have something to eat? Ill pay anything that you
ask."
_____ Bishop turned to _____ servant and said, "Put another chair at _____ table, please."
"Stop," said Jean. "Did you understand everything? I am just back from _____ prison. Here
is my passport, yellow, as you see. Nobody wanted to help me. Will you give me something to
eat and _____ bed?"
"Put some white sheets on _____ bed, please." said _____ Bishop as he looked at _____
servant. He then turned to _____ man and asked him to sit down. "We shall have _____ supper
in _____ few minutes," he explained...
(after V. Hugo The Miserables)
12. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
1. What happened _____ you yesterday? Why did you not come to the lecture? 2. It isn't yet clear
whom this baby looks _____. 3. When I went out, it was very dark _____ the street. I looked
_____, but could not make _____ anything. 4. He said something _____ me _____ whisper, but I
couldn't make _____ his words. 5. Will you describe _____ me your brother? I shall willingly
meet _____ him _____ the station if you are busy, but I don't know what he looks _____. 6.
Everybody was ready _____ departure _____ Peter. 7. This teacher is very popular _____ his
pupils because he usually explains _____ them all the rules very well. 8. I am very glad I could
do something _____ you. You may turn _____ me _____ help _____ any time you like. 9. I
enjoyed _____ all the stories _____ that magazine _____ the last one. 10. Can you speak _____
any other foreign language _____ English? 11.1 am very busy now and can't answer your
questions. I'll explain _____ you everything _____ our way home. 12. "You must obey _____
your sister," the mother said _____ her little son before she left home.
13. Fill in the gaps with one of the given words.

122

(to obey, in a whisper, to make out, a step, to look around, to hide, trembling, to look for, to
explain, sad, to turn to, an idea, to turn pale, pale, to tremble, to take breath).
1. "Will you make a few _________ in my direction and give me your hand? The night is so dark
that I cannot _________ anything," said one of the travellers to his friend. 2. ... One of the
soldiers saw an old woman, came up to her and said _____ _____ _____, "Will you be able
_____ _____ one of our men in your house? He is ill and cannot go further. "The woman _____
_____, but her voice was quiet when she said, "Be sure, the enemy will not be able to find him
even if they ______ ____ him everywhere in the village." 3. "Lets _____ ____ Nick for help. He
knows this subject best of all." "Oh! What a brilliant _________!" 4. "Why do you look so
_________ and _________? What is the matter with you?" I asked a friend of mine. "I am
sorry, it is difficult for me to speak about it now," she answered in a _________ voice. "I shall
_________ to you everything later." 5. I cannot run as fast as you do. Let's stop and _____ ____.
6. Never read such _________ stories to your children. Don't you see they are all ________? 7.
Children must _________ their parents.
14. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.
to tremble, to stop, to run, to allow, to obey, to understand, to make ; out, to hide, to enjoy, to
die, to sing, to rise, to set, to laugh, to continue, j to write, to read, to see, to buy, to bring, to
drink, to hear, to study, to he.
15. Give synonyms.
to take place
some minutes
to let

a thought
a talk
vacation

to make sth. clear


when he was 12 years old
to approach

16. Give antonyms.


to be unable
sad
to turn red

to look for
in a loud voice
light

to be quiet
incapable
to rise

17. Make 10 sentences beginning with constructions as it is interesting, it is difficult, it is


necessary, using the words given below.
to hide, to make out, in a whisper, to make a step, to be quiet, to look for..., to be silent, to take
breath, to explain, to understand, several, hardly.
18. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models.
a) Who(m) does this girl look like? She looks like her mother.
b) What does that girl look like?That girl is tall with blue eyes.
) This is rather a difficult book. This book is rather difficult.
19. Use the verbs in brackets in the right tense form.
1. What you (to look for)? I (to look for) my magazine. It (to be) here half an hour ago. Oh!
Here it is! You (to hide) it from me? 2. When I (to come) into the room, the children (to play)
some game. Ann (to stand) in the corner and Peter (to explain) something to Jane in a whisper. 3.
"If you (to be quiet), I (to show) you something interesting," the old man said to the children
123

who (to stand) around him. 4. Some people (to tremble) if they are afraid of something. 5. Why
you (to tremble)? Are you afraid? 6. Who (to play) the piano in that room? It's my daughter.
She (to have) her lesson now. She (to take) lessons three times a week. 7. Why you (to lie) here?
You (to be) ill? No, I (not to be), I (to have a rest). 8. When you (to move) from your native
town to the capital? We (to do) it ten years ago. 9. I (to go) to see you as soon as the doctor (to
allow) me to go out. Now I still (to feel) rather bad. 10. It is very important for me to read an
article in that magazine. So I (to intend) to look for it in all the book-shops and libraries of our
town until I (to find) it.
20. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Ieri s-a ntmplat ceva cu ceasornicul meu. Dimineaa el se grbea cu cinci minute, iar seara
rmneau n urm cu cinci minute. 2. Nu voi putea s-l recunosc pe fiul dumneavoastr, acolo
sunt aa de muli biei de vrsta lui. l vei recunoate uor. El seamn cu mine. 3. Vei putea
cuta aceast carte la dumneavoastr acas n ast sear? Nu o pot gsi nicieri. 4. Ce vei lua la
micul dejun: cafea sau lapte? Eu voi lua lapte. Dac avei grip luai cafea. Laptele este prea
rece. 5. Nu pot s beau ceai repede. El este foarte fierbinte. Vei putea s m ateptai puin? 6.
Permitei-mi, v rog, s merg s m plimb puin. Dar vei putea s mergei singur? Da,
desigur, azi m simt mai bine. 7. Nu voi putea pleca la ar duminica viitoare. Medicul nu-mi
permite s ies din cas pn ce nu m voi ndrepta. 8. Cutai casa nr. 23? Mergei n aceast
direcie, apoi luai-o la stnga. Este clar? Da! Mulumesc. 9. Eu ntotdeauna primesc o mare
plcere de la acest cntec. Cred c este cel mai vesel i frumos din toate cntecele pe care le
cntai de obicei. 10. Dac nu m vei ajuta nu voi putea nelege nimic n aceast scrisoare. 11.
Ce cutai? Eu caut valiza mea mic. Iat-l. A trebuit s-l ascund de copii. 12. Nu v voi
explica nimic pn cnd nu v vei liniti. mi vine greu s vorbesc cnd facei aa mare glgie.
13. Noi discutam cartea nou a unui tnr scriitor de al nostru, cnd tatl meu a venit. El tot a
luat parte la discuie. Cnd el vorbea, toi tceau. El ne-a povestit multe lucruri interesante.
21. Answer the questions.
1. When are people silent?
2. When does one feel sad?
3. Why did you once turn pale?
4. When do one's hands begin to tremble?
5. When can one hardly walk?
6. When can one hardly continue one's work?
7. When do people usually speak in a whisper?
22. Make a short story on the topic: What Happened to Me in My Childhood when I Was at
Home Alone. Use the words and word combinations given below
to obey, to allow, a performance, alone, dark, to close, a brilliant idea came to my mind, to look
for, to find, suddenly, heavy, steps, to hide, to look like, quiet, moment, to understand.

124

LESSON EIGHTEEN (THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON)


A STUDENT STORY
Have I ever told you the story of Bob Russel? He is my neighbour and a member of our
local club, so I use to call him Bobby. We live in the same building. Why do I want to tell you
his story? You will understand it when you hear it. Let me begin:
He was a poor student in high school. He could never learn to study. It was an interior fight
for him to go to the lessons. He only did well at subjects which came easily to him, but he liked
to read. He sometimes liked English class, which was usually a kind of literature.
I believe he wasn't very big on homework. It usually took him a lot to do it correctly. But in
his second year of study he got a test paper which somehow captured his imagination. His
subject was F. Scott Fitzgerald, among the American novelists of the 20s. He decided to defend
bravely his interests. He read everything by this author as well as everything he could find about
him, preparing himself like a soldier for the fierce battle. It was the first time he was excited
about writing a paper. He tried to liberate all his best thoughts. He could not admit to be
defeated.
When the day came, he anxiously handed in his work, imagining the possibility of triumph.
A week later came the moment for the papers to be returned. Bobby was surprised by the enemy
look of his teacher as he handed him his work. In a few seconds his surprise turned to shock,
then to hate. His work was in red. There was written: "This isn't your own work."
Bobby was ready to kill his teacher, but instead of this he turned round and never returned
to his class.
Now, after many years as a teacher himself, he knows what a teacher must never do. That to
write a note like that on a bad student's paper, to wrongly accuse another one, is to risk to
destroy a new beginning of that student.
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a neighbour un vecin
a member un membru
local local
to use a folosi
to call a chema, a numi
to fight a lupta
to believe a crede
correctly correct
among printre
to defend a apra
bravely brav
a soldier un soldat
fierce crncen
a battle o btlie
to liberate a elibera

to admit a admite
to defeat a nfrnge
anxiously cu nerbdare
to hand in a da, a nmna
a triumph triumph
an enemy un duman
to turn (to) a se transforma
a shock un oc
hate - ur
to kill a omor
to turn round a se ntoarce
to return a reveni
himself el nsi
to risk a risca
to destroy a destruge

125

GRAMMAR
PARTICIPLE II
Regular verbs form it adding ed (as in Past Indefinite Tense). Ex.: to discuss discussed
Irregular verbs have special forms:
to beat beaten
to begin begun
to bet bet
to break broken
to bring brought
to build built
to buy bought
to catch caught
to come - come
to choose chosen
to cut cut
to do done
to fall fallen
to feel felt
to find found
to get got

to give given
to go gone
to grow grown
to hear heard
to keep kept
to know known
to leave left
to let let
to lose lost
to make made
to mean meant
to meet met
to put put
to read read [red]
to retell retold
to see seen

to sell sold
to send sent
to set set
to shut shut
to sleep slept
to smell smelt
to speak spoken
to spend spent
to take taken
to teach taught
to think thought
to understand understood
to win won
to write written

PRESENT PERFECT TENSE FORM


Present Continuous Tense refers to an action that takes place at the time of speaking.
How do we form it?
Present Simple of the verb TO HAVE + PARTICIPLE II of the verb.
Affirmative Form
singular
I have spoken
You have spoken
He (She, It) has spoken

plural
We have spoken
You have spoken
They have spoken

Negative Form
singular
plural
I have not spoken
We have not spoken
You have not spoken
You have not spoken
He (She, It) has not spoken They have not spoken
Interrogative Form
singular
Have I spoken?
Have you spoken?
Has he (she, it) spoken?

plural
Have we spoken?
Have you spoken?
Have they spoken?
126

Adverbs used with this tense: never, ever, often, already, just, yet, lately, today,etc.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
1. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs. Translate them.
a) to study, to prepare, to repeat, to translate, to answer, to discuss, to receive, to ask, to wash, to
play, to pass, to pack, to recognize, to save, to reach, to invite, to stop, to describe, to perform, to
allow.
b) to read, to take, to do, to begin, to give, to see, to spend, to make, to tell, to show, to bring, to
leave, to forget, to meet, to understand, to build, to send, to pay, to sell, to buy, to hear, to sing, to
find, to know, to put, to drink, to hide.
2. Give the Participle II of the following verbs.
to go, to sit, to come, to become, to get, to be, to feel, to think, to swim, to lie, to die. to fall, to
grow, to drive, to rise, to set, to ring up, to run.
3. Translate.
a) from English.
a closed door, a saved man, written work, one of the discussed questions, a well-known writer, a
well-dressed woman, a well-prepared report.
b) into English.
un lucru vndut, a melodie (tune) uitat, o lecie dat, o carte necitit, o ntrebare discutat, un
copil salvat, o pies bine jucat, un brbat bine mbrcat.
4. Translate using Past Indefinite Tense or Present Perfect Tense.
1. Eu niciodat nu am fost n Alpi, dar am vzut multe alte locuri de munte. 2. Cnd ai fost la
mare? Am fost acolo cinci ani n urm. 3. Ce s fac? Am pierdut cheia de la apartament i nu
pot nimeri acas. 4. Nu pot gsi nicieri telegrama prietenului meu. Ea era n buzunarul
vestonului meu. Cred c am pierdut-o cnd am scos mnuile din buzunar.
5. Give the negative and interrogative forms of the following sentences.
1. They have looked for the book everywhere. 2. Her father has travelled much. 3. The boy has
hidden your book. 4. His wife has just returned from the sea. 5. They have invited many people
to take part in the performance. 6. Something has happened to Jane.
6. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. We have heard this gay song somewhere lately (1). 2. They have never been to any foreign
country (2). 3. We have already seen this new film (3). 4. His friend has translated two English
novels into Russian (3). 5. It happened to Nick several years ago (2). 6. Something
strange has happened to Pete (1).
7. Answer the following questions
a)

1.Have you travelled much?


2. Where have you travelled?
3. Have you ever travelled in the Alps?
127

4. Have you ever discussed any books by English novelists with your friends?
5. What books have you discussed?
6. How many English books have you read this year?
7. Have you not had breakfast yet?
8. Where have you had breakfast?
9. Where is Nick? Has he left London?
10. Why has John left his native village?
11. Have you prepared everything I asked you last time?
12. What have you (done) prepared for today?
b)

1. Have you ever been to the mountains?


2. When were you at the Black Sea?
3. How many English films have you seen this year?
4. When did you go to the cinema last (time)?
5. What new films have you seen this month?
6. Has your sister graduated from the university?
7. When did she graduate from the university?
8. Has your brother (sister) finished school?
9. How many examinations has he already passed?
10. Have you read today's newspaper already?
11. What article have you already read?
12. What kind of articles do you like best of all?

8. Use the verbs in brackets in the right tense form.


1. We (to come across) a very interesting article in this magazine. Let us discuss it together. 2. Is
everybody here? No, Pete (not to come) yet. I think he (not to return) from the village yet. 3.
You already (to ring up) your friend? No, I (not to ring him up) yet. I am very busy and
cannot do it now. 4. It is already late. The sun (to set). Let us go home. 5. Why you (not to turn
over) page ten yet? Everybody is already reading page eleven. 6. When your sister (to return)
from the sea? She (to return) from the sea yesterday. Why you (not to go) to the railway
station to meet her? I couldn't do it, I (to be) busy. 7. I (not to hear) anything from him for
many years. 8. What time you (to have breakfast) today? I (not to have) anything this morning.
Let's go to the restaurant together now. I am hungry. 9. "What you (to do) now?" George (to ask)
me over the telephone. "I just (to have) dinner and (to read) a newspaper," I (to answer).
9. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models.
a) I have never been to the Alps.
b) I haven't yet looked through this book. I haven't looked through this book yet.
) Have you ever traveled?
10. Continue the following sentences. Translate them.
1. Our friend has already
2. I have just
3. Have you ever

4. We have never
5. They haven't yet
6. I have often

11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses


a) 1. Soarele a rsrit deja i ne putem duce la ru. Brcile noastre sunt deja acolo. 2. De ce nu lai invitat pe John s ia parte la lucrul nostru? El cunoate bine acest obiect i poate s ne ajute.
128

3. Fiul surorii mele este foarte capabil. El are doar patru ani, dar deja s-a nvat s citeasc. 4.
De ce ai rmas acas? Medicul nc nu i-a permis s iei? 5. Eu tot nu am auzit niciodat aceast
povestire. De aceea eu cred c tot voi primi o mare plcere s o ascult. 6. Ce s-a ntmplat cu
Pete? De ce el nc nu a venit? 7. M bucur c el vi s-a alturat. Acum v va fi mai uor s
terminai acest lucru. 8. Cred c va trebui s rmnem aici pn la ora apte. 9. Unde sunt crile
mele? Numai ce le-am lsat aici. A fost cineva pe aici?
b) 1. Noi nc nu am trecut la apartament nou. Vom putea face aceasta doar dup ce acolo va fi
totul gata. 2. Eu am venit acas, am luat cina i am nceput s-mi fac leciile: am nvat lecia
nou i m-am uitat prin toate cele vechi. Dumneavoastr tot v-ai uitat prin toate leciile? 3. n
ultimul timp nu am cumprat nimic nou. 4. Cnd v-ai cumprat costumul dumneavoastr nou?
5. Ieri l-am vzut pe George, l-am strigat, el s-a uitat n direcia mea, dar nu m-a recunoscut. 6.
Cer scuze, nu v-am recunoscut deloc. 7. Nick nc nu mi-a povestit nimic despre conversaia sa
cu directorul. 8. n sfrit am ajuns n sat! a spus el. Acum vom putea s ne odihnim. 9. Am
ajuns n ora cnd era cu totul ntuneric, de aceea a trebuit s rmnem acolo pe noapte. 10. Ai
fcut multe greeli n aceast dictare. Va trebui s nvai mai bine toate cuvintele. 11. Cnd i-a
fcut el raportul? El l-a fcut sptmna trecut. Pcat c nu l-ai auzit. Raportul a fost foarte
interesant. 12. Niciodat nu am auzit un cntec aa de comic i vesel. Cine a scris cuvintele?
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
12. Read aloud.
little, battle, cattle, meddle, saddle, table, stable, fable, cycle, peddle, please, leave, leaf, boat,
seat, steep, deep, neat, clear, fear, member, letter, better, reader, fighter, blotter, behind, find,
kind, old, fold, told, fast, cast, task, mask.
13. Answer the following questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Is your neighbour an engineer or a doctor? (What is he?)
2. Who usually corrects your mistakes?
3. In what way do you correct your mistakes?
4. What must you do to write new English words correctly?
5. When do people call one another by their first names?
6. What do we call people who serve in the army?
7. Why do people fight one war against another? Why do they make war?
8. When do people defend their country from the enemy?
9. What soldiers must do to defeat the enemy?
13. When did the Civil War in the USA begin? When did it end?
14. Why do all the peoples of the world want peace?
15. What kind of people do we call brave?
16. Have you ever had a serious test paper?
17. Had you a test paper last week?
18. When did you have a test paper?
19. Have you ever seen a battle?
20. What other novelists do you know among the American writers?
21. Has your friend ever had any triumph in his life?
22. What the first shock in your life?
23. Whom did you hand in the essay yesterday?
24. Why do animals kill other animals?
25. When did your friend return from the mountains?
26. Have you ever worked with foreign delegations? :
129

14. Ask questions to the bold words and sentences.


1. Ann has not answered my questions correctly either (2). 2. I began to work at an office when
I graduated from the university (2). 3. I turned on the light because it was dark in the room
(1). 4. Yesterday we had a very difficult test paper (2). 5. Today I am paler than usual because I
feel rather bad (2). 6. Now many foreign people are travelling about our country (3). 7. We call
the people who live in England the English (1).
15. Insert the right article where necessary and retell the text.
____ following incident took place in ____ South of ____ England. Pete Stivenson, ____
fireman from ____ Manchester was spending his holiday at ____ rest-home on shore of ____
sea. That warm June night he was fast asleep in one of__most comfortable rooms of ____ resthome. Suddenly he heard ____ loud cries: ''Help, help!" He thought that it was ____ dream. He
opened his eyes and heard ____ cries again. It was clear now that somebody was crying for ____
help. When ____ young fireman ran out into ____ street, he saw that one of ____ houses was on
fire. ____ cries were coming from ____ fifth floor. " ____ Smiths are still in ____ house!" ____
woman's voice cried...
____ way to ____ window on ____ fifth floor seemed very long to Pete. At last he reached
____ window. He did not see anybody in ____ first room, but in ____ second one there was ____
old woman and ____ boy who were sitting in ____ corner and crying. Pete did not wait ____
second. He took ____ boy by the hand and they got out of ____ room together.
When ____ boy was on the ground, Pete returned to ____ house to save ____ old woman.
Soon ____ woman was out of ____ house too. ____ grandmother and ____ grandson wanted to
thank ____ brave fireman, but they could not see him anywhere.
____ next day Pete Stivenson left for Manchester. ____ month later he got ____ letter from
____ South. It was from ____ Smiths. All ____ family thanked Pete for his action.
16. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
1. Have you ever been _____ India? 2. My friend has never been _____ the Alps. 3. When I was
_____ Chiinu last time, I met _____ a friend of mine there whom I didn't recognize until he
came _____ _____ me and called me _____ my first name. 4. There are some very capable
young singers _____ my friends. Let's invite them _____ our party. I am sure they will sing
_____ us _____ great pleasure. 5. There is rather a high mountain _____ these two rivers. 6. Will
you turn _____ the radio? I'll try to fall asleep. 7. Turn _____ the light. I cannot make _____
anything here, it's too dark. 8. _____ my last holiday I travelled _____ the South our country. 9.
When the old woman heard the sad news she did not cry but kept silent _____ several hours. 10.
Why were you late _____ the theatre? I was waiting _____ you there _____ seven _____ eight
o'clock. 11. Turn _____ and look _____ this picture. I think it is one _____ the most beautiful
pictures here. 12. Now I am leaving___________the station. I want to see my friend off. will
be angry _____ me if I don't keep my word. 13. Can you ring me ___ ___ three o'clock? I
cannot speak _____ you now. I am very busy. 14. Our way lay _____ a forest. It was rather dark
and cold, but none _____ us wanted to turn _____. 15. Have you passed your examination _____
English? 16. What are you looking _____ here? I am looking _____ my hat. 17. I want to take
ice-cream _____ the sweet. 18. You haven't turned _____ the page, that's why you don't see
Exercise Six. 19. When I came _____ the room, my children were playing _____ the piano. 20.
Yesterday we went _____ an excursion to the museum. We examined all the exhibits _____ great
interest.

130

17. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given models. Use the following adjectives.
correct, gay, weak, happy, loud, dark, strong, cold, funny, simple, pale, light, heavy, noisy,
capable, popular, famous.
a) Pete has read louder today than usual.
b) This story is as long as that one.
c) Your magazine is not so interesting as mine.
d) Whose dictation is the best in your group?
e) This time you have given me an easier book to read.
18. Choose the necessary word from the brackets. Put it in the right form.
1. Don't (to hurry, to be in a hurry) we (still, else) have some time before the train starts. 2.
(Between, among) our economists there are many who graduated from big universities. 3. It was
rather dark and we couldn't make out anything on the opposite (bank, shore) of the river. 4. I
believe next year we shall go to the (bank, shore) of the Black Sea for our holiday. (None,
nobody) of us has ever been there. 5. (To say, to tell) us something about the famous City of
London. 6. When did the film (to finish, to end)? 7. I shall answer all your questions as soon as I
(to end, to finish) this work. 8. I shall never (to forget, to leave) my friends with whom I studied
at school. 9. Can you give me the magazine I asked you for? I am sorry I (to forget, to leave)
it at home. I shall (to take, to bring) it tomorrow. 10. We all know very well the things you are
speaking about. Can't you (to tell, to speak) us anything (else, more)? 11. He was so tired that he
could (hard, hardly) (to speak, to say). 12. If you work at your English (hardly, hard), you will be
able to speak this language well in a year or two. 13. You have made (little, few) mistakes in
your homework. Almost all the sentences are (right, correct). 14. I believe Nick is quite (right,
correct). 15. I haven't watched TV since Sunday because I've felt very (bad, badly) all this time.
16. There are (many, much) good students (among, between) us. 17. There is a beautiful lake
(among, between) these two villages. 18. When the lecture (to finish, to be over) the students
asked the professor many questions. 19. I have never been to New York. My friend hasn't been
there (also, either). 20. Did you take part in this show (too, either)?
19. Make 10 sentences in Present Perfect Tense using the words from below.
to correct, a neighbour, pale, a soldier, to keep, a delegation, at the lesson, among, ever, never,
lately, to believe.
20. Give antonyms.
a healthy man, strong, thick, wrong, war, to be born, always, behind, light, a strange town, to be
free, to be well.
21. Make sentences with each of the following verbs.
to turn over, to turn off, to turn on, to turn round, to turn back, to turn to sb. for sth.
14. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.
to tell, to fight, to correct, to spend, to begin, to feel, to lie, to do, to leave, to think, to bring, to
know, to keep, to build, to sing, to die, to fall ill.
131

20. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.


1. Deja i-ai vzut pe vecinii notri noi? Ei nu demult s-au mutat aici din Chiinu. 2. Cine cnt
la pian? Fiul vecinilor notri. 3. Deja ai verificat traducerea mea? Da. n ea nu sunt deloc
greeli. Ai fcut-o foarte bine. 4. Eu nc nu am vorbit cu John, dar cred c el va nelege c nu
are dreptate. 5. Aceast carte descrie timpul cnd toat lumea lupta brav mpotriva rului. 6. Ce
s-a ntmplat cu dumneavoastr? Suntei foarte palid. V-ai mbolnvit? 7. Printre membrii
delegaiei care a venit la noi ieri, erau civa jurnaliti americani. 8. Eu nc nu am controlat
caietele voastre. ndat ce le voi controla, eu voi putea s v explic greelile. 9. Ai citit deja
romanul lui London Col alb? Da. Am primit o mare plcere de la aceast carte. 10. Ai
intrat deja la universitate? Ce vrst avei? Artai foarte tnr. Da, eu sunt deja student. Eu am
intrat la universitate la aptesprezece ani. 11. Cred c nu s-a ntmplat nimic cu el. El, pur i
simplu, nu a putut s urce n autobuz. Acum la staie este foarte mult lume. 12. Fiul s-a ntors i
i-a spus mamei: Dac cu mine se va ntmpla ceva, eu te voi anuna. 13. Aceasta s-a ntmplat
cnd noi nvam la coal..., a nceput el. 14. Ce s-a ntmplat cu dumneavoastr? De ce tcei?
Continuai-v povestirea! 15. S-a ntmplat ceva cu el? De ce nu s-a inut e cuvnt? 16. Cine n
camera aceea cnt aa bine la pian? Acesta este aparatul de radio. Eu numai ce l-am conectat.
17. Oprii, v rog, gazul, dac ai pregtit deja prnzul. n buctrie este prea cald. 18. Cred c
va trebui s ne ntoarcem napoi. Noi nu vom putea s ajungem pn la satul cel mai apropiat
pn se va ntuneca, a spus unul dintre cltori. 19. Rugai-l pe vecinul dumneavoastr s nu
porneasc acum radioul. Eu vreau s m odihnesc puin.
21. Make an essay on the topic: My First Excursion about a Foreign Country. Use the words
given below.
a friend of mine, to travel, never, either, among the members, a group, sea, a tourist, different, to
turn round, to be afraid, part, to meet, to tell sb. not to do sth., to enjoy, mountains, beautiful, to
swim, to stay.

132

LESSON NINETEEN (THE NINETEENTH LESSON)


GLAD THEY DECIDED NOT OT CHOOSE IT
A young man who earned his living as a drummer in a band, married, and he and his wife
were looking for somewhere to live. They saw a lot of places, but there was always something
that one of them did not like about the places. They could not make up their mind. At last, they
found a house which both of them really liked. But they could not decide what to take: a flat at
ground-floor or one of the upstairs ones.
At last they decided to take the upstairs one not too low down and especially not too high
up and moved in. After they had bought furniture, carpets and all other things they needed to
set up the house, they wanted to give their big party to celebrate their setting like an
anniversary.
It was a fine spring day. The sun was shining brightly, the trees were in blossom, the birds
were singing. At five oclock sharp the first guests came. Then their parents arrived with other
former colleagues. The young couple introduced them to the other guests. It was a pleasant and
a noisy party, as all the young mans friends from the band came and played their instruments.
The house was full of guests. There were no more than a hundred people there. They joked,
danced and sang. After a time the telephone rang. The young mans wife went into the hall to
answer it. Then she came back with a happy smile on her face and said to her husband, That
was the man who has just moved into the flat that is under our flat. I am so glad we decided not
to choose it. He says it is terribly noisy down there. The latter smiled too. Since then they gave
many parties and each time they are glad they decided not to choose the flat under.
DIALOGUES
On New Year's Eve
Mary. Hallo, Ann! Glad to meet you. I haven't seen u for ages. Where have you been all this
time?
Ann. I've just come back from London.
Mary. Oh, I see. Where are you going to see the New Year in?
Arm. I haven't thought of it yet. And what about you?
Mary. I've invited a few friends to my place. You will join us, won't you?
Ann. With great pleasure, thank you.
Mary. Can you bring your elder brother with you?
Ann. Sure, I can.
At Table
Mary. Help yourself to some more cake.
Ann. No, thank you, I've had quite enough. I'd like another cup of tea.
Mary. Shall I bring you a cup of tea too, Peter?
Peter. No, thank you. I don't want any more tea. Let's have a dance!

133

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a drummer un toboar
a band o trup
to make up ones mind a se hotr
both of them ambii
upstairs la etaj, sus
especially mai ales, special
to set up a aranja
a party o serat
to celebrate - a celebra, a srbtori
an anniversary o aniversare
sharp fix, precis
a guest un oaspete
former anterior, dinainte

pleasant - plcut
no more nu mai mult (cantitate)
no longer nu mai mult (timp)
a hundred o sut
to joke a glumi
to dance a dansa
under sub
since de atunci, de cnd
for ages de o venicie
for years de ani de zile
to see the New Year in a ntlni Anul Nou
elder mai mare
any more nu mai mult

Word Formation
-ness [nis] this suffix forms nouns from adjectives:
happy happiness
greedy greediness
green greenness

GRAMMAR
DEGREES OF COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
1. One and two syllable adjectives form the degrees of comparison adding er (for
Comparative) and the est (for Superlative)
Positive
quiet
young
tall
fat
thin
noisy
pretty

Comparative
quieter
younger
taller
fatter
thinner
noisier
prettier

Ex.: This boy is quieter than that one.


My sister is the youngest from our family.

134

Superlative
the quietest
the youngest
the tallest
the fattest
the thinnest
the noisiest
the prettiest

2. Adjectives that have more than two syllables form the degrees of comparison by using
more (for Comparative) and the most (for Superlative)
Positive
expensive
wonderful
exciting
beautiful
comfortable

Comparative
more expensive
more wonderful
more exciting
more beautiful
more comfortable

Superlative
the most expensive
the most wonderful
the most exciting
the most beautiful
the most comfortable

Ex.: My book is more expensive than his.


This city is the most beautiful in the world.
3. Adjectives with two forms:
Positive
far
old
near
late

Comparative
farther, further
older, elder
nearer
later, latter

Superlative
the farthest, the furthest
the oldest, the eldest
the nearest, the next
the latest, the last

Ex.: Our office is farther than yours.


You will receive further information tomorrow.
My elder sister is five years older than me.
My eldest brother is 30.
What is the nearest station?
Are you getting off at the next station?
What is the latest news?
When does the last train start?
4. Exceptions:
Positive
good
bad
much, many
little

Comparative
better
worse
more
less
GRAMMAR EXERCISES

1. Write by five sentences with each example.


a) I haven't seen you since 1999.
b) I haven't seen you since you left Bli.
c) My friend left our country in 2002. We haven't met since.
d) We haven't heard from Pete for many years.
135

Superlative
the best
the worst
the most
the least

2. Continue the following sentences.


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

My friend has not visited me since


Our neighbour has learned three foreign languages since
I have not been to the Carpathians since
I have known Gabriel since
Have you been to London since

3. Answer the questions.


1. Have you ever met your old friends since you graduated from the university?
2. How many times have you visited your native town since you left it?
3. How many new films have you seen since the first of September?
4. How many new English words have you learned since you began to study the language?
5. How many months have passed since your holiday?
6. Which of our students has been to London since the end of our studies?
7. Has our town greatly changed since we got independence?
4. Translate
1. Nu l-am vzut pe prietenul meu de cnd am terminat universitatea. 2. Fratele meu nu a fost la
teatru din toamn. 3. Noi nu l-am ntlnit pe Tom de cnd ne-am odihnit mpreun n vacan la
mare. 4. Cte cri engleze ai citit de cnd ai nceput s studiai limba englez? 5. Acest actor
nu a luat parte la nici o reprezentare din primvara trecut. 6. Fratele meu a nvat s citeasc
anul trecut, i de atunci a citit multe cri pentru copii. 7. Eu nu am primit nici o scrisoare de la
prietenii mei din 15 august. 8. Sora mea a frecventat zece lecii de literatur de cnd a nceput s
studieze acest obiect. 9. Acest scriitor nu a scris nimic nou din anul 1995. 10. Suntei foarte palid.
Nu v-ai odihnit de diminea! 11. Eu nu l-am vzut pe Pete de trei ani. Acum el nu vine deloc
aici. 12. Cte lucruri interesante ei au vzut de cnd au nceput s cltoreasc! 13. El nu a privit
nici un film nou de luna trecut. 14. Eu nu le-am scris nimic de anul trecut. 15. Ce muzee ai mai
vizitat de cnd am fost mpreun n muzeul cela?
5. Choose the right word.
1. My (older, elder) brother took part in many interesting activities when he was a student. 2. My
sister's husband is five years (elder, older) than mine. 3. We have not read the (last, latest) novel
by this writer yet. 4. Have you already heard the (last, latest) news? 5. I didn't hear the (last,
latest) word. Repeat it, please. 6. I have two brothers: Paul and Peter. The (first, former) is an
officer and the (last, latter) is an engineer. 7. I like the (first, former) novel by this writer best of
all. 8. My parents live in the (next, nearest) village. 9. We shall discuss your mistakes at the
(nearest, next) lesson. 10. Peter told his friend to bring him his notes, but the (last, latter) forgot
all about it.
VOCABULARY EXERCISES
6. Read aloud.
guest, guard, guess, guide, guilt, guise, gull, gun, guy, gypsy, greet, grass, grade, glove, glory,
gem, gap, gay; cent, cast, icy, civil, curb, tact, lack.

136

7. Answer the questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.


1. Which of our holidays do you like best of all?
2. How many times a year do we usually go to the party?
3. Which anniversary shall we celebrate this year?
4. When do we celebrate International Women's Day?
5. When does the sun usually shine brightly?
6. In what season are the trees usually in blossom?
7. What time is the canteen at the office usually full of people?
8. What synonym to the word to decide do you know? Use it in a sentence of your own.
9. What kind of books do you usually read with pleasure?
10. In what year did you enter the university?
11. What do we usually say when we introduce someone?
12. Do you usually invite many guests to your birthday party?
13. What do we usually wish people at their birthday party? (on New Year's Eve?)
14. When do people usually laugh, joke, dance, and sing?
15. Which of you can dance well?
16. What can you say if you do not want any more ice-cream?
17. Have you any elder brother or sister?
18. Are your brothers and sisters older or younger than you?
8. Ask questions to the bold words.
1. My sister entered the university two years ago (2). 2. There were many guests in Chiinu on
the 27th of August (1). 3. When we entered the room, all the guests were already sitting at
table (3). 4. I shall introduce you to my old friends (3). 5. My brother was at school during
his childhood (4). 6. It is pleasant to walk in this forest (1). 7. I have never seen the New Year
in with the Browns (2). 8. The teacher has already introduced all the new words of Lesson 20
(2).
9. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
____ New Year's Eve ____ eleven o'clock ____ the evening, when I was sitting ____ my diningroom and waiting ____ my wife who was busy ____ the kitchen, there came a knock ____ the
door. I hurried ____ the door, opened it and saw a man forty. The man was smiling and saying
nothing. "I am sorry," I said. "It seems ____ me we've never met before." The stranger pleasantly
smiled and called me ____ my first name. "I've come to wish you a Happy New Year", he
continued. ____ the way, where is your wife ? Will you introduce me ____ her?" I felt I was
getting angry ____ him. Was he joking ____ me? ____ that moment my wife appeared ____ the
kitchen. "Oh, Nick!" she cried ____ as soon as she saw our guest. "How nice of you ... We are so
very glad". Then she turned ____ me and said, "What's the matter ____ you? Why don't you ask
Nick to take ____ his coat and hat? Why don't you invite him ____ table? I am sure you will see
the New Year ___ ____ us", she said ____ him. Only then did I recognize our guest. He was an
old friend ____ ours, Nick White ____ name. ____ our childhood we lived in the same town,
then he moved ____ some other town. I never met him later.
"Nick, dear", I said, "You have changed so greatly ____ the time we met last time that I can
hardly believe it's you! I am very glad you have come!" Soon we were all sitting table. It was
one ____ the most pleasant New Year parties ____ my life, though there were only three of us.

137

10. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.


to say, to tell, to begin, to sit, to feel, to fall, to think, to know, to become, to forget, to lie, to get,
to have, to fight, to die, to stop, to teach, to buy, to sell, to keep, to make, to rise.
11. Write with letters.
126; 253; 677; 1,273; 7,621; 3,675,232; 135; 365; 738; 812.
12. Use the appropriate word from the list below in the right form.
(by the way, to dance, especially, to enter, to introduce, pleasant, angry, full, sharp, to joke,
pleasure, any longer)
1. It is very ________ to be near the river ________ when it is hot. 2. Let's invite Pete to our
party too. I am sure he will join us with great ________.3. Don't ________ the room. One of our
students is taking his examination there. 4. Oh, I am sorry, I forgot ________ you to my old
friend. ________, he will also work at our office this year. 5. When did you ________ the
university? 6. I can't understand you at all. Are you ________? You are speaking about serious
matters and laughing. 7. What is the matter? The street is ________ of people. 8. If you don't
come here at eleven o'clock ________, you will be late. We shall not be able to wait for you
________. 9. I am sorry I have left your book at home. Please, don't be ________ with me. I
shall bring it tomorrow. 10. I am afraid I shall not be able ________, I haven't ________ since
our last party at the university.
13. Make sentences using the words and expressions given below.
to joke at sb., in blossom, to be full of sth., to make up one's mind, sharp, elder, the former... and
the latter, a tree, a thousand, for ages, to see the New Year in, with pleasure, to dance, to enter.
14. Write by five sentences with each example.
a)
b)
c)
d)

We cannot dance any longer.


The Smiths no longer live in London.
I cannot eat any more ice-cream. (I cannot eat ice-cream any more).
There will be no more new films this year.

15. Translate paying attention to:


) the use of it.
1. Se ntunec. Degrab va ploua. Grbii-v. 2. Privii prin fereastr. Ninge? Da. Foarte
puternic. 3. n acest anotimp aici des plou? Da, foarte des. 4. Va ploua. S ne ntoarcem acas.
5. Cnd ninge mie mi place s m plimb pe strzile oraului nostru. 6. Dac va ploua noi vom
rmne acas. 7. Ploua cnd v-ai pornit la gar? 8. Cnd a plouat aici? 9. Cnd plou este plcut
s stai ntr-o camer cald i s citeti o carte. 10. mi este greu s v recunosc. Artai foarte ru.
Suntei bolnav? 11. V este straniu s auzii aa cuvinte? 12. Astzi este foarte frig. Poate
degrab va ploua. mbrcai-v vestonul. 13. n camera dumneavoastr e cald? O, da. La mine
n camer este chiar foarte cald. 14. Cnd de obicei aici se ntunec n decembrie? n
decembrie aici se ntunec foarte devreme. 15. Cnd va ncepe s plou noi vom fi deja acas
dac ne vom grbi acum.

138

b) the use of more.


1. Cine nc vrea s ia parte la excursie? 2. Ce lecii ai mai frecventat deja? 3. Cnd el a intrat n
camer, oaspeii mai dansau nc. 4. Cine nc a mai intrat la universitate anul trecut? 5. La
excursia noastr s-au mai alturat nc cinci oameni. 6. nc ce srbtoare v mai place? 7. Eu
nc nu v-am prezentat toi oaspeii mei. 8. Acum eu v voi cnta nc un cntec, a spus
cntreul. 9. Eu l-am vzut fix la ora nou. El nc mai lucra. 10. Fiul meu nc nu a intrat la
universitate. El nc nva la coal. 11. Dai-mi, v rog, nc o farfurie de sup. 12. Mai dai-mi
nite sup, v rog. 13. Pe cine nc mai dorii d-l invitai la ziua dumneavoastr de natere?
16. Choose the necessary verb and put it in the right tense form.
1. Who (to tell, to speak) you this story? 2. Whom you (to say, to talk) to when I entered the
room and went up to you? 3. Why are you silent? Can't you (to say, to tell) anything? 4. My
friend's daughter (to speak, to say) that she has read some interesting English novels lately. 5.
You won't be able (to tell, to speak) English at all if you do not learn grammar rules. 6. I did not
understand the last word, (to say, to tell) it again, please. 7. Our grandfather likes (to tell, to say)
us funny stories. 8. Who else (to speak, to tell) at the celebration meeting yesterday? 9. My
mother (to say, to speak) that her childhood was very hard. 10. Who (to say, to tell) you about our
excursion? 11. I haven't seen Nick today, I (to tell, to speak) to him tomorrow. 12. We haven't
seen this film yet. When we see it, we (to say, to tell) you what kind of film it is. 13. Who (to say,
to talk,) over there? Keep silent. I shall not repeat this sentence any more. 14. (to speak, to say) it
in English! (Not to speak, to say) Romanian at your English lesson. 15. Don't you want (to tell,
to speak) to me? Don't you want (to tell, to speak) me what has happened to you? Are we no
longer friends?
17. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. Unde vei fi la nti aprilie? Intenionez s plec la Londra. Nu am fost niciodat acolo i
vreau s vd acest ora, mai ales n zilele de srbtoare. 2. Unde vei ntlni Anul Nou? Am de
gnd s ntlnesc Anul Nou la familia Smith. 3. Nu ai fost la noi de anul trecut i nc nu ai
vzut grdina noastr. Venii s o vedei. Acum ea e plin cu flori. Acolo este foarte plcut s te
plimbi. Cu plcere. Pot s-l iau cu mine pe fiul mai mare? Desigur. Vom fi foarte bucuroi. 4.
camera dumneavoastr arat ca o bibliotec. Ea este plin de diferite cri i reviste. 5. Cine
dintre studenii notri va merge la aceast prelegere? Toi n afar de Nick. El trebuie s rmn
la bibliotec. 6. Prelegerea ntr-adevr se ncepe fix la ora unu? Da. Nu ntrziai. 7. M
scuzai, eu nc nu v-am prezentat soiei mele. 8. Cnd ai intrat la universitate? n anul 1998.
Dar cnd ai absolvit-o? n anul 2003. Ai mai ntlnit pe cineva dintre studenii notri de
atunci? 9. Cineva dintre oaspeii dumneavoastr cnt la pian? S dansm puin. 10. Nu v-am
vzut de o venicie, dar artai la fel de tnr ca i zece ani n urm. 11. Dac v vei hotr s
mergei la cinema desear, telefonai-ne, noi ne vom altura dumneavoastr cu plcere. 12. De ce
nu mai dansai? Nu mai pot dansa. 13. De ce nu ai mbrcat vestonul? Azi este un timp aa de
ru! Cnd ieeam din cas nu ploua. Soarele strlucea i era destul de cald. 14. Fratele meu mai
mare nc nu a absolvit universitatea, dar el este n ultimul an, iar cel mai mic nva la coal.
15. Ce aniversare a independenei o vom srbtori anul acesta? 16. Nu putem s-l mai ateptm
pe Sam. Este deja prea trziu, i ne va fi foarte greu s ajungem acas. 17. Aceasta este cea mai
frumoas pasre pe care am vzut-o vreodat.
18. Translate and retell the following text.
Odat o englezoaic bogat, pe care o chema doamna Johnson, a hotrt s-i srbtoreasc
ziua de natere ct mai vesel. Ea a invitat muli oaspei i pe un cntre bun. Cntreul era
139

srac, dar avea o voce foarte bun. La ora ase fix cntreul a venit la casa doamnei Johnson.
Cnd a intrat, sala era plin de oaspei, care stteau la o mare mas n centrul slii.
Oaspeii mncau, glumeau, rdeau i vorbeau tare. Cntreul el i-a salutat i era gata s li se
alture, dar doamna Johnson a spus urmtoarele:
Suntem bucuroi, domnule, c ai venit. Vei cnta dup ce se va termina masa. Eu v voi
chema, cnd vom fi gata s v ascultm. i acum mergei la buctrie i luai masa.
Cntreul s-a suprat foarte tare, dar nu a spus nimic i a ieit din sal. El a vrut s plece din
casa doamnei Johnson, dar mai apoi a hotrt s rmn i s le dea oaspeilor ei bogai o lecie
bun. Cnd cntreul a aprut la buctrie, servitorii luau masa. Cntreul a mncat mpreun
cu ei trei feluri de mncare, le-a mulumit tuturor i a spus: Iar acum eu voi cnta pentru voi...
El a nceput s cnte i a cntat multe cntece frumoase. n curnd doamna Johnson l-a chemat
pe cntre n sal.
Ei, domnule, noi suntem gata.
Suntei gata? a ntrebat cntreul. i ce suntei gata s facei?
S v ascultm. a spus doamna Johnson cu voce suprat.
S m ascultai? Dar eu deja am cntat. Nu voi mai putea cnta astzi.
Unde ai cntat? a ntrebat ea i mai suprat.
La buctrie. Eu ntotdeauna cnt pentru cei cu care iau masa.
19. Write an essay on the topic: At My Friend's Birthday Party. Use the words given below
to invite, holiday, a party, to spend, a birthday party, to have a good time, to enjoy, dinner,
sweets, to buy, flowers, guests, to introduce, to play the piano, to sing, loudly, to dance, to knock,
to appear, to enter, forks, knives, spoons, a table-cloth, ice-cream, pleasant, especially.

140

LESSON TWENTY (THE TWENTIETH LESSON)


RED HAND LINE
We came to the port early in the morning.
"Do you want to see the port?" John White asked me. "Of coarse, I do," I answered. "Then
let's begin with the ships. Look at their emblems!"
I examined the emblems with great interest. I saw different stars and letters, flags, and golden
keys...
Suddenly I noticed a very strange emblem. We stopped in front of it to examine it better. It
was a picture of a cut-off hand. "It's the emblem of the British Company Red Hand Line," John
said. "There is a legend that explains the origin of this terrible emblem. I can tell you this
legend if you like".
"Certainly," I answered. "It must be very interesting!"
"It happened very long ago," John began. "There lived an old ship-owner in England. Once
he fell ill. He called his two sons and said, I feel that I shall soon die. I am not rich. I can leave
you only one ship, but it must belong to only one of you. If you own it together, you won't be
able to live in peace. Listen to me! You will have to go to the seashore, jump into the water and
swim towards the ship. As soon as one of you touches its side with his hand, he will become its
owner!
The two brothers went to the shore and jumped into the water. When the ship was already
near, the elder brother got tired and could no longer swim quickly. The younger brother was
already reaching the ship. His brother saw this and a wild idea came to his mind. With a quick
movement of his right hand he drew out his knife, cut off his left hand and threw it in the
direction of the ship! His hand fell on the deck and a few moments later the sailors, lifted him on
board and greeted him.
While the sailors were dressing his wound, he looked terribly pale, his lips hardly moved,
but one could see triumph in his eyes and make out the words: I've done it! I've done it! I am its
owner!'
For a while all those on board the ship forgot about the younger brother who was still down
in the sea. He was so tired that he could not swim any longer.
'Let me have a rest on board the ship!' he cried out.
'No,' answered his brother. 'You cannot have a rest on board my ship! I am its owner and I
shall own it alone!'
'I don't want anything!' the younger brother continued. 'I am tired, help me, I shan't be able to
get back if I don't have a rest!'
'No,' repeated his brother. 'I don't want you on board my ship'.
The younger brother had nothing to do but turn back. It became more and more difficult for
him to swim and soon his head disappeared under the water...
The elder brother became rich. He bought many ships and made a picture of a cut-off hand
the emblem of his company."
John thought a little and added, "This story isn't true of course, but it shows what greediness
does to people."

141

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

of coarse desigur
a flag un drapel
a key o cheie
to notice a observa
cut-off tiat
a company o companie
a legend o legend
an origin o origine
terrible teribil
to belong a aparine
to jump a sri
toward(s) spre
to touch a atinge
a side o parte

a hand o mn
to get tired a obosi
wild slbatec
to draw out a scoate
to throw a arunca
to lift a ridica
on board la bord
a wound o ran
to dress ones wound a pansa rana
a lip o buz
for a while pentru puin timp
to add a aduga
true adevrat

Word Formation
dis- [dis] this prefix is used to form antonyms:
to appear to disappear
to continue to discontinue
appearance disappearance

VOCABULARY EXERCISES
1. Read aloud.
draw, saw, law, paw, pawn, lawn, dawn.
find, kind, old, fold, cold, bay, explain, faint, stall, late, fix, lest, 'suburbs, fuse, tube, cat, cub,
bulk, wrong, sight, bloom, cape, slack, seat, rice, cot, noun, whale, fare, stern, wring, knock,
mile, switch.
2. Answer the questions using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. When can one see many tricolor flags on the houses of our town?
2. When can't one get into one's own flat?
3. What do you like better: to see off or to meet your friends?
4. What kind of story do we call a legend?
5. What legendary heroes of our country do you know?
6. Why can't you read any English books in the original yet?
7. Whom do universities in our country belong to?
8. What synonym to the word combination in the direction of sth. do you know?
9. What does one usually do if one is tired?
10. What kind of animals do we call wild?
11. What kind of things are difficult to lift?
12. Why is it sometimes difficult to cut bread or other things with a knife?
13. Have you ever travelled on board a ship (a plane)? When was it?
14. Do you know how to dress a wound?
142

15. What kind of friends do we call true?


16. Why does one like people who always tell the truth?
3. Use the appropriate word from the list below in the right form.
(a line, to get tired, to lift, to throw, legendary, in triumph, to belong, to dress, a key, true, to be
tired, a legend, in the original, to tell the truth.)
1. Uncle Sam is a _______ hero of the Civil War. 2. If one owns a thing (is the owner of a thing),
we say this things _______ to him. 3. After an army defeats its enemy, it returns home _______.
4. I have lost the _______ to my flat and cannot get into it now. 5. Is it a _______ story or
_______? 6. I am sure this man _______, I believe every word of his. 7. We shall be able to read
books by English and American writers _______ when we know enough English words to
understand these books well. 8. Your wound in the leg is rather bad. You must _______ it as soon
as possible. 9. Don't _______ these boxes alone. They are too heavy. You will soon _______. 10.
"Why are you___________________ stones at the birds? Don't you know that they are our
friends?", a young man said to the boys. 11. I hope you'll write me a few _______. I'll be very
glad to have a word from you. 12. I am sorry, I cannot go for a walk now. I _______ very
_______ and must have a rest.
4. Choose the necessary word and put it in the right form.
1. I am terribly sorry I quite (to forget, to leave) this legend. I only remember that it is very
beautiful. 2. Don't (to forget, to leave) your key behind. There won't be anybody at home to open
the door for you when you return. 3. The old ship owner (to speak, to say) to his two sons and (to
speak, to say) that the ship must belong to only one of them. 4. (To say, to tell) us this: Do you
intend (to touch, to touch upon) many questions in your report? 5. We heard a shot and went
(towards, in the direction of) the sound. 6. I am afraid you won't be able to find the book you are
looking for (among, between) these books. 7. These books belong to my (older, elder) sister. 8.
Your report was rather poor. You didn't speak about our work (quite, at all). You didn't touch
upon other important questions (also, either). 9. George (to say, to tell) his young friend a legend
that explained the (origin, original) of the Red Hand Line emblem. 10. Is it (true, truth) that Mary
has fallen ill? 11. There are very (few, little) stars in the sky now! 12. Did Professor Spenser
(to say, to tell) anything new in his report yesterday? Oh, yes, he touched upon (few, a few)
very interesting questions. 13. I think we'll have to ask someone to give us a lift. We have very
(few, little) time left before the train starts off. 14. To tell you the truth, I am (little, a little) tired.
15. Everybody has already gone on board (besides, except) Smith and Brown. 16. Is there
another doctor on board the ship (besides, except) you?
5. Give the four basic forms of the following verbs.
to cut, to throw, to draw out, to do, to cry, to swim, to become, to touch, to teach, to buy, to
begin, to see off, to stop, to know, to fall, to add, to get tired, to die, to lie.
6. Insert the right preposition or adverb where necessary.
1. Will you give me the key ____ this book-case? I want to read David Copperfield ____
Dickens ____ the original. 2. I shan't touch ____ this subject. Everybody already knows all ____
it. 3. Don't touch ____ this knife. It is very sharp. 4. Mary introduced me her family when we
were ____ board ____ the car last summer. 5. Is there anything I can do ____ you? Thank
you, I feel better now. Leave me alone ____ a while. I'll try to sleep. 6. The children jumped
____ joy when they saw their mother. 7. I have nothing to add ____ what you have already said.
143

8. When you go ____ the university, put ____ your coat. The weather is rather bad today. 9. I am
sorry, I cannot take ____ my coat. I feel rather bad today and I am not at all hot. 10. When will
you start ____ the station? I want to see you ____. 11. I have never read this book, but I think I
shall read it ____ great interest, because I like books ____ this subject. 12. ____ our house there
is a small beautiful garden, where we often have a rest. 13. Whom did this building belong ____
before 1998? 14. What is the matter? Why hasn't our mother come back yet? Has anything
happened ____ her? 15. Pete, will you be able to explain this rule ____ Michael? 16. Please,
don't be angry ____ me; I am sorry, but I have left your book ____ home. 17. Wait ____ me here,
please. I'll be back ____ a minute. 18. Where will you see the New Year ____?
7. Insert the right article where necessary.
Long, long ago there lived ____ rich king. His name was ____ Midas. He was ____ greedy
man and liked ____ gold very much. One day he asked the gods of ____ Greece to give him
more gold. ____ gods decided to punish him and said: "Very well; in ____ morning anything that
you touch with your hand will become ____ gold". ____ Midas was very happy when he heard
this. "I shall be ____ richest man in ____ world", he thought.
When he got up early ____ next morning and touched his bed, it became ____ gold. He
began to dress, and his clothes became ____ gold too. Midas loved ____ flowers very much, and
he had ____ beautiful garden. Before ____ breakfast he went out into ____ garden to have ____
look at his flowers. ____ day was fine, ____ sun was shining brightly in ____ blue sky, ____
trees were in ____ blossom and ____ flowers looked beautiful. ____ king took one of ____
flowers, but it became ____ gold in his hand. He was sorry that ____ flowers changed as soon
as he touched them. ____ king went to have ____ breakfast. He took ____ cup of ____ sweet
milk, but ____ milk became ____ gold at once. Then he took ____ piece of ____ bread, and
____ bread also became ____ gold. Midas now felt unhappy. It was good to be ____ richest
man in ____ world, but he was hungry, and he could not eat ____ gold.
Midas went out into ____ garden again. His little daughter was playing there. When she saw
her father, she ran up to him. Midas kissed his daughter and ____ little girl became ____ gold
statue.
Midas was very unhappy now. His eyes were full of ____ tears, but ____ tears also became
____ gold. He asked ____ gods to take away this "Golden Touch". "It was very foolish to love
____ gold so much," he said. "Take all my gold and give me back my daughter." "Go," said ____
gods, "and wash your hands in ____ river which is near your garden, and ____ water will take
away ____ "Golden Touch".
Midas went to ____ river and washed his hands in it. Then he quickly ran up to ____ gold
statue of his little daughter and kissed her again. She at once changed back into ____ beautiful
little girl. Midas cried with ____ joy. He never forgot this lesson. He knew that ____ gold did not
give ____ happiness.
8. Make sentences using the given words.
to add, a legendary hero, in triumph, side by side, to throw, a flag, a key, to explain, to notice, to
belong, to be (to get) tired, to jump, to see off, true, to have a rest, to cut off, in the original, on
board the ship, in the company of ..., for a while.
9. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. voi fi bucuros, dac mi vei scrie cteva rnduri, cnd voi fi n muni. 2. Tom numai ce a ieit
din camer. Ateptai o clip. Nu punei receptorul, l voi chema. 3. De ce pe strzi sunt aa de
muli oameni? 4. Privete ce multe stele sunt pe cer! Noaptea va fi frig. 5. Nu ai vzut cheia de la
camera mea? Mi se pare c am pierdut-o pe undeva. Acum nu voi putea intra n apartament pn
144

cnd sora mea nu va veni acas. 6. Privete acest tablou. Oare nu observi n el nimic straniu? 7.
Voi putea tia pine dac mi vei da un cuit mare i ascuit, a spus pasagerul vecinului su. 8.
Ultima zi nainte de plecare eu am petrecut-o n compania prietenilor mei, care au venit s m
petreac. 9. Oare nu tii originea acestei legende interesante? S v-o povestesc acum. 10. Ai
citit ceva cri engleze n original n ultimul timp? 11. Al cui copil sare acolo? Oprii-l imediat, el
poate s cad i s-i rup piciorul. 12. Ce gnd slbatic! 13. Cnd se va mplini visul meu i eu
voi deveni economist, eu voi lucra n oficiul meu. 14. Nu ai atins deloc acest subiect n raportul
dumneavoastr. 15. La drept vorbind, nu sunt deloc obosit. Eu tot nu am obosit. S mai
traducem nc un articol. 16. Nu ateptai plecarea vaporului, mergei acas. tim c v ateapt
sora. Eu mai am nc puin timp. Voi pleca acas ndat ce vei urca pe vapor. 17. De ce nu
dorii s adugai nimic la povestirea mea? Nu am ce aduga. Ai spus deja totul. 18. Este
adevrat c a trebuit s citii cteva cri engleze n original pentru a face raportul
dumneavoastr? 19. La drept vorbind, acest articol nu este aa de greu ca i cel pe care l-am
tradus la lecia trecut. Nu tiu de ce am fcut aa de multe greeli n traducerea mea. 20. Era
foarte ntuneric i frig i plou puternic cnd am ajuns n sat. 21. Eu cred c toate aceste ntrebri
trebuiesc atinse la adunarea noastr. 22. Vino fix la ora apte. Eu te voi atepta acolo, mi-a
spus fratele mai mare. 23. Nu tiu de ce am obosit aa de tare astzi. 24. Cu toate c aceasta este
o carte veche, eu am citit-o cu mare plcere.
10. Read, translate and retell the following text.
George, Harris and I were spending our holiday in a boat on the river. Once I woke up at six
o'clock in the morning and decided to have a swim. But it was very cold, therefore I decided to
wash only my hands and face. I touched the water with my hand, but it was very cold, and I
decided not to wash at all. When I turned round to get into the boat, I suddenly fell into the river.
"Look, George, Jerome is swimming," Harris cried. "I did not know that he was so brave,"
George answered. "Is the water warm?" Harris asked me. "Rather!" I answered, "Why don't you
take a swim with me? Jump into the water!"
But George and Harris did not want to jump into the water at all. I was very cold when I got
into the boat and began to dress. I took a shirt and hurried to put it on. But as I was in a hurry, the
shirt fell into the water. George began to laugh, but I got angry. "What's so funny here?" I asked
angrily. But he laughed still louder. I took a long stick and got the shirt out of the water. When I
had the shirt back, I looked at it and saw that it did not belong to me. It was George's. Now I
started to laugh too. I looked at George's shirt again, then at George who was still laughing and
laughed so loudly that the shirt fell out of my hands into the water again. "Why are you throwing
it into the water?" asked George who was still laughing. I couldn't explain it to him at once as I
was also laughing, but a few minutes later I said at last, "It isn't my shirt. It is yours." George
turned pale. "What?" he cried, "Is that really so? Why couldn't you dress on the bank?" and he
added, "Give me the stick quickly. I'll get it out." It was all very funny, but this time George said
in an angry voice, "There is nothing funny about it."
(After Three Men in a Boat by Jerome K. Jerome.)
11. Make an essay on one of the given topics.
1. How You Saw Your Friend Off
to see off, to get tired, to have a rest, to be late, to hurry, to notice, to give sb. a lift, to come in
time, to explain, in the company of ..., on board the ship, to go on board, to tell you the truth, to
say good-bye.

145

2. My Trip to England
after the university, with interest, to explain, to belong, an owner, at 3 (4,5) o'clock sharp, to get
on board a ship (a plane), to visit, to attend, to continue, to add, on board the ship, to make out,
to go sightseeing, to be (to get) tired.
3. How I Met My Friend
to happen, to examine, with interest, to touch, to recognize, to laugh with joy, to explain, haven't
seen you for ages, for a while, to continue, to have a talk, to have a rest, to have a good time, to
go sightseeing.
12. Make by 5 sentences with each of the given examples.
a) When did the teacher explain these rules to you?
b) The teacher explained these rules to us last week (yesterday, two days ago, etc.).
c) The teacher has explained these rules to us this week (this month, this year, etc.).
d) The teacher has already explained these rules to us (just, never, not yet, etc.).
e) How many new rules has the teacher explained to you since the first of September (since you
began to study, for the last two
months, etc.)?
f) The teacher was explaining a new rule when Pete asked him a question (at nine o'clock
yesterday).

146

ANNEX for Russian students


INTRODUCTORY COURSE
LESSON II
Vocabulary

a pen
a tie
a name
my - , , ,
a map
a plan

to find -
to send - ,
to meet -
to tell - ,
five -
nine -

6. Translate ().
1. . . 2. - . . 3.
. 4. . , . 5.
, . 6. . . . 7.
. 8. . 9. , . 10. .
LESSON III
Vocabulary

economics
a student - ()
a friend - ,
a flat
a town
to study - ,

to like -
large - ()
clean - ()
beautiful - ()
from - ,

8. Translate ().
1. . 2. ? . 3. 6. 4.
. 5. . 6. . 7.
. 8. ? . 9. . 10. .
11. . 12. ? 10. 13. ?
14. . 15. (at reading).

147

LESSON IV
Vocabulary
a friend - ,
a doctor
a student - ()
a teacher
a room
a table -

a cup -
a spoon -
to put - ,
to thank -
now -

7. Translate ().
a) 1. ? . . . 2. ,
, . 3. ? . 4.
. , , . . 5.
. 6. , , . 7. - .
. . 8. ?
b) . . . . .
. . .
, , , .
, .
, .
, , , .
?
.
LESSON V
Vocabulary
English
a class
a classroom -
a wall -
a floor
a ceiling
a door
a window
a chair
a blackboard
a piece -
chalk
a word
a question

at home -
small - ()
light - ()
clean - ()
new - ()
blue - (),()
brown - ()
white - ()
to take - ,
to write -
but -
a newspaper -
interesting - ()
What kind of... ? - , , ?

7. Translate ().
. ? .
? , . 2. ? .
? . 3. ? . 4. ,
148

. . , . 5. ,
. 6. . 7.
? . 8. , . 9.
. 10. ? .
11. .

BASIC COURSE
LESSON ONE (THE FIRST LESSON)
ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to study - ,
foreign - ()
a language -
to live -
(the) centre -
to work (at) - (, )
an office -
also - ,
many -
few -
morning
in the morning
in the evening
every evening -
usually -
sometimes -

often -
seldom -
always -
a textbook -
an exercise -
an exercise-book -
during -
a sentence -
a dictation -
to speak (to) -
Romanian -
French -
after -
before -
when -
*

6. Translate these sentences. Use the right tense form.


1. , . 2.
? 3. ? 4. ,
, . 5.
? . 6. , . 7.
. 8.
. 9. ? . 10.
? . 11.
? 12. ? . 13.
. 14. ? 15.
?
*
*
*
12. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. ? . 2.
. 3. ,
-. 4. (very) .
. 5. ?
149

-. -.
. 6. - . . 7. .
. 8. ? , .
9. ? , .
. . 10. ? .
11. ? . ?
. 12. ? 13.
? .
. 14. . .
(quiet) . . .
. . . -
. 15. ? .
? , . ? .
? . ? .
? ,
, .
? . ?
. - -
? -, -.

LESSON TWO (THE SECOND LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

second -
an economist -
together
already
to know -
very
well -
a magazine -
a letter -
a firm -
to translate -
a telegram -
German -

to get -
time
to be in time -
home -
a home-task -
a homework
to prepare
to prepare for
to learn -
to repeat -
a rule -
about -
how -
*

5. Translate.
1. ? 2. . 3.
. 4. ?
. 5. ? . 6.
, . 7. ? 8.
. 9. .
, . 10.
150

? . 11. -. 12.
? 13. ? .
? . 14.
? 15. ? 16.
. .
11. Translate and pay attention to the bold words.
) 1. ? , -. 2.
. 3. -
. 4. .
5. . 7. . 8.
. .
b) 1. ? 2. . 3.
? 4. .
*

12. Translate.
1. ? . ( )?
. 2. K ?
. 3. ? . 4.
? . 5.
? 6. . 7.
? . . 8.
. . 9.
. . 10. .
. 11. -
. 12. .
. 13. ? , . 14.
? ? . 15.
? . ?
. 16. . 17.
? . 18.
? .
. 19. ? 20.
, . 21. . 22.
-. . 23.
. .

LESSON THREE (THE THIRD LESSON)


151

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a working day -
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
article
colleague
to walk - ,
to answer -

to discuss -
to finish -
to stay -
to return - -
at five oclock -
in the afternoon -
near (ant. far) - (. )
hard -
other - , ,
only -
to last -
*

6. Translate.
a) 1. ()? . 2.
? . 3. ?
. 4. ? . 5.
? . 6.
? . 7. ? . 8.
? . 9. ? 10.
? . 11. ?
.
b) 1. . 2. . 3.
? . 4. . 5.
? . 6. . 7.
? . 8.
. 9. ? .
.
*

12. Translate.
) 1. ? . 2.
( ) . . 3.
? , .
. 4. ? .
. 5. ?
. . 6.
? . .
. ? . 7.
? . 8. .
. 9.
? . 10. ? .
? . .
? 7 . 11.
? . () 6
. . 12.
152

, . 13. ? .
() . 14. . 15.
? . 16.
. (park).
(e-mails) . .
. (seldom) . 17. , . 18.
.
b) ? .
? . ,
.
? 5 .
? .
. ?
. ? ,
, .
? . , ,
.
. ?
. . ?
. ? .

LESSON FOUR (THE FOURTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

yesterday -
the day before yesterday -
last night -
last month -
last week -
last year -
last time - ()
... days (years, months, etc.) ago - ... / ( / , , ..)
*

1. Translate into English and make the Past Indefinite Tense.


, , , , , , , ,
, , , , , ( ), , ,
, , , , , , , , ,
, , .
*

7. Translate.
, , , ,
, , , , ,
.
*
*
*
153

11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses.


1. ? . 2.
? .
? .
. 3. ? 4. ?
. 5. ?
. 6. ? .
. 7.
? .
. 8. ?
. ? .
. 9. ?
. ? . ,
. 10. -,
. 11. ? .
? . 12.
(writer). . . 13.
? .
14. ? .
*

12. Translate the dialogues.


) , ? . .
? .
? .
. , .
? . , -.
.
? . .
.
b) ? .
? , , ,
.
?
.
? .
?
.
?
, ,
.
-? ?
. .
? ,
.
? .
.
LESSON FIVE (THE FIFTH LESSON)
154

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to see -
a theatre -
to go to see -
a cinema -
to come to see -
to like -
a family -
to want -
to decide -
weather -
to spend -
so - ,
till -
today -
to wake up -
to skate -
to get up -
to ski -
late
to have a nice time -
early
to play
to wash - ,
computer games -
to dress -
interesting - ()
then - ,
to begin -
to have breakfast -
about nine -
... dinner -
to be over -
... supper -
to be glad -
to go to the country - once
at once - ,
*

2. Translate.
) 1. . 2. . 3. . 4.
. 5. . 6. . 7.
. 8. . 9. . 10.
. 11. . 12. . 13. . 14.

b) 1. . 2. . 3. . 4.
. 5. . 6.
. 7. .
*
*
*
5. Translate paying attention to the use of possessive case.
1. ? , . 2.
. 3. . 4.
? . 5.
-? , . 6. ? . 7. ? .
? . 8.
? . 9. ? , .
10. ? .
*

12. Translate paying attention to the pronouns in object case.


155

1. . 2. . 3.
. 4. : ?" 5.
? . 6.
. 7.
. 8. ? . 9.
. 10.
.
*

15. Translate.
1. ? . .
() . 2. ?
. . 3.
? . ? , .
? . 4.
. ,
. . 5.
? . 6. ? .
(this year). . 7.
. . 8.
.
. . .
. 9. ,
. 10. , . 11.
? , .
. 12. ?
. 13. ? , .
. . 14.
. , . , , ,
. . .
. , (a
little). , .
. , . 15.
? , .
16. . . .
. .

LESSON SIX (THE SIXTH LESSON)

156

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

large ()
a wife -
children
young ()
old - ,
a woman -
an university -
a daughter -
a girl of ten -
primary school -
to work at school -
to go to school -
a subject -
to make -
a mistake -
as a rule - ...
bad ()
a pupil - /
to help -
a mother -
a father -

a son -
to be born -
kindergarten -
soon -
to graduate (from) -
parents - ()
a husband -
a brother -
summer -
in (the) summer -
winter -
spring -
autumn -
a grandmother -
a grandfather -
a grandchild -
again - ,
in a week -
tomorrow -
the day after tomorrow -

*
*
*
5. Translate paying attention to the use of Future Indefinite Tense.
1. . 2.
. 3. . 4.
. 60 . 5. .
. 6. ?
. 7. -. 8.
? . 9.
. . 10.
? . 11. ?
. 12. ?
. 13.
. 14. .
. 15. .
. 16. ?
. 17. ,
. 18. . 19.
? . 20. ?
.
*

13. Translate. Pay attention to the meaning of the given words.

157

a) to make, to do.
1. . . 2.
. 3.
? . 4.
? 5. (on this subject)? .
b) to tell, to speak.
1. -. 2.
. 3. . 4. .
5. . 6. ,
.
c) many, much, few, little
1. ? 2. ? 3.
. 4. ? 5.
? 6.
. 7. ? 8.
( )? . 9.
?
*

16. Translate.
1. . . .
. 2. , . 3.
. . .
. 4. . .
. .
. 5. .
. . 6. ? .
. . 7.
? : . 8.
. , .
. 9. .
. . , ,
. , -.
. 10. ,
. .
. . 11.
. . 12.
. .
, . . 13.
. 14. .
. . 15.
, . 16. ?
. ? . 17. ?
1986 . 18. . 19.
, , ? 20.
, , ?
. 21. ?
. 22. , ,

158

(in time). 23.


.
*
*
17. Translate the following text and retell it.

. . 40 , 35.
. (factory).
. . . .
.
. . .
. (a garden). .

LESSON SEVEN (THE SEVENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a manager -
a company -
to move - ,
comfortable - ()
a building - ,
the third floor -
a picture - ,
too
enough -
workspace -
a window -
opposite -
a balcony -
a view -
a street -
the main street -
greenish
a poster - ,
furniture
a desk -
a fax -
a telephone -
a desk lamp -
right -
to the right -
left -
to the left -
a corner -

a bookcase -
adjustable -
a shelf -
(the) middle -
in the middle -
round - ()
important - ()
a meeting - ,
tablecloth -
a vase -
a flower -
an armchair -
a chair -
a sofa -
a study - ()
a thing - ,
a kitchen -
a bedroom -
a bathroom -
a dining room -
a writing table -
a radio set -
a television set -
paperwork -
to prepare -
different - ()
a project -
*

4. Translate using There is or There are.


159

) 1. . 2. (a group) ,
. 3. ? ,
. 4. . 5. . 6.
? . 7.
? . ?
. 8. ?
. 9. ? ,
10. . 11.
.
b) 1. .
.
.
2. .
.
.
3. .
e .
.
4. .
.
.
5. .
.
.
c) 1. . 2. . 3.
. 4. . 5. . 6.
. 7. . 8. . 9.
. 10. . 11.
. 12. .
*

16. Translate
1. ? . 2.
? . 3.
. 4. . 5. ?
. 6.
? . ? .
? . 7. .
. . .
. 8. . ,
. ? .
? . 9. ,
. 10. ? . 11.
. ? 12.
160

. . 13. ? (map)
. ? . 14.
, . 15. .
. 16. .
? , . .
17. . .
. . , . 18. 100- . ?
. 19. .
. 20. ? . .
? , . 21.
. 22.
? . 23. ? .
. 24. ? ,
. 25.
. 26. .
. 27.
. . 28.
.

LESSON EIGHT (THE EIGHTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a library -
a librarian -
people - ,
to attend -
so - ()
literature
history
geography
a book by... - ...
childhood
difficult - ()
easy - ()
with interest -
right - ,

wrong -
all right - !
all -
to show -
a TV show -
to bring -
to go away -
to be sorry (of) - (/)
to advise -
to leave - ,
any - -
some -
one of - /
some (any) of -
*

4. Translate using:
a) some or any.
1. . 2.
- ? . 3. . 4.
- ? . . 5.
. 6.
. 7. - ?
, . 8.
. 9.
-
161

? . 10. () .
11. - ? , . 12.
. 13.
.
b) one of or some of.
1. . . 2.
. 3.
. 4. .
. . 5. . 6.
. . 7. . . 8.
. 9. . 10. .
, ( ) . 11. .
.
c) nouns denoting sciences or subjects.
1. . . 2.
(a lecture on) ? . 3. ,
. 4.

. 5. ? .
6. ? . 7.
.
*

15. Translate.
1. () . 2.
? 3. ,
. 4. ,
. 5. .
. . 6.
? 7.
. . 8. ?
. 9. -
? . .
. 10. ? . 11.
, .
. . 12. -
? ,
. . 13. .
. 14. - ? . 15.
() .
. 16. . . 17. ? . . 18.
. 19. -
? , , - . ,
. 20. - ? .
. 21. .
*
16. Translate and retell the following text.

162

. .
, .
.
.
(a reading hall). ,
. .
. ,
, , . (the
most known) : , , , .
, .
.
. .

LESSON NINE (THE NINTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a talk -
can -
hallo -
must -
why -
may -
because, as -
certainly -
a lecture -
a place -
to feel -
to come to his place
a to feel bad -
at my place - (...)
to feel well -
to get to a place -
even -
a trolley bus -
high - ()
to go by trolley bus -
a high temperature - a trolley bus stop - .
low - ()
a bus -
tall - () -
a station -
note -
to hurry -
to make notes -
to forget -
that
to remember -
if
to ring up -
ill - ()
good-bye - !
sick - ()
so long - !
*
*
*
4. Translate paying attention to the use of modal verbs.
) 1. -.
. 2. . . 3.
? , . 4. ,
. 5. . . 6.
? 7. ? . 8.
(reading)? 9. ,
. . 10.
? . 11. . .
163

. 12. ? .
.
b) 1. ? ( ) 2. ? 3.
? 4. , .
5. ? 6. . , . 7.
? 8.
.
*

6. Translate using if, that, as, because.


1. ? ,
. 2. ? ,
. 3. ?
, . 4. , . 5.
, . 6. , . 7.
, . 8.
, . 9.
, . 10. ,
. 11. , . 12. ,
? 13. , .
14. . 15. ,
.
*

15. Translate using it takes.


1. . , . 2.
, ?
. 3. , ?
. 4. ,
? . 5. ,
? .
*
*
*
17. Translate paying attention to the meaning of the following words.
) good, well, bad, badly.
1. ? 2.
. 3. .
, . 4.
, . 5.
. 6. . 7. . 8.
, . 9. ,
.
b) very, very much.
1. . 2. .
. 3. . 4. . 5.
. .
c) can, may.
164

1. ? 2.
. . 3.
? ,
. 4. ? 5.
? , . 6.
? 7. ? 8. .
9. ? . 10. -,
.
*
*
*
18. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. ! ? . , .
? (), .
. 2. ? ? .
. 3. ?
, .
? 20 . 4.
? . . ,
. 5. . 6.
. 7. . . 8.
. . 9.
? . . . 10.
. . 11.
, ?
, . 12.
. ? .

LESSON TEN (THE TENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

dear
at last
to be busy
to be free
an examination
to take an examination
to pass an examination
to examine
quite
at all
a rest-home
a holiday
to have a good time
a sea
to swim
(the) sun
to lie
to lie in the sun
either (.)
165

health
still ,
poor
rich
to hope
to intend
a river
a forest
(the) beginning
(the) end
at the beginning
at the end
a university-year
to think
a visit
to visit
to hear
to hear from
a departure

6. Translate into English paying attention to the following word combinations:


) take an examination, to pass an examination.
1. ? ,
. ? . . 2.
? ,
. . 3.
? . . .
. 4.
? . .
. . 5.
? 40- . 6. ,
.
b) Else, still
1. ? 2. ? 3.
? 4. ? . 5.
? 6. ? 7.
? 8. ? . 9.
? 10. . 11. ?
12. ? 13. ? 14.
? , . 15. ? .
c) visit, to attend.
1. ? . 2.
, . 3.
. . 4.
, , ,
. 5. . 6.
. .
d) Quite, at all.
1. . 2. . 3.
. 4. , . 5.
( ). 6.
. 7. . 8. . ,
? 9. . . 10. ,
.
e)
Too, also, either.
1. . 2.
? 3. ? 4. ? 5.
? 6. . 7.
. 8. ,
. 9. . 10. .
f)

In, for, on, at, to.

166

1. . 2.
. 3. . ,
. 4. . ()
. , . 5.
. 6. ? 7.
. 8. ,
. 9. 2000 . 10.
?
. 11. ! ? 12.
. ,
. 13. -
? 14. . 15. ? 16.
. 17.
? 18.
?
*
*
*
8. Translate into English the following verbs and give their three forms.
, , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , ,
, , .
9. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
) 1. ? ,
. 2. . ,
. . 3.
? , (yet) e (this
week). . 4. ?
. 5. ?
. 6. .
. 7. ?
. , . . 8.
. 9. ? .
. . . 10.
? 11. ? ,
. , .
. 12. .
. 13.
?
. 14.
?
b) . ( )
. , , ,
. ()
, ( )
: , , .
c) ,
167

, ,
. , , .
. ,
.
(country-house), .
, . .
. . ()
. . ,
. .
? ,
.
.
, .

LESSON ELEVEN (THE ELEVENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

clever
a weather
fellow
to rain ()
to show
nearly
kind (adj.)
beautiful
to retire on a pension
a journey
a non-governmental organization
to help
to recognize
thats why
straight
a reputation
wide
as (prep.)
a square
a delegate ,
a garden
an exhibition
a hospital
to listen to
a hotel
a story
an underground
a capital
a suburb
to try
in the suburbs
a place
dirty
a lot of
narrow
amazing
important
a tourist
financial
industrial
*
*
*
5. Translate paying attention to the use of the verbs to go and to come.
1. . , , .
. 2. , (corridor).
, . 3.
. 4. . .
. 5. . . 6. .
, . 7. .
. 8. . .
168

. 9. 49 . 10.
. .
*
*
*
10. Translate the sentences using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. ? 2.
. (
). 3. ?
. 4.
. . .
. . 5.
. 6.
. 7.
. . . 8.
. . 9.
. 10. , . .
11. ? . 12.
, .
. 13. ? . 14.
. 15. . 16.
. . 17.
. 18. () .
19. ? . 20.
. . 21.
(England).
11. Translate the following text and retell it.
.
. . ,
. 20 . 1998 .
2004 ., , , .
. ,
. .
, , .
. ,
.

LESSON TWELVE (THE TWELFTH LESSON)


169

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

meal
past
without
tea
a cup of tea
hungry
to be hungry
to be thirsty
alone
to join
a restaurant
a waitress
a waiter
to come up
a fork
a knife
a plate ,
soup
salad
meat
potato(es)

ice-cream
never
coffee
sweet
enough
salt
sugar
to pass
bread
brown bread
white bread
course
sweets
to buy
to sell
to be back
a cake
to talk
a little
to smoke

when
as soon as
till, until (conj.)
before (conj.)
after (conj.)
while
later
*

2. Translate in English.
1. . 2. T
. 3. . 4. . 5.
. 6. . 7.
. .
-. 8. . ,
. 9. . 10. ,
.
*
*
*
5. Translate paying attention to the use of Present Simple Tense in clauses of time and
condition.
1. , ? 2.
, . 3. , . 4.
, . 5. ( reading-room)

170

, . 6. ,
( ). 7. , .
*

7. Translate.
1. (bus-stop) ,
, . 2. .
. 3. ,
. 4. ? . .
5. .
*
*
*
16. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. , . ,
. 2. ? , .
. , . 3. ? .
. , , , .
4. . . ,
, . 5. , ,
. , . 6. ? 7.
? , , .
. 8. . .
. 9. . . 10.
, , . ,
. 11. ,
, . 12. . 13. ,
. 14. , , , (
). 15. ,
. 16. , . 17.
? . 18. ,
, . 19. .
. 20. ? ,
, . 21. -? ,
.

171

LESSON THIRTEEN (THE THIRTEENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a friend of mine
native
to pack
a box
to smile
a face
happy
to travel
different ,
a shirt
trousers
a dress
a hat
a suit
a coat
a shoe
other (another)
a suit-case
besides (adv.)
a shop

food
to go shopping
to do some shopping
an address
to be in a hurry
to wait (for)
to say good-bye
fruitful
fruitless (ant.)
a salesman
a saleswoman
to try on
to be out
to be in
to cost
to pay
dear
expensive
cheap
*

2. Translate in English.
) , , , , ,
, , (), ,
, , , , , , .
b) , , .
*
*
*
6. Translate paying attention to the verb tense form.
) 1. ? .
. 2. , , .
. . 3.
? . . 75 . 4. ,
? . . . 5.
? . .
b) ( ) ,
.
. , (warm) .
( ). ,
(a hall) . . .
, .
. .
*
*
*
8. Translate paying attention to the possessive pronouns.
172

1. . (warm). 2.
, ? 400
, 350. 3. , . 4.
, . 5. ,
. 6. , .
. 7. . . . 8. 700
. ? 9.
. 10. , .
*
*
*
19. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. , .
. . 2. !
. . ? 3.
. , .
. . (
) , . 4. ,
. 5. . ? 6.
! , .
, ,
, . 7. ,
. ? ,
. , - .
, . 8. .
. 9. , , ,
. 10.
. , .
! (dean) . 11. ,
. . 12. , , . ?
. 250 . ,
. 13. . .
, , . 14.
? . .
. 15. .
. 50 , 65.

LESSON FOURTEEN (THE FOURTEENTH LESSON)


173

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a captain
a voyage
to make a voyage
(the) following
a ship
such
strange
to sleep
to be fast asleep
to fall asleep
to fall ill
a night
at night
in the daytime
a voice
in a loud (low) voice
an ear
an eye

to sail
the North
the South
the West
the East
a direction
to excuse (for)
that is why
to be angry (with sb)
to order
through
to look through
a boat
to save
to reach
suddenly
to cry out
loudly

*
*
*
5. Translate in English paying attention to the use of tenses.
) 1. , (to put) ,
. 2. , ? 3. ,
? 4. ? .
5. . ?
b) 1. . .
. 2. ?
. 3. ,
. . 4.
. .
*

12. Translate using:


) such or so.
1. ! 2. !
3. , . 4.
, . 5. ! 6.
! 7. (salty), . 8.
! 9. ,
. 10. ! , . 11.
?
b) to hurry or to be in a hurry.
1. ? , . 2.
, . 3. ,
. 4. , ,
. 5. , . 6.
174

? . . 7.
, .
*
*
*
18. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. , ,
. 2. , :
. 3. ? ,
. 4. ,
, (almost) . 5. ? 6.
? . 7.
. 8. . ,
- . 9.
? 10. . . 11.
, , . ? 12.
? . ,
. , ,
. 13. ,
. 14. , . 15.
. . 16.
() . 17.
, , , , . 18.
, ,
. 19. , ? .
. 20.
() . (several) , . 21.
, . 22.
. . 23.
, .
.
19. Translate the text below and retell it.
. .
: , .
, "
. , .
" .
. : !
!" ", .
() (the bank) .
. ,
. : , ,
". . ",
. , ...
. (to become, became)
.
- .
LESSON FIFTEEN (THE FIFTEENTH LESSON)
175

ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to travel about
to travel in the mountains
to rise
to set ( )
behind
from behind
a mountain
a train
by train
a tourist
still ,
in front of
famous
to be famous

to turn over
down
a language
world
a settler
a region
to differ
to stop ()
a relative
to fly
high
over ,
a lake
*

2. Translate paying attention:


) to the use of the definite article with geographical nouns.
1. : , , , , . 2.
, . .
3. ( ) , ,
. 4. .
. . 5.
, . 6.
. ,
. . 7. ?
: , , , . 8. :
? 9. : ?
. 10. : ,
. .
b) to the use of one.
1. . 2. . 3.
. 4. , . 5.
. 6.
. 7. , . 8.
: .
*
*
*
11. Translate using yet, still, else, other, some more or one more.
1. . 2. ? 3. ?
4. . 5. . 6.
() ? 7. ? 8.
? 9. . 10. ,
. 11. ,
. 12. ? 13.
. 14. , . 15.
176

? 16. . . 17. .
.
*
*
*
13. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. ( )
. . ,
. 2. . ,
. 3. , , . 4.
, , ,
. , (right)
() . , . 5. ,
, , .
( ), ,"
. 6. . .
.
. 7. ?
, . .
8. ! 9.
. , . 10.
. , .
. 11. .
16 , . . 12.
. ,
. 13.
?" . 14.
, . 15. (Turn on), , . ,
. 16. , . .
17. , , .

LESSON SIXTEEN (THE SIXTEENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

youth
popular
a novel
a novelist
noisy
active
capable
at the age (of)
at an early age
about (adv.)
own
ready
to be (get) ready (for)
to enjoy
a performance

besides (prep.)
several
to turn to sb. for sth.
money
except
to pay
to earn one's living
British
a way
by the way
on one's way
an education
to describe
such as
to die
177

to move
*

4. Translate in English.
1. , . 2. - ,
. . 3. , .
. 4. , . 5.
- . 6. . -
. 7. - . 8. . .
9. ? - ? 10.
, . 11. -
? 12. - . 13.
- ? 14.
. 15. - ? 16.
? ? 17.
", . 18. -
? 19. .
*
*
12. Translate using to speak, to talk, to tell, to say.

1. , . 2. ,
. 3. ",
. 4. .
. 5. ?
. 6. , . 7. ?
, . . 8. , ,
. 9. - . 10.
, , . 11.
. 12. - -? 13.
- ? 14. . 15.
. , -. 16. , , ,
. 17. ? 18. - ? 19. ,
. 20.
, ? 21.
(match)? 22. ,
, (to keep) .
*
*
*
15. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. -
?" . , , .
". 2.
, . -
. 3. , .
, . 4. ,
. ,
. 5.
. ,
178

. 6. ,
. 7. -
? . 25 30 . 8. ,
? 9. , . .
10. ? . 11.
, . ,
. 12. ? .
. 13. ,
. 14. . ,
, . 15. , .
. , . 16.
. . 17.
? ? 18.
. , . 19.
, , ? .
, , . 20.
, , . , . 21.
, .

LESSON SEVENTEEN (THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

to forget
quiet
rather
to keep ,
to redo
wrong
brilliant
an idea
to obey
to look for
an escape
to allow
a prisoner
a conversation ,
to take breath

to explain (to)
to tremble
to hide
to be silent
a sound
a whisper
until
to understand
to make out
entire
sad
gay
to give up
true ,
*

6. Translate in English.
1. ? , .
. 2. , ,
. 3.
, , . 4.
, . 5.
, . 6. ,
. , . 7.
, , . 8.
179

, . 9. ,
; . 10.
, ,
. 11. ,
, (brightly)
. 12. ? , ,
. 13. .
(). 14.
. . 15.
. .
*
*
*
20. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. - (was wrong with) .
, . 2. ,
. . . 3.
? . 4.
: ? . ,
. . 5. . .
? 6. , ,
. ? , , . 7.
.
, . 8. 23? ,
. ? ! . 9. ,
( ). ,
, . 10. ,
. 11. ? . .
. 12. ,
. , . 13.
, .
. , ().
.

LESSON EIGHTEEN (THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a neighbour
a member
local
to use
to call ,
to fight
to believe
correctly
among
to defend
bravely
a soldier
fierce

to admit
to defeat
anxiously
to hand in
a triumph
an enemy
to turn (to)
a shock
hate -
to kill
to turn round
to return
himself
180

a battle
to liberate

to risk
to destroy
*

3. Translate.
b) into English.
, (tune), k, ,
, , , .
4. Translate using Past Indefinite Tense or Present Perfect Tense.
1. , . 2.
? . 3. ?
. 4. .
. , , .
11. Translate paying attention to the use of tenses
) 1. , . . 2.
?
. 3. .
, . 4. ?
? 5. . ,
( ). 6. ?
? 7. , .
. 8. , . 9.
? . - ?
b) 1. .
, . 2. , :
. ? 3.
. 4. ? 5.
, () , , . 6.
, . 7.
. 8. - !" .
." 9. , ,
. 10. .
. 11. ?
. , . . 12.
. ?
*
*
*
20. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. ? . 2.
? . 3. ? .
. . 4.
, , , . 5. ,
. 6. ? .
? 7. , ,
. 8. ( ) .
181

, . 9.
" ? . . 10.
? ? . ,
. . 11. ,
. . .
12. : - , ".
13. , ...", . 14. ?
? ! 15. - ?
? 16. ?
. . 17. , , ,
. . 18. ,
( ).
( , )", . 19.
. .

LESSON NINETEEN (THE NINETEENTH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

a drummer
a band
to make up ones mind
both of them
upstairs
especially
to set up
a party
to celebrate -
an anniversary
sharp
a guest
former

pleasant -
no more
no longer
a hundred
to joke
to dance
under
since
for ages
for years
to see the New Year in
elder
any more (.)
*

4. Translate
1. , . 2.
. 3. , ( )
. 4. ,
? 5.
. 6. ,
. 7. 15- . 8.
, . 9.
1995 . 10. .
! 11. . . 12.
, ! 13.
. 14. . 15.
, ?
*

*
182

15. Translate paying attention to:


) the use of it.
1. . . . 2. . ? .
. 3. ? , . 4.
. . 5. ,
. 6. , . 7. ,
? 8. ? 9. ,
. 10. . .
? 11. ? 12. .
. ! 13. ? , .
. 14. ?
. 15. , ,
.
b) the use of more.
1. ? 2. ? 3.
, . 4.
? 5. . 6.
? 7. . 8.
", . 9. .
. 10. . . 11.
, . 12. , . 13.
?
*
*
*
17. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.
1. ? .
, . 2.
? . 3.
. .
. . .
? . . 4.
. . 5.
? , . . 6.
? . . 7. , ,
. 8. ? 1998 .
? 2003 . - ?
9. - ? . 10.
, , . 11.
, ,
. 12. ? . 13.
? !
, . , . 14.
, ,
. 15. ? 16.
. ,
. 17. , - .
18. Translate and retell the following text.

183

, ,
.
. , .
. , ,
.
, , .
, :
, , . , .
, .
."
, .
, .
, .
, : , ..."
. .
, , .
? . ?
. .
? . .
? .
. , .

LESSON TWENTY (THE TWENTIETH LESSON)


ACTIVE WORDS AND WORD COMBINATIONS

of coarse
a flag
a key
to notice
cut-off
a company
a legend
an origin
terrible
to belong
to jump
toward(s)
to touch
a side

a hand
to get tired
wild
to draw out
to throw
to lift
on board
a wound
to dress ones wound
a lip
for a while
to add
true
*

9. Translate using the active vocabulary of the lesson.


1. , , . 2.
. . , ()
. 3. ? 4. , !
184

. 5. ? , - .
, . 6.
. . 7. ,, ,
", . 8.
() ,
. 9. ?
. 10. -
? 11. ? ,
. 12. ! 13. ,
, . 14.
. 15. , . .
. 16. () , .
, . . ,
. 17. ?
. . 18. ,
, ? 19. ,
, , .
, . 20.
, , . 21. ,
. 22. ,, .
", . 23. , .
24. , .

185